CL4NX-J/CL6NX-J
Table of Contents
Before You Start......................................................................................................... 8
About This Manual............................................................................................................................. 8
Features of the Product..................................................................................................................... 9
Safety Precautions........................................................................................................................... 10
Precautions for Installation and Handling........................................................................................ 15
Select a Safe Location................................................................................................................15
Power Supply.............................................................................................................................. 16
Printing.........................................................................................................................................17
Regulatory Approval......................................................................................................................... 18
Environmentally Hazardous Materials..............................................................................................21
Copyrights/Limitation of Liability/Trademarks...................................................................................22
Copyrights....................................................................................................................................22
Limitation of Liability....................................................................................................................23
Trademarks.................................................................................................................................. 24
Basic Information..................................................................................................... 25
Bundled Accessories........................................................................................................................ 25
Optional Devices.............................................................................................................................. 26
Parts Identification............................................................................................................................ 28
Parts Identification for the Printer............................................................................................... 28
Front View.............................................................................................................................. 28
Rear View............................................................................................................................... 29
Internal View...........................................................................................................................30
Parts Identification for the Operator Panel................................................................................. 31
Using the Operator Panel................................................................................................................ 33
Display and Operation of the Operator Panel............................................................................ 33
LED Indicator..........................................................................................................................33
Operations in Online/Offline Mode.........................................................................................33
Status Icon............................................................................................................................. 35
Operations When Errors Occur............................................................................................. 40
Guidance Videos.................................................................................................................... 44
Adjusting the Print Settings During Printing.......................................................................... 49
Canceling the Print Job..........................................................................................................50
Settings Mode..............................................................................................................................51
Settings Mode Menus............................................................................................................ 51
Changing to the Settings Mode............................................................................................. 51
Logging In to/Logging Out of the Settings Mode...................................................................53
Item Selection.........................................................................................................................53
Setting Value Input or Selection............................................................................................ 55
Printer Memory and USB Memory...................................................................................................60
Getting Started......................................................................................................... 61
Installation.........................................................................................................................................61
Installation Precautions............................................................................................................... 61
Installation Space........................................................................................................................ 63
Front View.............................................................................................................................. 63
Side View............................................................................................................................... 64
Bottom View........................................................................................................................... 65
Powering On/Off the Printer.............................................................................................................67
2
Connecting the Power Cord........................................................................................................67
Powering On the Printer............................................................................................................. 69
Powering Off the Printer..............................................................................................................70
Initial Setup (Startup Guide).............................................................................................................72
Overview of the Startup Guide................................................................................................... 73
Startup Screen.............................................................................................................................77
Language Selection.....................................................................................................................78
Region Setting with Optional RTC Kit........................................................................................ 79
City Setting with Optional RTC Kit..............................................................................................80
Date Setting with Optional RTC Kit............................................................................................ 81
Time Setting with Optional RTC Kit............................................................................................ 82
Print Method Setting....................................................................................................................83
Ribbon Setting............................................................................................................................. 84
Media Sensor Type Setting.........................................................................................................85
Media Setting...............................................................................................................................86
Completion of Initial Setup Screen............................................................................................. 88
Startup Guide Cancelation.......................................................................................................... 89
Configuring the Printer According to Media and Options................................................................ 90
Print Method................................................................................................................................ 91
Media Sensor Type..................................................................................................................... 94
Print Mode................................................................................................................................... 98
Connecting the Printer to a Computer........................................................................................... 102
Procedure for Connecting the Printer to a Computer............................................................... 103
Connecting Interfaces................................................................................................................104
Available Interfaces.............................................................................................................. 104
USB Interface Connection (Standard)................................................................................. 105
LAN Interface Connection (Standard)..................................................................................105
Bluetooth Interface Connection (Standard)..........................................................................106
NFC Interface Connection (Standard)................................................................................. 106
RS-232C Interface Connection (Standard).......................................................................... 107
IEEE1284 Interface Connection (Standard).........................................................................108
Wireless LAN Interface Connection (Optional).................................................................... 109
Configuring the Interface Settings.............................................................................................111
Interface Setting Methods.................................................................................................... 111
Configuring the Interface Settings from the Interface Menu of the Printer...........................111
Configuring the Interface Settings Using the All-In-One Tool.............................................. 114
Installing the Printer Driver....................................................................................................... 122
Basic Information about the Printer Driver.......................................................................... 122
Installing the Printer Driver (USB)....................................................................................... 122
Installing the Printer Driver (LAN/Wireless LAN)................................................................. 129
Installing the Printer Driver (Bluetooth)................................................................................135
Installing the Printer Driver (RS-232C)................................................................................ 148
Installing the Printer Driver (IEEE1284)...............................................................................155
Uninstalling the Printer Driver.............................................................................................. 161
Printer Driver Features..............................................................................................................164
Configuring the Printer Driver Settings as an Administrator................................................ 164
Configuring the Driver Settings............................................................................................169
Configuring the Printer Settings...........................................................................................171
Outputting a Label from an Application Software................................................................ 173
Printer Driver Sharing Function........................................................................................... 175
All-In-One Tool Features........................................................................................................... 177
Loading Media and Ribbon................................................................................... 178
Media, Ribbon and Print Methods................................................................................................. 178
Loading Media................................................................................................................................ 179
Usable Media.............................................................................................................................180
Adjusting the Position of the Media Sensor..............................................................................181
3
Loading the Media.....................................................................................................................182
Precautions for Loading the Media......................................................................................182
Loading the Media Roll........................................................................................................ 182
Loading the Fan-fold Media................................................................................................. 186
Loading the Media with the Optional Cutter Unit.................................................................187
Loading the Media with the Optional Dispenser Unit and Liner Discharge Outlet............... 193
Loading the Media with the Optional Dispenser Unit and Liner Discharge Rewinder.......... 196
Removing the Liner from the Rewinder...............................................................................201
Loading Ribbon.............................................................................................................................. 203
Checking the Ink Side of the Ribbon........................................................................................204
Loading the Ribbon................................................................................................................... 205
Replacing the Ribbon................................................................................................................209
When to Replace Media and Ribbon.............................................................................................213
Checking the Remaining Amount of Media and Ribbon...........................................................213
Conditions That Trigger Paper End, Label Near End, Ribbon End and Ribbon Near End........214
Conditions That Trigger Paper End..................................................................................... 214
Conditions That Trigger Label Near End............................................................................. 217
Conditions That Trigger Ribbon End................................................................................... 217
Conditions That Trigger Ribbon Near End.......................................................................... 217
Printer Settings.......................................................................................................218
The [Settings] Menu....................................................................................................................... 218
[Shortcut] Menu......................................................................................................................... 218
[Printing] Menu.......................................................................................................................... 219
[Label Length].......................................................................................................................220
[Label Width]........................................................................................................................ 221
[Auto Measure]..................................................................................................................... 222
[Ribbon]................................................................................................................................ 223
[Ribbon Near End]............................................................................................................... 223
[Speed]................................................................................................................................. 224
[Sensor Type]....................................................................................................................... 225
[Auto-mode].......................................................................................................................... 225
[Print Mode].......................................................................................................................... 226
[Backfeed].............................................................................................................................227
[Eject Cut].............................................................................................................................228
[Darkness Range].................................................................................................................228
[Darkness].............................................................................................................................229
[Imaging]............................................................................................................................... 229
[Advanced]............................................................................................................................232
[Interface] Menu.........................................................................................................................252
[Network]...............................................................................................................................253
[IEEE1284]............................................................................................................................345
[RS-232C]............................................................................................................................. 346
[USB].................................................................................................................................... 351
[Bluetooth].............................................................................................................................352
[NFC].................................................................................................................................... 359
[Ignore CR/LF]......................................................................................................................360
[Ignore CAN/DLE].................................................................................................................360
[External I/O]........................................................................................................................ 361
[RFID] (CL4NX only)............................................................................................................ 367
[Applications] Menu................................................................................................................... 380
[Protocol]...............................................................................................................................381
[SBPL]...................................................................................................................................382
[SZPL]...................................................................................................................................395
[SIPL].................................................................................................................................... 399
[STCL]...................................................................................................................................403
[SDPL].................................................................................................................................. 410
[SEPL]...................................................................................................................................424
4
[AEP].....................................................................................................................................428
[System] Menu...........................................................................................................................431
[Regional]..............................................................................................................................432
[Notifications]........................................................................................................................ 436
[Sound]................................................................................................................................. 443
[Energy Saving].................................................................................................................... 444
[LCD Brightness].................................................................................................................. 445
[Show Total Count]...............................................................................................................446
[Password]............................................................................................................................ 447
[Start on AC]........................................................................................................................ 450
[Tools] Menu.............................................................................................................................. 452
[Test Print]............................................................................................................................ 453
[HEX-Dump]..........................................................................................................................462
[Reset].................................................................................................................................. 469
[Profiles]................................................................................................................................473
[Certificates]..........................................................................................................................477
[Barcode Checker]................................................................................................................478
[Clone].................................................................................................................................. 488
[Startup Guide]..................................................................................................................... 489
[Information] Menu.....................................................................................................................490
[Help].................................................................................................................................... 491
[Build Version]...................................................................................................................... 496
[Applications]........................................................................................................................ 497
[Installation Log]................................................................................................................... 498
[Print Module]....................................................................................................................... 499
[Counters]............................................................................................................................. 501
[IPv4 Address]...................................................................................................................... 502
[IPv6 Address]...................................................................................................................... 502
[LAN MAC]........................................................................................................................... 503
[Wi-Fi MAC].......................................................................................................................... 503
[Wi-Fi Region].......................................................................................................................504
[Wi-Fi Status]........................................................................................................................504
[Wi-Fi Direct].........................................................................................................................505
[Wi-Fi Versions].................................................................................................................... 505
Configuring the Printer Settings from a Web Browser...................................................................506
Accessing to the Web Configuration Page............................................................................... 506
Dashboard................................................................................................................................. 508
Settings...................................................................................................................................... 510
Tools...........................................................................................................................................512
Certificates................................................................................................................................. 514
Various Ways to Output........................................................................................ 515
Outputting with General-purpose Software.................................................................................... 515
Outputting and Controlling with Dedicated Command...................................................................516
Controlling the Printer with External Signal................................................................................... 517
Printer Adjustments............................................................................................... 518
Printable Area.................................................................................................................................518
Media Sensor Positions and Media Stop Positions....................................................................... 520
Flow of Printing Operations............................................................................................................522
Printing Operations....................................................................................................................522
Operations in Continuous Mode............................................................................................... 523
Operations in Tear-Off Mode.....................................................................................................527
Operations in Cutter Mode........................................................................................................533
Operations in Dispenser Mode................................................................................................. 550
Operations in Linerless Mode (CL4NX only)............................................................................ 568
5
Operations for RFID Write (CL4NX only)................................................................................. 574
Operations When the Barcode Check Function Is Enabled..................................................... 580
Operations When the Media Sensor Is Disabled..................................................................... 585
Adjusting the Base Reference Point.............................................................................................. 586
About the Base Reference Point.............................................................................................. 586
Adjusting the Print Position....................................................................................................... 588
Adjusting the Media Stop Position............................................................................................591
Notes on the Stop/Cut Position of Different Media...................................................................594
Adjusting the Print Quality..............................................................................................................596
Adjusting the Print Darkness.................................................................................................... 596
Adjusting the Print Speed......................................................................................................... 599
Adjusting the Buzzer Volume......................................................................................................... 602
Adjusting the Head Pressure Balance........................................................................................... 604
Print Head Balance................................................................................................................... 604
Head Pressure Setting.............................................................................................................. 605
Pressure Balance Setting..........................................................................................................606
Configuring Optional RFID (CL4NX only)...................................................................................... 608
Types of Usable IC Tags and IC Cards....................................................................................608
Configuring the Printer to Encode Inlays.................................................................................. 609
Printing RFID Tag Errors...........................................................................................................613
RFID Error and Reset Timing................................................................................................... 619
External Signal (EXT) Interfaces When RFID Mode Is Enabled.............................................. 622
RFID Printing Tips..................................................................................................................... 624
Configuring Optional Barcode Check Function..............................................................................625
Basic Specifications of the Barcode Check Function............................................................... 625
Setting Up the Barcode Checker.............................................................................................. 632
Operational Settings for the Barcode Checker and Installation...........................................632
Changing How the RS-232C Interface is Used (When Using the KEYENCE Barcode
Checkers)............................................................................................................................. 633
Doing a Test Read with the Barcode Checker.................................................................... 635
Enabling the Barcode Check.................................................................................................... 639
Selecting the Barcode Check Mode.................................................................................... 639
Contents of the Check for Readable Mode and Comparison Mode.................................... 641
Restrictions for the Barcode Check Function........................................................................... 644
Initializing the Printer...................................................................................................................... 646
Procedures for Initializing..........................................................................................................646
Initializing Data Saved in the Printer................................................................................... 646
Initializing Data and Setting Values of the Printer............................................................... 649
Initializing Setting Values of the Printer............................................................................... 653
List of Initial Values................................................................................................................... 658
[Printing] Menu..................................................................................................................... 658
[Interface] Menu................................................................................................................... 661
[Applications] Menu.............................................................................................................. 673
[System] Menu..................................................................................................................... 676
[Tools] Menu......................................................................................................................... 678
[Information] Menu............................................................................................................... 681
Maintenance............................................................................................................ 682
Cleaning the Printer....................................................................................................................... 682
Cleaning.....................................................................................................................................682
Cleaning the Print Head and Platen Roller.............................................................................. 683
Cleaning Intervals.................................................................................................................683
Cleaning Using the Cleaning Kit..........................................................................................683
Cleaning the Optional Linerless Cutter Kit (CL4NX only).................................................... 686
Cleaning Using the Cleaning Sheet.....................................................................................687
Replacing Consumable Parts.........................................................................................................690
6
Replacing the Print Head..........................................................................................................690
Replacing the Platen Roller...................................................................................................... 692
Operating the Notification Screen of SOS (SATO Online Services) (SOS users only).................. 695
Operating the Notification Screen of the SOS (SATO Online Services) On-Demand Mode (SOS
users only)................................................................................................................................. 695
Operating the Date and Time Settings Notification Screen of SOS (SATO Online Services) (SOS
users only)................................................................................................................................. 697
SOS (SATO Online Services) Application (SOS users only)......................................................... 699
When You Are in Trouble...................................................................................... 700
When an Error Message Appears................................................................................................. 700
Error Message Indication and Operating Procedure When the SOS (SATO Online Services) Is
Enabled (SOS users only)............................................................................................................. 744
Contact Information for When You Are in Trouble.........................................................................746
Product Specifications...........................................................................................747
Printer Specifications......................................................................................................................747
Hardware................................................................................................................................... 747
Interface..................................................................................................................................... 752
Supported Interfaces............................................................................................................ 752
USB Interface....................................................................................................................... 753
LAN Interface....................................................................................................................... 753
Bluetooth Interface............................................................................................................... 754
NFC Interface....................................................................................................................... 755
RS-232C Interface................................................................................................................755
IEEE1284 Interface.............................................................................................................. 757
External Signal (EXT) Interface........................................................................................... 758
Wireless LAN Interface........................................................................................................ 766
Built-in Functions....................................................................................................................... 769
Printer Languages..................................................................................................................... 771
Standards........................................................................................................................................772
Usable Media and Ribbon..............................................................................................................773
Media......................................................................................................................................... 773
Ribbon........................................................................................................................................777
Usable Fonts and Barcodes...........................................................................................................778
Fonts.......................................................................................................................................... 778
Barcodes....................................................................................................................................802
Support and Warranty............................................................................................804
SOS (SATO Online Services) (SOS users only)........................................................................... 804
Maintenance Support..................................................................................................................... 805
Warranty Period for Consumables................................................................................................. 806
7
About This Manual
Before You Start
About This Manual
Thank you for purchasing this SATO CL4NX/CL6NX printer (hereafter referred to as "the printer").
This manual supplies basic information on how to operate the CL4NX/CL6NX. Read the manual
carefully to understand each function of CL4NX/CL6NX before operation.
Symbols
This operator manual uses following symbols:
Item
Description
The Warning symbol indicates that you can cause death or serious injury
if you do not follow the instructions or procedures.
Warning
The Caution symbol indicates that you can cause injury or property
damage if you do not follow the instructions or procedures.
Caution
The Note symbol indicates useful and supplemental information that you
should know.
Note
The Reference symbol indicates the link of relevant information.
Reference
•
Any unauthorized reproduction of the contents of this document, in part or whole, is
strictly prohibited.
•
The content of this manual is subject to change without notice.
•
The content of this manual has been produced with great care, but if you find any
doubt, error, or omission from the manual, contact your SATO reseller or technical
support center.
•
The illustrations and screens in this manual are from CL4NX, if there are no
instructions.
•
This manual uses the firmware of build version 1.8.1-r1 for description.
8
Features of the Product
CL4NX/CL6NX is a high-performance labeling system with a robust casing made of metal and
equipped with versatile functions. The main features of CL4NX/CL6NX are as follows:
•
Simple and stylish design
•
High-quality printing
•
Designed for better usability
•
Equipped with high legibility TFT color 3.5-inch LCD and LED
•
Onboard Guidance Videos
•
Print head and platen roller can be replaced without using extra tools
•
Supports a 600 meters (1968.5 feet) ribbon
•
Supports 31 languages for display and 47 languages for printing scalable fonts
•
Supports various communication interfaces
•
Supports protocols such as IPv6, SNMP and NTP
•
Certified by Wi-Fi alliance
•
Compatible with Cisco CCX V4.0
SATO CL4NX/CL6NX printer has tested compatible with Cisco CCX, version 4.0. The Cisco
Compatible logo signifies that SATO product has undergone interoperability testing by SATO
together with Cisco and a third-party test house based on testing criteria set by Cisco.
SATO is solely responsible for the support and warranty of its product. Cisco makes no
warranties, express or implied, with respect to SATO product or its inter operation with the listed
Cisco product(s) and disclaims any implied warranties of merchantability, fitness for a particular
use, or against infringement.
•
®
Conforms to international ENERGY STAR program
CL4NX/CL6NX complies with the requirements of the ENERGY STAR. As an ENERGY
STAR Partner, SATO Corporation has determined that this product meets the ENERGY STAR
guidelines for energy efficiency.
9
Safety Precautions
Safety Precautions
This topic describes how to use the printer safely.
Be sure to read the following information carefully before using the printer.
Pictographic Symbols
This operator manual and the printer labels use a variety of pictographic symbols. These symbols
emphasize the safe and correct use of the printer and to prevent injury to others and property damage.
The explanation of the symbols are as follows. Be sure to understand these symbols well before you
read the main text.
Ignoring the instructions marked by this symbol and
erroneously operating the printer could result in death or
serious injury.
Ignoring the instructions marked by this symbol and
erroneously operating the printer could result in injury or
property damage.
Example Pictographs
The
pictograph means "Caution is required". A specific warning symbol is
contained inside this pictograph (The symbol at left is for electric shock).
The
pictograph means "Should not be done". What is specifically to be
done is contained in the pictograph (The symbol at left means "Disassembly
prohibited").
The
pictograph means "Must be done". What is specifically to be done is
contained in the pictograph (The symbol at left means "Unplug the power cord
from the outlet").
10
•
Do not set on an unstable area, such as a wobbly table or slanted
area or an area subject to strong vibration. If the printer falls off or
topples over, it could injure someone.
•
Do not place flower vases, cups, or other containers holding liquids,
such as water or chemicals, or small metal objects near the printer.
If they are spilled and get inside the printer, immediately turn off the
power switch, unplug the power cord from the outlet, and contact
your SATO reseller or technical support center. Using the printer in
this condition could cause a fire or electric shock.
•
Do not insert or drop in metal or burnable objects inside the printer’s
openings (cable outlets, etc.). If foreign objects do get inside the
printer, immediately turn off the power switch, unplug the power cord
from the outlet, and contact your SATO reseller or technical support
center. Using the printer in this condition could cause a fire or electric
shock.
•
Do not use other than the specified voltage. Doing so could result in
fire or electric shock.
•
Always connect the printer’s ground wire to a ground. Not grounding
the ground wire could result in electric shock.
Do not set on an
unstable area
Do not place
containers full of water
or other liquid on the
printer
Do not put objects
inside the printer
Do not use other than
the specified voltage
Always ground the
connections
11
Safety Precautions
•
Do not damage, break, or modify the power cord. Also,do not place
heavy objects on the power cord, heat it, or pull it because doing so
could damage the power cord and cause a fire or electric shock.
•
If the power cord becomes damaged (core is exposed, wires broken,
etc.), contact your SATO reseller or technical support center. Using
the power cord in this condition could cause a fire or electric shock.
•
Do not modify, excessively bend, twist, or pull the power cord. Using
the power cord in such a condition could cause a fire or electric
shock.
•
If the printer is dropped or broken, immediately turn off the power
switch, unplug the power cord from the outlet, and contact your SATO
reseller or technical support center. Using the printer in this condition
could cause a fire or electric shock.
•
Continuing to use the printer in the event something is abnormal
about it, such as smoke or unusual smells coming from it, could
result in fire or electric shock. Immediately turn off the power switch,
unplug the power cord from the outlet, and contact your SATO
reseller or technical support center for repairs. It is dangerous for the
customer to try to repair it, so absolutely do not attempt repairs on
your own.
•
Do not disassemble or modify the printer. Doing so could result in fire
or electric shock. Ask your SATO reseller or technical support center
to conduct internal inspections, adjustments, and repairs.
•
Do not touch the cutter with your hands or do not put something into
the cutter. Doing so could result in an injury.
Handling the power
cord
When the printer
has been dropped or
broken
Do not use the printer
when something is
abnormal about it
Do not disassemble
the printer
Regarding the cutter
12
•
Use of flame or heat around the head cleaning fluid is prohibited.
Absolutely do not heat it or subject it to flames.
•
Keep the fluid out of reach of children to prevent them from
accidentally drinking it. If a child accidentally drinks the fluid,
immediately consult with a physician.
•
Do not look into the laser radiation window, and do not direct the
laser beam at someone. If the laser beam hits eyes, it may cause
visual disturbance.
•
The print head is hot after printing. Be careful not to get burned when
replacing media or cleaning immediately after printing.
•
Touching the edge of the print head with bare hands could result in
injury. Be careful not to become injured when replacing media or
cleaning.
•
The customer should not replace the print head. Doing so could
result in injury, burns or electric shock.
•
The printer is not explosion proof certified.
•
Do not use in a potentially explosive environment or atmosphere.
•
Do not place the printer in areas with high humidity or where
condensation forms. If condensation forms, immediately turn off the
power switch and do not use the printer until it dries. Using the printer
while condensation is on it could result in electric shock.
•
When moving the printer, always unplug the power cord from the
outlet and check to make sure all external wires are disconnected
before moving it. Moving the printer with the wires still connected
could damage the cords or connecting wires and result in a fire or
electric shock.
•
Do not carry the printer with media loaded in it. The media could fall
out and cause an injury.
•
When setting the printer on the floor or a stand, be sure not to get
your fingers or hands pinched under the printer feet.
•
Do not carry the printer with the barcode checker stand installed. The
barcode checker stand could fall out and cause injury.
Using the head
cleaning fluid
Laser beam
Print head
Do not use in
hazardous locations
Do not place in areas
with high humidity
Carrying the printer
13
Safety Precautions
•
Do not operate the power switch or plug in/ unplug the power cord
with wet hands. Doing so could result in electric shock.
•
Keep the power cord away from hot devices. Getting the power cord
close to hot devices could cause the cord’s covering to melt and
cause a fire or electric shock.
•
When unplugging the power cord from the outlet, be sure to hold it by
the plug. Pulling it by the cord could expose or break the core wires
and cause a fire or electric shock.
•
The power cord set that comes with the printer is especially made for
this printer. Do not use it with any other electrical devices.
•
Be careful avoid injury from pointed part of the barcode checker
stand kit.
•
Be careful not to get your fingers pinched when opening or closing
the top cover. Also be careful that the top cover does not slip off and
drop.
•
When loading a media roll, be careful not to get your fingers pinched
between the media roll and the supply unit.
•
When not using the printer for a long time, unplug the power cord
from the outlet to maintain safety.
•
When maintaining and cleaning the printer, unplug the power cord
from the outlet to maintain safety.
Power supply
Power cord
Handling the barcode
checker stand kit
Top cover
Loading media
When not using the
printer for a long time
During maintenance
and cleaning
14
Precautions for Installation and Handling
Select a Safe Location
Printer operation can be affected by the printer environment.
Refer to the following instructions for installation and handling of the CL4NX/CL6NX printer.
•
Place the printer on a surface that is flat and level.
If the surface is not flat and level, this may cause bad print quality. This may also cause a
malfunction and decrease the life span of the printer.
•
Do not place the printer on a location that produces vibration.
Giving serious vibration or shock to the printer may cause a malfunction and shorten the life span
of the printer.
•
Keep the printer out of high temperature and humidity.
Avoid locations subject to extreme or fast changes in temperature or humidity.
•
Do not place the printer in a location subject to water or oil.
Water or oil entering inside the printer may cause a fire, electric shock or malfunction.
•
Avoid dust.
Dust build up may result in bad print quality.
•
Keep out of direct sunlight.
The printer has a built-in optical sensor. Exposure to direct sunlight will make the sensor less
responsive and may cause the media to be detected incorrectly. Close the top cover when
printing.
•
Do not use in hazardous locations.
Do not use in a potentially explosive environment or atmosphere. Doing so could cause a fire of
explosion.
15
Power Supply
Power Supply
Printer operation can be affected by the printer environment.
Refer to the following instructions for installation and handling of the CL4NX/CL6NX printer.
•
The printer requires an AC power supply.
Be sure to connect the printer to an AC power supply.
•
Connect the power cord to a grounded power outlet.
Make sure that the printer is connected to a grounded power outlet.
•
Supply a stable source of electricity to the printer.
When using the printer, do not share its power outlet with other electrical devices. This could
cause power fluctuations and performance issues with your printer.
16
Printing
The print result varies depending on the use environment (temperature and humidity), the supply
condition (the combination of media and ribbon), and the printer settings (the print speed, the print
darkness, etc.).
Please sufficiently test the printer in your use environment, and use it with the optimal combination.
If anything is unclear, or if you have any questions, contact your SATO sales representative or reseller.
17
Regulatory Approval
Regulatory Approval
FCC Warning
You are cautioned that changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void your authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device,
pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection
against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can
radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may
cause harmful interference to radio communications.
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation.
If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can
be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the
interference by one or more of the following measures:
•
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
•
Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver.
•
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is
connected.
•
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
Shielded cable must be used in order to comply with the emission limits.
FCC Statement for Optional Wireless LAN
This device complies with RF radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment.
The antenna used for this transmitter must be installed to provide a separation distance of at least 20
cm from all people and must not be collocated or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or
transmitter.
Bluetooth/Wireless Communication
Compliance Statement
This product has been certified for compliance with the relevant radio interference regulations of your
country or region. To make sure continued compliance, do not:
•
Disassemble or modify this product.
•
Remove the certificate label (serial number seal) affixed to this product.
Use of this product near microwave and/or other wireless LAN equipment, or where static electricity
or radio interference is present, may shorten the communication distance, or even disable
communication.
Industry Canada (IC) Statement for Bluetooth
This device complies with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to
the following two conditions:
•
This device may not cause interference.
•
This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
This equipment complies with IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment
and meets RSS-102 of the IC radio frequency (RF) Exposure rules. This equipment should be
18
installed and operated keeping the radiator at least 20 cm or more away from person’s body
(excluding extremities: hands, wrists, feet and ankles).
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d’Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio
exempts de licence. L’exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes :
•
L’appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage.
•
L’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage
est susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.
Cet équipement est conforme aux limites d’exposition aux rayonnements énoncées pour un
environnement non contrôlé et respecte les règles d’exposition aux fréquences radioélectriques (RF)
CNR-102 de l’IC. Cet équipement doit être installé et utilisé en gardant une distance de 20 cm ou
plus entre le dispositif rayonnant et le corps (à l’exception des extrémités : mains, poignets, pieds et
chevilles).
Disposal of Old Electrical & Electronic Equipment (Applicable in the European Union and other
European countries with separate collection systems)
A product marked with this symbol on itself or on its packaging shall not be
treated as household waste. Instead, it shall be handed over to an appropriate
collection point for the recycling of electrical and electronic equipment in
accordance with local regulations. Inappropriate waste handling of this product
may cause detrimental consequences for the environment and damage
to human health. The recycling of materials will help to conserve natural
resources and contribute to your community. For more detailed information
on recycling of this product, contact your local municipal organization, your
household waste disposal service or the dealer where you purchased the
product.
EN55022 Warning
This is a class A product.
In a domestic environment, this product may cause radio interference, in which case the user may be
required to take adequate measures.
EN55022 Warnung
Warnung! Dies ist eine Einrichtung der Klasse A.
Diese Einrichtung kann im Wohnbereich Funkstörungen verursachen. In diesem Fall kann vom
Betreiber verlangt werden, angemessene Maßnahmen durchzuführen.
19
Regulatory Approval
Das Gerät ist nicht für die Benutzung im unmittelbaren Gesichtsfeld am Bildschirmarbeitsplatz
vorgesehen. Um störende Reflexionen am Bildschirmarbeitsplatz zu vermeiden, darf dieses Produkt
nicht im unmittelbaren Gesichtsfeld platziert werden.
20
Environmentally Hazardous Materials
RoHS Directive
This printer restricts the use of the six hazardous materials listed below, as specified by RoHS
directive.
Hexavalent chromium
Max. 0.1%
Lead and lead compounds
Max. 0.1%
Mercury and mercury compounds
Max. 0.1%
Cadmium and cadmium compounds
Max. 0.01%
Polybrominated biphenyls (PBB)
Max. 0.1%
Polybrominated diphenyl ethers (PBDE)
Max. 0.1%
Compliance Status of REACH Regulation
(1) Status of registered chemical substances
No chemical substances are intentionally emitted, nor are there any chemical substances that are
registered with the European Chemicals Agency.
(2) Information about the Substances of Very High Concern (SVHC) contained in the printer
As of August 3, 2015, there has been no information communicated regarding SVHC that exceed
0.1% of the printer's weight. In the future, if SVHC that exceed 0.1% of the printer's weight are
found, we will immediately communicate that information.
21
Copyrights
Copyrights/Limitation of Liability/Trademarks
Copyrights
Any unauthorized reproduction of the contents of this document, in part or whole, is strictly prohibited.
© 2017 SATO Corporation. All rights reserved.
22
Limitation of Liability
•
SATO Corporation and its subsidiaries in Japan, the U.S. and other countries make no
representations or warranties of any kind regarding this material, including, but not limited to,
implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. SATO Corporation shall
not be held responsible for errors contained herein or any omissions from this material or for any
damages, whether direct, indirect, incidental or consequential, in connection with the furnishing,
distribution, performance or use of this material.
•
Specifications and contents in this document are subject to change without notice.
•
Be sure to perform a virus check for the USB memory before connecting it to the printer. SATO
Corporation shall not be held responsible for any printer malfunctions caused by a virus spread
via USB memory.
23
Trademarks
Trademarks
•
SATO is a registered trademark of SATO Holdings Corporation and its subsidiaries in Japan, the
U.S. and other countries.
•
NiceLabel is a trademark or registered trademark of Euro Plus d.o.o. in the U.S.A and other
countries.
•
QR Code is a registered trademark of DENSO WAVE INCORPORATED.
•
Wi-Fi is a registered trademark of Wi-Fi Alliance.
•
Wi-Fi Direct
•
Windows and Internet Explorer are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
•
Cisco, the Cisco logo, and Cisco Systems are trademarks or registered trademarks of Cisco
Systems, Inc. and/or its affiliates in the United States and certain other countries.
•
Bluetooth is a trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc., U.S.A.
•
ENERGY STAR and ENERGY STAR mark are registered U.S. marks.
•
ICODE, I-CODE, and SLI are registered trademarks of NXP B.V.
•
MIFARE is a registered trademark of NXP B.V.
•
Tag-it
•
my-d
•
FeliCa is a registered trademark of Sony Corporation.
•
FeliCa is a contactless IC card technology developed by Sony Corporation.
•
Android, YouTube, the YouTube logo, and Google Chrome are trademarks or registered
trademarks of Google Inc.
•
iPad, iPhone, and Safari are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
•
IOS is a trademark or registered trademark of Cisco in the U.S. and other countries and is used
under license.
•
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
®
TM
TM
, Wi-Fi Protected Setup
TM
, WPA
TM
and WPA2
are trademarks of Wi-Fi Alliance.
®
®
TM
TM
is a trademark of Texas Instruments.
is a registered trademark of Infineon Technologies AG.
24
Basic Information
Bundled Accessories
After unpacking the printer, make sure that you have all the bundled accessories. If there are any
missing items, contact the SATO reseller where you purchased the printer.
•
User documents (Quick Guide, Warranty, etc.)
•
Power cord
The shape of power plug varies depending on the region in which it was purchased.
•
Keep the packaging box and cushioning material after installing the printer. You can
pack the printer with this packaging box for shipment when requesting for repairs.
25
Optional Devices
Optional Devices
The optional devices for the printer are as follows. The optional devices can be factory installed or
installed by the customer engineer. Contact your SATO reseller or technical support center.
Optional Devices
Description
Supported Models
CL4NX
CL6NX
Cutter unit
Automatically cuts the media in
the designated number of pages.
Available
Available
Simple dispenser kit
Removes the label from the liner.
Available
Available
Available
Available
The liner is ejected out of the
printer.
Dispenser unit (with internal liner
rewinder)
Removes the label from the liner.
Linerless cutter kit
The environmentally friendly
linerless labels can be used.
Available
-
RTC (Calendar) kit
A calendar system for printing
the date and time on a label to
output.
Available
Available
External rewinder
Automatically rewinds the label
output by the printer.
Available
Available
RWG500
RWG500
(6-inch
extension
kit)
Supports UHF RFID. It can read
and write to the IC tag and label.
Available
-
Supports HF RFID. It can read
and write to the IC tag and label.
Available
-
Communicates with the wireless
LAN.
Available
Available
Barcode checker stand kit
A stand kit to mount the barcode
checker.
Available
Available
External cover kit
A set of covers to prevent dust
from entering the external
openings for label supply.
Available
Available
UHF RFID kit
(ISO/IEC 18000-6 Type C Gen2)
HF RFID kit
(ISO/IEC15693, ISO/IEC 14443
TypeA, FeliCa Lite-S)
WLAN 802.11a/b/g/n Dual Band
WLAN (2.4GHz, 5GHz)
The liner can be ejected out of
the printer or rewound inside of
the printer.
26
•
For more details about the optional devices, contact your SATO sales representative.
27
Front View
Parts Identification
Parts Identification for the Printer
Front View
(1) Top cover
(2) NFC antenna location
*This feature is supported on printers from serial number 6B~ and above.
(3) Color LCD
(4) Operator panel
(5) Media discharge outlet
(6) USB connector (Type A)
Enable the storage of printer settings information with USB memory.
Also, other devices like a barcode checker, barcode scanner or keyboard can be connected.
•
Be sure to perform a virus check on the USB memory before connecting it to the
printer. SATO Corporation shall not be held responsible for any printer malfunctions
caused by a virus spread via USB memory.
28
Rear View
(1) Wireless LAN antenna (Optional)
Connector for installation of optional wireless LAN antenna.
(2) RS-232C connector
To connect the printer to the computer using the RS-232C serial interface.
You can also connect a barcode checker.
Usage of the RS-232C interface can be selected in the [Interface] > [RS-232C] > [Interface] menu.
(3) IEEE1284 connector
To connect the printer to the computer using the IEEE1284 interface.
(4) EXT connector (External signal interface)
Interface connector for external signals. Connect an optional device to this terminal.
(5) USB connector (Type B)
To connect the printer to the computer using the USB interface.
(6) USB connector (Type A)
Enable the storage of printer settings information with USB memory.
Also, other devices like a barcode checker, barcode scanner or keyboard can be connected.
•
Be sure to perform a virus check on the USB memory before connecting it to the
printer. SATO Corporation shall not be held responsible for any printer malfunctions
caused by a virus spread via USB memory.
(7) LAN connector
To connect the printer to the network using the LAN interface.
(8) AC input terminal
Supplies power to the printer through the inserted power cord.
Before connecting, make sure that the AC voltage of your region is in the range of AC 100 to 240
V, 50 to 60 Hz.
29
Internal View
Internal View
(1) Ribbon supply spindle
(2) Ribbon rewind spindle
(3) Ribbon roller
(4) Print head (Consumables)
Creates an image directly on the media or by using a ribbon. Clean the print head regularly.
(5) Platen roller (Consumables)
(6) Front cover
(7) Media holder guide
Used to hold the media roll.
(8) Media roll holder
Used to hang the media roll to the bar.
(9) Media guide
(10) Head lock lever
Used to release the print head assembly.
30
Parts Identification for the Operator Panel
(1)
Power button
To power on the printer, press the
power button until the LED lights up in blue.
To power off the printer, press the
power button for more than two seconds.
(2) LED indicator
(3) Color LCD
(4)
Soft buttons
The functions change depending on the screen. The functions of the buttons are indicated on the
bottom of the screen.
Example 1: In Offline mode
left soft button: ONLINE,
right soft button: FEED
31
Parts Identification for the Operator Panel
Example 2: The numerical value input screen of the Settings menu
left soft button: Delete one character,
right soft button: Save
Back button
(5)
Returns to the previous screen.
Line button
(6)
Toggle between Online/Offline mode or playback/pause the video.
Enter button
(7)
Confirm the selected item or setting value.
(8)
/
/
/
Arrow buttons
Navigate the selection in the screen menu.
32
Using the Operator Panel
Display and Operation of the Operator Panel
LED Indicator
The LED indicator lights up or flashes to show the current status of the printer. The printer statuses
which the LED indicator shows are as follows:
LED Indicator
Color
Description
Blue
Online mode
(Light off)
Power off or Offline mode
Red
Printer error (for example, when the ribbon
runs out)
Blue
Sleep mode (energy saving mode)
Flashes at intervals of two
seconds.
•
If the printer enters sleep mode during a printer error status (LED lights red), the LED
indicator will flash blue at intervals of two seconds.
•
By default, the printer goes into sleep mode after 60 minutes of inactivity. Use the
[Energy Saving] menu to change the period before the printer enters sleep mode.
Operations in Online/Offline Mode
Online Mode
33
Operations in Online/Offline Mode
In Online mode, you can execute the print job.
(1) Change to Offline mode.
Offline Mode
In Offline mode, the print job will stop.
You can adjust the print settings, cancel the print job or feed the media.
After you complete or cancel the print job, you can show the Settings mode.
(1) Cancel the print job.
(2) Change to Online mode.
(3) Feed the media.
(4) Shows the Adjustments mode when the print job is paused.
Shows the Settings mode when there are no print jobs.
34
Status Icon
The icons on the status bar of the display show the printer status.
(1) Status bar
Communication Interface Status
Icon
Description
Bluetooth is enabled but not connected.
Bluetooth is enabled and connected.
Network link is enabled but not connected.
Network link is enabled and connected.
NFC is enabled but not connected.
35
Status Icon
Icon
Description
NFC is enabled and connected.
Not connected to the NTP time server.
Wi-Fi is authenticated, but not connected.
Wi-Fi is connected.
Signal Level: 1
Wi-Fi is connected.
Signal Level: 2
Wi-Fi is connected.
Signal Level: 3
Wi-Fi is connected.
Signal Level: 4
Wi-Fi Direct is not connected.
Wi-Fi Direct is connected.
Signal Level: 1
36
Icon
Description
Wi-Fi Direct is connected.
Signal Level: 2
Wi-Fi Direct is connected.
Signal Level: 3
Wi-Fi Direct is connected or the printer is set to act as an access point.
Signal Level: 4
Printer is connected to USB host.
Waiting for external input/output signal.
RFID mode is enabled. (CL4NX only)
Standard code is disabled.
The On-Demand mode of the SOS (SATO Online Services) is enabled.
The Real Time mode of the SOS is enabled. The printer is connected to the SOS
cloud.
37
Status Icon
Icon
Description
The Real Time mode of the SOS is enabled, but not connected to the SOS cloud.
If LAN or Wi-Fi icon is grayed out, the printer is not connected to the network.
If LAN or Wi-Fi icon is active, the Internet connection of the SOS cloud has a
trouble.
The time has come that set the periodic notification in the On-Demand mode of
SOS. Scan the QR code and send the information to the SOS cloud.
USB Memory Status
Icon
Description
USB memory is connected.
Barcode Checker Status
Icon
Description
Barcode checker is connected.
Barcode Scanner Status
Icon
Description
Barcode scanner is connected in AEP mode.
38
Print Job Status
Icon
Description
Waiting for media removal. Remove the media.
Ribbon is near the end. The rest of the ribbon is decreased. Prepare a new
ribbon.
Label is near the end. The rest of the media is decreased. Prepare new media.
Command error detected. Check the print data.
Receive buffer is nearly full. Wait until the printer starts printing the previously sent
data, and then send the next data.
Defective print head is detected. Replace the print head.
Incompatible print head is detected. Replace the print head.
Maintenance Status
Icon
Description
Clean the print head or platen roller.
39
Operations When Errors Occur
Icon
Description
Replace the print head.
Replace the platen roller.
Replace the cutter unit.
Operations When Errors Occur
When a printer error occurs, the icon and message (the error and coping way) will be shown on the
screen. When an error occurs, you can perform the following operations:
•
Change to Offline mode.
•
Cancel the error.
•
Feed the media.
•
Change to Settings mode.
•
Change to guidance video.
•
Change to the SOS error screen on which the QR code and phone number are displayed if the
SOS (SATO Online Services) is enabled.
40
•
The available operations vary, depending on the situation.
(1) Error Icon
(2) Error number
(3) Clear the error if allowed for the active error.
(4) Change to Offline mode if allowed for the active error.
(5) The icon appears when the Settings mode or guidance video is available.
The SOS icon appears when the SOS is enabled.
(6) Feed the media if allowed for the active error.
(7) Change to Settings mode or guidance video.
Change to the SOS error screen on which the QR code and phone number are displayed if the
SOS is enabled.
(8) When there are two icons on step (5), select the icon by using
icon will be highlighted.
Error Icon
Icon
Description
Paper end is detected.
Ribbon end is detected.
41
/
buttons. The selected
Operations When Errors Occur
Icon
Description
Print data is larger than the media size.
Sensor error is detected.
Print head is unlocked.
Print head error is detected.
•
Communication error is detected.
•
BCC error is detected.
•
CRC error is detected.
Receive buffer overflow.
Cutter error is detected.
•
USB memory is not accessible.
•
There is no free space in the USB memory.
Calendar error is detected.
42
Icon
Description
•
Writing/reading information to/from the RFID tag failed. (CL4NX only)
•
With Non-RFID warning enabled and RFID tag loaded, the items received do
not contain an RFID issue command. (CL4NX only)
•
Wireless LAN setting error is detected.
•
Authentication with the server failed.
•
Authentication with the server timed out.
Printer error is detected.
The temperature of the print head has exceeded the tolerance range.
RFID module is defective. (CL4NX only)
Bluetooth module is defective.
Paper jam is detected. (CL4NX only)
NFC error is detected.
NFC command error is detected.
43
Guidance Videos
Icon
Description
The barcode checker is not detected at printer startup or at the start of printing
when the barcode check mode is enabled.
•
The barcode could not be read.
•
The read result of the barcode does not match the command data.
Guidance Videos
The printer contains the guidance videos for visual reference of printer operations.
List of the Guidance Videos
The printer contains the following guidance videos for visual reference of printer operations.
The onboard guidance videos are as follows:
No.
Guidance Videos
Show video from
Error screen
Startup Guide
[Information]
Menu
1
Media roll loading
(Standard)
-
Possible
Possible
2
Media roll loading
(Cutter)
-
Possible
Possible
3
Media roll loading
(Linerless) (CL4NX only)
-
Possible
Possible
4
Media roll loading
(Dispenser)
-
Possible
Possible
5
Media roll loading
(Dispenser with rewinder)
-
Possible
Possible
6
Fan-fold media loading
(Standard)
-
Possible
Possible
7
Fan-fold media loading
(Cutter)
-
Possible
Possible
8
Ribbon loading
-
Possible
Possible
9
Media roll replacement
(Standard)
Possible
-
Possible
10
Media roll replacement
(Cutter)
Possible
-
Possible
44
No.
Guidance Videos
Show video from
Error screen
Startup Guide
[Information]
Menu
11
Media roll replacement
(Linerless) (CL4NX only)
Possible
-
Possible
12
Media roll replacement
(Dispenser)
Possible
-
Possible
13
Media roll replacement
(Dispenser with rewinder)
Possible
-
Possible
14
Fan-fold media
replacement (Standard)
Possible
-
Possible
15
Fan-fold media
replacement (Cutter)
Possible
-
Possible
16
Ribbon replacement
Possible
-
Possible
17
Print head replacement
-
-
Possible
18
Platen roller replacement
-
-
Possible
19
Cleaning
-
-
Possible
Playing the Guidance Video from the Error Screen
Play the guidance video from the error screen and resolve the error by following the procedure of the
video.
1. On the error screen, press the
button to play the guidance video.
If there are more videos to choose from, press the arrow buttons to select the guidance video, and
then press the
button. The guidance video starts.
45
Guidance Videos
2. Follow the procedures to resolve the error according to the guidance video.
Getting Access to the Guidance Video in Online Mode
When in the Online mode, play the guidance video according to the following procedure.
1. Press the
button in Online mode.
The printer enters Offline mode.
2. Press the
button.
The printer enters Settings mode.
46
3. Select [Information] using the
4. Press the
/
buttons.
button.
The item list appears.
5. Select [Help] using the
6. Press the
/
buttons.
button.
The guidance video list appears.
47
Guidance Videos
7. Select the video for playback using the
button.
/
buttons, and then press the
The guidance video starts.
Operating the Guidance Video
(1) Indication panel appears again when one of the buttons is pressed.
(2) Stop the playback of the video and return to menu.
(3) Playback the video from the start.
(4) Playback or pause the video.
(5) Rewind the video.
(6) Fast-forward the video.
48
Adjusting the Print Settings During Printing
Follow the procedure below to adjust the print position, print darkness and print speed during printing.
1. Press the
2. Press the
button to pause print job and change the printer to Offline mode.
button.
The Adjustments mode appears.
3. Select an item and adjust the setting.
4. Press the
button to return to Offline mode.
5. Press the
button to change to Online mode.
The print job resumes with the adjusted settings.
49
Canceling the Print Job
•
When [Printing] > [Advanced] > [Prioritize] menu has been set to [Commands] and the
print settings have been specified by command, the changes made in the Adjustments
mode will be applied only to the data already analyzed at that time. The settings
specified by command will be applied to the rest of the data.
Canceling the Print Job
Cancel the print job according to the following procedure. When the print job is canceled, the data
stored in the receive buffer of the printer is also deleted.
1. Press the
2. Press the
button to change the printer to Offline mode.
button.
A message appears, confirming that you want to cancel the print job.
3. Press the
button.
The print job is canceled.
50
Settings Mode
In the Settings mode, various setting of the printer can be operated. The topics here explain how to
operate the Settings mode.
Settings Mode Menus
There are six main menus in the Settings mode and each menu contains many layers of submenus.
Frequently used settings are also listed in the [Shortcut] menu so that you can directly access them.
Menu
Description
Shortcut Menu
Directly access frequently used settings.
Printing Menu
Access the settings related to printing.
Interface Menu
Access the settings related to the interfaces.
Applications Menu
Access the settings related to the printer's command.
System Menu
Access the settings related to the display language, buzzer volume
etc.
Tools Menu
Access the test print, initialization and other settings.
Information Menu
Access the printer information and guidance videos.
Changing to the Settings Mode
The Settings mode can appear when no print jobs remain in the printer.
Change the printer to the Settings mode according to the following procedure:
51
Changing to the Settings Mode
1. Press the
button in Online mode.
The printer enters Offline mode.
2. Press the
button.
The printer enters Settings mode.
52
•
To exit the Settings mode, press the
button.
Logging In to/Logging Out of the Settings Mode
The Settings mode logs in and logs out by the following procedure, if the password is enabled.
•
If the password is enabled, input the password after entering the Settings mode.
When logged in to the Settings mode, [LOG OUT] appears on the bottom left of the screen.
•
Press the
button to log out of the Settings mode.
Password is required to enter the Settings mode again.
•
With password enabled, if no button is pressed for about 10 minutes after login, the
login session will end automatically. Password is required to enter the Settings mode
again.
Item Selection
Select an item in Settings mode according to the following procedure:
53
Item Selection
1. Select menu using the
2. Press the
/
buttons.
button.
The item list appears.
3. Select an item using the
4. Press the
/
buttons.
button.
If the selected item is a setting item, the setting screen appears.
If the selected item is a handling item such as the auto calibration, copy, or delete, the starting
screen or confirmation screen appears.
Items with a [>] indicated on the right side have more items in the next layer of the submenu.
Press the
or
button to show the next layer.
Similarly, select an item using the
Press the
/
and
buttons.
button to return to the previous screen.
54
(1) There are more items in the next layer.
(2) Return to the previous screen.
Setting Value Input or Selection
This topic describes the character and number input on the setting screen and how to select an item
from the list.
•
You can also input characters and numbers from a USB keyboard by connecting it to
the printer.
•
Character Input
•
Numeric Input
•
Selection from the List
•
Selection from the Box
•
IP Address Input
55
Setting Value Input or Selection
•
Character Input
(1) Text box
(2) Selection area
(3) Delete the character to the left of the cursor indicated in the text box.
(4) Select the character for input using the arrow buttons. The selected character will be highlighted in
the selection area.
(5) Change the input mode.
(6) Save the character you enter in the text box and return to the item list.
(7) Cancel the character you enter in the text box and return to the item list.
(8) Enter the selected character into the text box.
•
Numeric Input
(1) Text box
56
(2) Selection area
(3) Delete the number to the left of the cursor indicated in the text box.
(4) Select the number for input using the arrow buttons. The selected number will be highlighted in the
selection area.
(5) Change the input mode.
(6) Save the number you enter in the text box and return to the item list.
(7) Cancel the number you enter in the text box and return to the item list.
(8) Enter the selected number into the text box.
•
Selection from the List
(1) Selection area
(2) Select an item using the
area.
/
buttons. The selected item will be highlighted in the selection
(3) Save the selection from the list and return to the item list.
(4) Cancel the selection from the list and return to the item list.
57
Setting Value Input or Selection
•
Selection from the Box
(1) Change the value in the selection box using the
/
buttons.
(2) Selection box
(3) Perform the function as shown on the screen above.
(4) Return to the previous screen.
(5) Select an item using the
area.
•
/
buttons. The selected item will be highlighted in the selection
IP Address Input
(1) Text box
(2) Select the digit for input using the
/
buttons.
(3) Save the IP address you enter in the text box and return to the item list.
58
(4) Cancel the IP address you enter in the text box and return to the item list.
(5) Select the number to input using the
/
buttons.
59
Printer Memory and USB Memory
Printer Memory and USB Memory
The memory of the user area of the printer is a maximum of 679 MB.
However, you cannot use the whole memory of the user area, because this area is also used for the
log data and HEX dump functions.
USB memory can be connected to the printer. There is no capacity limit for USB memory.
There are two USB connectors (Type A) at front and back of the printer. USB memory can be
connected to either connectors.
What you can do with this printer while it is connected to USB memory is as follows:
•
Get the HEX dump data
•
Install certificates used for Wi-Fi authentication and for HTTPS
•
Get the barcode check log data
•
Create clone data (copy the printer settings information)
•
Be sure to perform a virus check on the USB memory before connecting it to the
printer. SATO Corporation shall not be held responsible for any printer malfunctions
caused by a virus spread via USB memory.
•
The printer does not support USB memory with security functions such as fingerprint
authentications.
•
The printer does not support connection through the USB HUB.
60
Getting Started
Installation
Installation Precautions
Install the printer in a location as follows:
•
A location that is horizontal and stable.
•
A location that has sufficient space for operating the printer.
Do not install the printer in a location as follows. Doing so could cause the printer to malfunction.
•
A location that is subject to vibration.
•
A location with high temperature and humidity.
•
A dusty location.
•
A location exposed to direct sunlight.
61
Installation Precautions
•
A location with a lot of electrical noise.
•
A location with a large fluctuation in power.
•
A location with an explosive atmosphere (flammable gas or vapor).
62
Installation Space
Front View
Make sure that there is sufficient space around the printer so that the top cover can be fully opened
when operating or cleaning the printer, or replacing consumables.
The dimensions of the front view of the printer are as follows:
CL4NX
•
The image above is the standard model.
63
Side View
CL6NX
•
The image above is the standard model.
Side View
Make sure that there is sufficient space around the printer so that the top cover can be fully opened
when operating or cleaning the printer, or replacing consumables.
Make sure that there is sufficient space on the rear side of the printer so that no stress is applied to the
power cord or cables connected to the printer.
64
The dimensions of the side view of the printer are as follows:
•
The arrow indicates the front of the printer.
Bottom View
The bottom surface dimensions of the printer are as follows:
CL4NX
•
The arrow indicates the front of the printer.
65
Bottom View
CL6NX
•
The arrow indicates the front of the printer.
66
Powering On/Off the Printer
Connecting the Power Cord
•
Do not touch the power button, connect or disconnect the power cord while your hands
are wet. Doing so could cause an electric shock.
•
Always connect the ground wire to a ground terminal. Electric shock could occur if you
do not.
•
Make sure that the AC voltage of your region is in the range of AC 100 - 240 V, 50 60 Hz. If your local voltage is not in the stated range, contact your SATO reseller or
technical support center.
•
The attached power cord is designed exclusively for this printer. Do not use it with
other devices.
1. Connect the power cord to the AC input terminal (1) at the rear of the printer.
Take note of the orientation of the connector. Secure the printer with one hand, and insert the
connector tightly.
2. Insert the power plug into an AC outlet.
* The shape of the power plug varies depending on the region in which it was purchased.
67
Connecting the Power Cord
•
This product is also designed for IT power distribution system with phase-to-phase
voltage 230 V.
68
Powering On the Printer
•
Do not touch the power button, connect or disconnect the power cord while your hands
are wet. Doing so could cause an electric shock.
•
You can power on/off the printer from the main power source by enabling [Start on AC]
under the [System] menu.
1. Press the
power button of the operator panel until the LED lights up in blue to
power on the printer.
"Online" appears on the screen.
69
Powering Off the Printer
Powering Off the Printer
•
Do not touch the power button, connect or disconnect the power cord while your hands
are wet. Doing so could cause an electric shock.
•
Do not power off the printer during operation, such as when printing or updating. Doing
so could cause a malfunction of the printer.
•
Do not disconnect the power cord until the powering off process is completed on the
printer.
•
An incorrect power on/off operation may damage the printer settings. In such a case,
the printer settings are reset to their default values. It is always recommended to use
the power button to allow proper shutdown of the printer and ensure changes made to
menu settings are saved appropriately.
•
You can power on/off the printer from the main power source by enabling [Start on AC]
under the [System] menu.
1. Make sure that the printer is in Offline mode before you power off.
If "Online" appears on the screen, press the
button to change to Offline mode.
70
2. Press the
power button for more than two seconds to power off the printer.
71
Initial Setup (Startup Guide)
Initial Setup (Startup Guide)
The topics here explain how to complete the startup guide that appears when you power on the printer
for the first time after purchase.
72
Overview of the Startup Guide
When you power on the printer for the first time after purchase, the display shows the startup guide.
The startup guide is a function to help you through the initial printer settings, such as setting date and
time, and loading the ribbon and media.
You can cancel the startup guide and perform the configuration later from the menu.
•
If you have installed the optional RTC (Real Time Clock) kit, the time zone, date and
time setting screens appear.
The startup guide lets you configure the printer by the following flow:
1. Startup Screen
2. Language Selection
Select the display language.
3. Region Setting with Optional RTC Kit
Set the region (time zone).
73
Overview of the Startup Guide
4. City Setting with Optional RTC Kit
Set the city (time zone).
5. Date Setting with Optional RTC Kit
Set the date.
6. Time Setting with Optional RTC Kit
Set the time.
7. Print Method Setting
Set whether to use the ribbon or direct thermal media to print.
74
8. Ribbon Setting
Load the ribbon.
Appears if you have selected [Use Ribbon] in the print method setting.
9. Media Sensor Type Setting
Set the sensor type for detecting the media.
10. Media Setting
Load the media.
11. Completion of Initial Setup Screen
Finish the startup guide.
Startup Guide Cancelation
To cancel the startup guide in the middle of the configuration, press the
75
button.
Overview of the Startup Guide
Select whether or not to show the startup guide during the next startup, and press the
button to confirm.
76
Startup Screen
When you power on the printer for the first time after purchase, the display shows the startup guide.
1. Press the
power button of the operator panel until the LED lights blue to power
on the printer.
The startup screen appears.
77
Language Selection
Language Selection
Select the display language.
1. Select the language name using the
2. Press the
button or
/
buttons.
button to confirm.
78
Region Setting with Optional RTC Kit
Set the region (time zone).
1. Select the region using the
2. Press the
button or
/
buttons.
button to confirm.
79
City Setting with Optional RTC Kit
City Setting with Optional RTC Kit
Set the city (time zone).
1. Select the city using the
2. Press the
button or
/
buttons.
button to confirm.
80
Date Setting with Optional RTC Kit
Set the date.
1. Select the current value using the
/
/
buttons, and move the cursor using the
buttons.
2. When you have completed the date setting, press the
button to confirm.
81
button or
Time Setting with Optional RTC Kit
Time Setting with Optional RTC Kit
Set the time.
1. Select the current value using the
/
/
buttons, and move the cursor using the
buttons.
2. When you have completed the time setting, press the
button to confirm.
•
The time is set in 24-hour format.
82
button or
Print Method Setting
Set whether to use the ribbon or direct thermal media to print.
1. Select the print method using the
/
buttons.
[Use Ribbon]
Print using a ribbon.
[Direct Thermal]
Print using direct thermal media.
2. Press the
button or
button to confirm.
If you have selected [Use Ribbon], the ribbon setting screen appears.
If you have selected [Direct Thermal], the media sensor type setting screen appears.
83
Ribbon Setting
Ribbon Setting
Load the ribbon. You can check the loading method of the ribbon through the video.
•
Appears if you have selected [Use Ribbon] in the print method setting.
1. Press the
button to play the video.
The video starts.
2. Load the ribbon while checking the video.
3. After you complete the ribbon setting, press the
The display returns to the previous screen.
4. Press the
button to go to the next screen.
84
button to stop the video.
Media Sensor Type Setting
Set the sensor type for detecting the media.
1. Select the media sensor type using the
/
buttons.
[None]
Disable the media sensor.
[Gap]
Select this option when using gap type media. Use the transmissive type sensor.
[I-Mark]
Select this option when using I-mark type media. Use the reflective type sensor.
•
The available options will vary depending on the [Print Mode] set on the printer. The
initial value of [Print Mode] differs depending on the options installed on the printer.
◦
If [Print Mode] is set to [Tear-Off], [Dispenser], or [Cut & Print], only [Gap] and [I-Mark]
will be available.
◦
For CL4NX, if [Print Mode] is set to [Linerless], only [None] and [I-Mark] will be
available.
2. Press the
button or
button to confirm.
85
Media Setting
Media Setting
Load the media. You can check the loading method of the media through the video.
1. Press the
button.
For the models other than the CL4NX linerless model, the selection screen of the video for
playback appears. Proceed to step 2.
For the CL4NX linerless model, the video appears immediately after the
Proceed to step 4.
2. Select the video to playback using the
/
For Standard Model and Cutter Model
[Roll]
Shows the video on how to load the media roll.
[Fanfold]
Shows the video on how to load the fan-fold media.
86
buttons.
button is pressed.
For Dispenser Model
[Dispenser]
Shows the video on how to eject the liner out of the printer.
[Rewinder]
Shows the video on how to rewind the liner in the printer.
3. Press the
button or
button.
The video starts.
4. Load the media while checking the video.
5. After you complete the media setting, press the
The display returns to the previous screen.
6. Press the
button to go to the next screen.
87
button to stop the video.
Completion of Initial Setup Screen
Completion of Initial Setup Screen
When the startup guide completes, the completion of initial setup screen appears.
1. If you want the startup guide to show the next time you start up, press the
button. If not, press the
button.
When you press one of the soft buttons, the printer automatically feeds the media (to the print head
position) and enters Online mode.
•
You can enable or disable the startup guide in [Startup Guide] under the [Tools] menu.
88
Startup Guide Cancelation
You can cancel the startup guide at any time.
1. Press the
button while configuring the startup guide.
The screen to confirm whether or not to show the startup guide again appears.
2. Select whether or not to show the startup guide during the next startup using the
/
buttons, and press the
button to confirm.
Press the
button to return to the startup guide setting without canceling it.
•
You can enable or disable the startup guide in [Startup Guide] under the [Tools] menu.
•
Even if you cancel the startup guide before completing it, the printer will save the
settings you have changed.
89
Configuring the Printer According to Media and Options
Configuring the Printer According to Media and Options
Before starting to print with the printer, configure the printer according to the media to be used and the
installed options.
90
Print Method
The printer supports two types of print methods, thermal transfer and direct thermal.
Thermal Transfer (Use Ribbon)
Prints using a ribbon.
Direct Thermal
Prints using direct thermal media.
•
Ribbon is not necessary if you are using direct thermal media.
Change the print method according to the following procedure:
1. Press the
button in Online mode.
The printer enters Offline mode.
91
Print Method
2. Press the
button.
The printer enters Settings mode.
3. Select [Printing] using the
4. Press the
/
buttons.
button.
The item list appears.
92
5. Select [Ribbon] using the
6. Press the
/
buttons.
button.
The [Ribbon] screen appears.
7. Select the print method using the
/
buttons.
[Use Ribbon]
Prints using a ribbon.
[Direct Thermal]
Prints using direct thermal media.
8. Press the
button to confirm.
93
Media Sensor Type
Media Sensor Type
The printer adjusts the print position precisely by detecting I-marks or Gaps on the media (label) using
media sensors.
The I-marks or Gaps on each type of media are as follows:
I-mark label
Gap label
I-mark journal paper/
linerless label (CL4NX only)
(1) Media feed direction
Set the sensor type to detect the print position according to the media to be used.
Set the sensor type according to the following procedure:
1. Press the
button in Online mode.
The printer enters Offline mode.
94
2. Press the
button.
The printer enters Settings mode.
3. Select [Printing] using the
4. Press the
/
buttons.
button.
The item list appears.
95
Media Sensor Type
5. Select [Sensor Type] using the
6. Press the
/
buttons.
button.
The [Sensor Type] screen appears.
7. Select the sensor type to detect the print position using the
/
buttons.
[None]
Disables the media sensor.
[Gap]
Select this option when using gap type media. Use the transmissive type sensor.
[I-Mark]
Select this option when using I-mark type media. Use the reflective type sensor.
•
If you have selected [Tear-Off], [Dispenser], or [Cut & Print] in the [Print Mode] menu,
only [Gap] and [I-Mark] will be available.
•
If you have selected [Linerless] in the [Print Mode] menu (CL4NX only), only [None]
and [I-Mark] will be available.
96
8. Press the
button to confirm.
97
Print Mode
Print Mode
You can change the print mode of the printer according to its usage and installed options.
The printer has the following print modes:
[Continuous]
Prints the specified number of media. The media remains in position for printing at all times.
[Tear-Off]
After printing the specified number of media, the printer feeds the last printed media so that it is
fully extended out of the printer’s front for removal. After printing, tear off the media manually. The
media will be back to the print head position to start the next printing.
[Cutter]
Cuts each media while printing the specified number of media. You can specify this option only if
you have installed the cutter unit.
[Cut & Print]
Allows you to continuously print and cut at the specified media repeat. If no print data is received
within the period specified for [Eject Cut], the printer will feed the media to the cut position and cut
the last printed media. You can specify this option only if you have installed the cutter unit.
[Dispenser]
Peels the liner from the printed label as the label is fed to the printer’s front. Once the printed label
has been removed from the printer for application, the next label will retract and position itself for
printing. You can specify this option only if you have installed the dispenser unit.
[Linerless] (CL4NX only)
Cuts each label while printing the specified number of labels. You can specify this option only if
you have installed the linerless cutter kit.
•
You cannot set the [Print Mode] if [Auto-mode] is [Enabled].
Change the print mode according to the following procedure:
98
1. Press the
button in Online mode.
The printer enters Offline mode.
2. Press the
button.
The printer enters Settings mode.
3. Select [Printing] using the
/
buttons.
99
Print Mode
4. Press the
button.
The item list appears.
5. Select [Print Mode] using the
6. Press the
/
buttons.
button.
The [Print Mode] screen appears.
100
7. Select the print mode using the
/
buttons.
•
If no option is installed, [Continuous] and [Tear-Off] are available.
•
If the optional cutter unit is installed, [Continuous], [Tear-Off], [Cutter], and [Cut & Print]
are available.
•
If the optional dispenser unit is installed, [Continuous], [Tear-Off], and [Dispenser] are
available.
•
If the optional linerless cutter kit is installed to CL4NX, only [Linerless] is available.
8. Press the
button to confirm.
101
Connecting the Printer to a Computer
Connecting the Printer to a Computer
The topics here explain how to connect the printer to a computer, and how to install the printer driver
and the All-In-One Tool.
102
Procedure for Connecting the Printer to a Computer
The printer supports various interfaces and can be connected to a computer in an optimum way for
your environment. When you have installed the printer driver to the computer, the data created with
the computer (documents and illustrations) can be printed to a label through easy operations.
Also, you can print by sending a command directly to the printer.
The printer can be connected to a computer in the following ways.
1. Connecting Interfaces
2. Configuring the Interface Settings
The interface of the printer can be configured. Access the [Interface] menu of the Settings menu
from the display of the printer or from the web configuration page. It can also be accessed from
the All-In-One Tool, which can be used to install to a computer.
◦
When you connect them with LAN or wireless LAN interfaces, configure the communication
conditions, such as the IP address of the printer.
◦
When you connect them with other interfaces, configure the communication conditions when
needed to adapt to the computer to which you are connecting.
◦
To use the printer driver, the communication protocol must be set to Status4. (The initial value of
the communication protocol for the printer's each interface is Status4.)
3. Installing the Printer Driver
(Unnecessary when using commands)
•
Create a barcode by using barcode fonts. Sometimes the barcode may not be read
by a scanner if it is created with tools for creating images (such as BMP) and printed
from this printer. Because the tools create the barcode as an image only, the barcode
may not be the correct data. Therefore, if the barcode cannot be read by a scanner,
it is not a failure of the printer or printer driver. Note that reading of the barcode is not
guaranteed if it is created by such tools.
•
The head check is just for a reference to check a broken element of the print head, and
it is not a function to guarantee barcode readability. A regular barcode reader test is
required.
103
Available Interfaces
Connecting Interfaces
Available Interfaces
The printer supports the following interfaces.
•
A printer connected with multiple interface cables can continue to operate when
receiving data. However, you cannot receive data from more than one interface at a
time. Normally, do not use multiple interfaces at a time.
•
The printer prints the received data in order of reception. The next received data is
stored in the receive buffer while the first data is printed.
(1) NFC
*This feature is supported on printers from serial number 6B~ and above.
(2) Wireless LAN
(3) RS-232C
(4) IEEE1284
(5) External signal (EXT)
(6) USB
(7) LAN
•
Bluetooth
•
The wireless LAN interface is optional.
•
The NFC interface supports the handover function that simplifies the Bluetooth/Wi-Fi
connection setup with Android devices. In addition, the NFC interface can be used for
changing printer settings with an Android device while the printer is powered off and
the power cord is not connected.
104
•
Do not connect or disconnect the interface cables (or use a switch box) with power
supplied to either the printer or computer. This may cause damage to the interface
circuitry in the printer or computer and is not covered by warranty.
USB Interface Connection (Standard)
Connect the interface cable when the printer is powered off.
Connect the USB cable to the USB connector (Type B) (1) of the printer.
The USB interface is selected after connecting the USB cable to the computer and the printer, and
powering on the printer while the computer is turned on.
•
If the printer is powered on without installing the printer driver, Windows' Plug & Play
runs. When using the printer driver, do not power on the printer while the USB cable is
connected until instructed in the procedure for installing the printer driver.
•
The recommended USB cable is the one within 2 meters (6.6 feet) length.
LAN Interface Connection (Standard)
Connect the interface cable when the printer is powered off.
Connect the LAN cable to the LAN connector (1) of the printer.
105
NFC Interface Connection (Standard)
The communication condition settings must be configured according to your network environment. Set
the IP address of the printer.
The IP address of the printer can be set through the printer's [Interface] menu or the All-In-One Tool.
•
To use the printer driver, the communication protocol must be set to Status4. (The
initial value of the communication protocol for the printer's LAN interface is Status4
ENQ.)
Bluetooth Interface Connection (Standard)
The printer can perform wireless communication with Bluetooth-compatible computers placed within
about 10 meters (32.8 feet) from it.
Make sure that the Bluetooth function of the printer and the computer is enabled, and then add the
printer as a Bluetooth device on the computer.
The printer's Bluetooth function is enabled by default and can be configured from the [Interface] menu
or the All-In-One Tool.
•
To use the printer driver, the communication protocol must be set to Status4. (The
initial value of the communication protocol for the printer's Bluetooth interface is
Status4 Multi.)
NFC Interface Connection (Standard)
The NFC interface of the printer supports a handover function that simplifies the Bluetooth/Wi-Fi
connection setup with Android devices.
The handover function only performs the connection setup, such as the pairing and authentication with
NFC, and passes the actual interface to the more advanced Bluetooth and Wi-Fi when communicating
between NFC supported devices. In general, the pairing and authentication require some procedures
to enter authentication information, but the connection can be completed simply by holding the Android
devices over the printer while using NFC.
Touch the NFC antenna (1) of the printer with the NFC mark on the Android device.
106
•
This feature is supported on printers from serial number 6B~ and above.
•
If it does not communicate well, shift the Android device to the front, back, left and
right, and then hold it up again.
•
For the operation of the NFC for the Android device, refer to the user manual for the
Android device.
RS-232C Interface Connection (Standard)
Connect the interface cable when the printer is powered off.
Connect the RS-232C cable to the RS-232C connector (1) of the printer.
Configure the interface settings of the printer according to the interface settings of the computer.
The communication conditions of the RS-232C interface can be set through the printer's [Interface]
menu or the All-In-One Tool.
107
IEEE1284 Interface Connection (Standard)
•
To use the RS-232C interface to connect with the computer, the printer's [Interface] >
[RS-232C] > [Interface] menu must be set to [RS-232C].
•
The interface settings of the computer can be confirmed by the following. In the Device
Manager, right-click [Ports] > [Communications Port (COM1)] and select [Properties].
Then, check the [Port Settings] tab of the displayed Properties screen.
•
For the RS-232C cable, note that the connection cable varies according to the
communication protocol setting. If you use the wrong cable, it will not operate correctly.
•
If the communication settings differ between the computer and printer, it will not
operate correctly. A communication error will be detected.
•
To use the printer driver, the communication protocol must be set to Status4. (The
initial value of the communication protocol for the printer's RS-232C interface is
STATUS4.)
•
Be sure to use the recommended RS-232C cable.
•
Printing using the USB serial conversion cable is not guaranteed. Also, no support for
the connection procedure is provided.
IEEE1284 Interface Connection (Standard)
Connect the interface cable when the printer is powered off.
Connect the IEEE1284-compliant cable to the IEEE1284 connector (1) of the printer.
108
•
If the printer is powered on without installing the printer driver, Windows' Plug & Play
runs. When you use the printer driver, do not turn on the printer while the cable is
connected, until instructed in the procedure for installing the printer driver.
•
Be sure to use the IEEE1284-compliant cable. If you use cables other than the
IEEE1284-compliant cable, your data may become corrupt.
•
IEEE1284-compliant: compatible mode, ECP mode, and nibble mode are supported.
•
Some computers may not support ECP mode.
•
ECP mode is configured in the BIOS settings of the computer. Some computers may
use the software tools for Windows.
•
Some computer models may not perform ECP operations even if they are set to ECP
mode. Contact the computer manufacturer.
•
Printing using the USB parallel conversion cable is not guaranteed. Also, no support for
the connection procedure is provided.
Wireless LAN Interface Connection (Optional)
Check if the wireless LAN antenna (1) is attached to the printer.
109
Wireless LAN Interface Connection (Optional)
The printer driver performs data communication using the dedicated SOCKET interfaces.
The communication condition settings must be configured according to your network environment. Set
the IP address of the printer.
The IP address of the printer can be set through the printer's [Interface] menu or the All-In-One Tool.
•
To use the printer driver, the communication protocol must be set to Status4. (The
initial value of the communication protocol for the printer's wireless LAN interface is
Status4 ENQ.)
•
The printer does not support Atheros, SuperG, or XR functions.
110
Configuring the Interface Settings
Interface Setting Methods
Configure the interface settings of the printer according to the communication conditions of the
connected network and computer.
You can set the interface settings of the printer doing either of the following.
•
Set from the [Interface] menu of the printer
•
Set using the All-In-One Tool from the computer
Configuring the Interface Settings from the Interface Menu of the Printer
Configure the settings related to the interfaces from the [Interface] menu of the Settings mode of the
printer.
1. Press the
button in Online mode.
The printer enters Offline mode.
111
Configuring the Interface Settings from the Interface Menu of the Printer
2. Press the
button.
The printer enters Settings mode.
3. Select [Interface] using the
4. Press the
/
buttons.
button.
The item list appears.
112
5. Select the interface using the
/
buttons.
[Network]
Sets the LAN connection and wireless LAN connection.
[IEEE1284]
Sets the IEEE1284 connection.
Appears only if the combo interface board is installed.
[RS-232C]
Sets the RS-232C connection.
Appears only if the combo interface board is installed.
[USB]
Sets the USB connection.
[Bluetooth]
Sets the Bluetooth connection.
[NFC]
Sets the NFC connection.
*This feature is supported on printers from serial number 6B~ and above.
[Ignore CR/LF]
Sets to ignore CR/LF codes.
[Ignore CAN/DLE]
Sets to ignore CAN/DLE codes.
[External I/O]
Sets the external signal (EXT).
Appears only if the combo interface board is installed.
[RFID] (CL4NX only)
Sets the RFID.
Appears only for the RFID model.
113
Configuring the Interface Settings Using the All-In-One Tool
6. Press the
button.
The settings items of the selected interface appear.
Change the settings according to the communication conditions of the connected network and
computer.
Configuring the Interface Settings Using the All-In-One Tool
Installing the All-In-One Tool
When you use the All-In-One Tool, you can easily set and manage the printer.
Download the All-In-One Tool and All-In-One Tool Manual from the SATO All-In-One Tool download
site http://www.satoworldwide.com/software/all-in-one-tool.aspx, and install the software to a
computer. For the compatible OS, refer to the "System Requirements" section of the All-In-One Tool
Manual.
LAN Interface Settings
Confirm and configure the LAN interface settings such as the IP address by using the All-In-One Tool.
Confirm and configure the IP address of the printer, which is added to the All-In-One Tool, from the
[Interface Configuration] in the [Configuration] panel.
When you add the printer to the All-In-One Tool, you can manage and monitor the printer.
1. Connect the LAN cable to the printer, and power on the printer.
Make sure that the LED of the printer's LAN connector is lit.
2. Activate [SATO] > [SATO All-In-One Application] on the computer.
3. Select [Auto-Discover] from the [Tools] menu on the main screen.
114
The printer is shown on the main screen.
•
If it is not detected, try to add it manually from [Add new printer]. If it is still not
detected, try the following.
◦
Check that the printer is powered on.
◦
Make sure that the LED of the LAN connector is lit.
◦
Check that the computer and printer you are using are connected to the network.
◦
Directly connect the computer and printer with a LAN cross cable, or disconnect it from
the hub cascade and make it a local LAN environment.
Adding the Printer Manually from [Add new printer]
a. Select [Add new printer] from the [Printer] menu on the main screen.
b. Enter [Printer Name], and select the model name of the printer from the [Model] drop down list.
c. Enter the IP address of the printer into [LAN/Wireless IP], and click [OK].
•
When confirming or changing the port number, click the icon on the right side of the IP
address input column to show the [LAN / Serial Comm. Port Setting] screen.
•
You can check the current IP address of the printer in the [Information] menu of the
Settings menu of the printer.
The printer is added to the main screen.
115
Configuring the Interface Settings Using the All-In-One Tool
4. Select the printer on the main screen, and click [Interface Configuration].
5. Open the [LAN] tab.
116
6. Select or enter the LAN settings as necessary.
(1) When you select [Enable], the IP address which is assigned from the DHCP server becomes
available. You cannot set the IP address, subnet mask, or default gateway address. When you
set the IP address manually, select [Disable].
(2) Specify the IP address.
(3) Specify the subnet mask.
(4) Specify the default gateway address.
(5) The settings on the screen will be sent when you enter the LAN settings (such as the IP address)
and click [Set].
(6) Close the interface settings screen.
•
In the initial value of the LAN settings, the DHCP is enabled.
7. Restart the printer.
Wireless LAN Interface Settings
Configure the wireless LAN interface settings such as the IP address by using the All-In-One Tool.
Before setting the wireless LAN interfaces, connect the printer to a computer with a USB cable or LAN
cable other than the wireless LAN interfaces.
117
Configuring the Interface Settings Using the All-In-One Tool
The following explanation uses an example in which the printer and computer are connected with a
USB cable.
•
The factory settings of the wireless LAN interfaces are as follows:
Wireless Mode
Ad-hoc
Communication Channel
6
SSID
SATO_PRINTER
Security
None
IP Address
0.0.0.0
Subnet Mask
255.255.255.0
Gateway Address
0.0.0.0
•
When you use the wireless LAN connection, the communication condition settings
must be configured according to your network environment. For details, consult with
the network administrator.
1. Connect the USB cable to the printer, and power on the printer.
•
If the printer is turned on without installing the printer driver, Windows' Plug & Play
runs.
◦
For Windows 7/8/8.1/Server 2012, the printer will be added to [Devices and Printers]
as an unspecified device.
◦
If a message is displayed that indicates new hardware is detected on Windows Vista/
Server 2008, cancel it.
2. Activate [SATO] > [SATO All-In-One Application] on the computer.
118
3. Select [Auto-Discover] from the [Tools] menu on the main screen.
The printer is shown on the main screen.
If it is not detected, try to add it manually from [Add new printer].
Adding the Printer Manually from [Add new printer]
a. Select [Add new printer] from the [Printer] menu on the main screen.
b. Select [USB Port]. Select the printer to add from the drop down list, and click [OK].
The printer is added on the main screen.
119
Configuring the Interface Settings Using the All-In-One Tool
4. Select the printer on the main screen, and click [Interface Configuration].
5. Open the [Wireless LAN Security] tab.
120
6. Select or enter the wireless LAN settings as necessary.
7. When the settings are completed, click [Set].
The settings on the screen are sent to the printer.
8. Power off the printer, disconnect the USB cable, and power on the printer.
121
Installing the Printer Driver (USB)
Installing the Printer Driver
Basic Information about the Printer Driver
The printer driver is software that can send data created on the computer (documents and illustrations)
to the printer and print it to a label.
Before installing the printer driver, check the following basic information.
Driver Name
Install the printer driver according to the model and resolution of the printer you are using.
Driver Name
Supported Model
SATO CL4NX 203dpi
CL4NX
SATO CL4NX 305dpi
SATO CL4NX 609dpi
SATO CL6NX 203dpi
CL6NX
SATO CL6NX 305dpi
Compatible OS
For OS compatible with the printer driver, access the SATO printer driver download site http://
www.satoworldwide.com/software/gallerydriver.aspx and refer to the "Support OS" row of the SATO
Windows printer driver.
•
This manual uses the printer driver version 6.0.12.7043 for description. Note that the
screen layout may differ depending on the version of the printer driver.
Installing the Printer Driver (USB)
When the computer is connected to the Internet, the printer driver is automatically installed after
connecting the USB cable between the computer and the printer and powering on the printer.
Do the following procedures to install the printer driver when the computer is not connected to the
Internet. The following procedures use Windows 8.1 as an example.
122
•
Before starting the installation, close all applications.
•
Power off the printer and connect the interface cable to a computer.
•
When you do the printer driver setup, the properties settings, or the print settings, log in
with Administrator Privilege.
•
When you use the printer driver, enable bi-directional communication.
•
If the terminal service is being started with Windows Server 2008, change the terminal
service to the install mode. However, it is not guaranteed that the printer driver can be
used in the terminal service environment.
•
When using multiple printers, it is necessary to install as many printer drivers as
printers, to identify each printer.
•
After installing the printer driver for the first printer, the printer driver for the second and
additional printers will be automatically installed when the printers are connected to
the computer and powered on. However, the name of the printer drivers will be "driver
name (1)", "driver name (2)", and so on. To change the driver name, right-click the
printer in [Devices and Printers], select [Printer properties], and change the name at
the top of the [General] tab.
1. Power off the printer and connect the USB cable to a computer.
2. Start Windows.
3. Download the printer driver from the SATO printer driver download site http://
www.satoworldwide.com/software/gallerydriver.aspx.
4. Extract the downloaded compressed file of the printer driver.
5. Power on the printer.
Windows' Plug & Play runs.
•
If a message is displayed that indicates new hardware is detected on Windows Vista/
Server 2008, cancel it.
To install the printer driver, right-click the device with a question mark in [Other devices]
of the Device Manager. Then, select [Properties], and install it from the [Driver] tab of
the displayed Properties screen.
123
Installing the Printer Driver (USB)
6. Open [Devices and Printers], right-click the added printer in [Unspecified], and
select [Properties].
124
7. In the [Hardware] tab, click [Properties].
125
Installing the Printer Driver (USB)
8. In the [General] tab, click [Change settings] (if there is no [Change settings], move
to the next step.)
9. In the [Driver] tab, click [Update Driver].
126
10. Select [Browse my computer for driver software].
11. Click [Browse], select the folder of the downloaded printer driver, and click [Next].
127
Installing the Printer Driver (USB)
12. When the security warning screen appears, click [Install].
•
The warning screen above may not appear depending on the version of the printer
driver or your computer environment.
•
If a security warning screen indicating that another process is blocking access
appears, follow the steps on the screen, and click [Next].
13. Click [Close] to complete the installation.
14. Click [Close] to close the properties screen.
15. Click [OK] to close the properties screen.
128
16. In [Devices and Printers], confirm that the printer is added to [Printers].
•
The settings of the printer driver should be performed by the Administrator Privilege.
Installing the Printer Driver (LAN/Wireless LAN)
Do the following procedures to install the printer driver using a LAN/Wireless LAN. The following
procedures use Windows 8.1 as an example.
•
Before starting the installation, close all applications.
•
Power off the printer and connect the interface cable to a computer.
•
When you do the printer driver setup, the properties settings, or the print settings, log in
with Administrator Privilege.
•
When you use the printer driver, enable bi-directional communication.
•
If the terminal service is being started with Windows Server 2008, change the terminal
service to the install mode. However, it is not guaranteed that the printer driver can be
used in the terminal service environment.
•
When using multiple printers, it is necessary to install as many printer drivers as
printers, to identify each printer.
1. Power on the printer, and confirm that the printer is connected to the network.
129
Installing the Printer Driver (LAN/Wireless LAN)
2. Start Windows.
3. Download the printer driver from the SATO printer driver download site http://
www.satoworldwide.com/software/gallerydriver.aspx.
4. Extract the downloaded compressed file of the printer driver.
5. Execute PrnInst.exe to start the installer.
6. If a user account control message appears, click [Yes] or [Continue].
7. Click [Next].
8. Click [Install Printer].
130
9. Select the model of the printer and click [Next].
•
Select the model which is compatible with the resolution of the printer. The resolution of
the printer is displayed on the upper left of the Online/Offline screen.
131
Installing the Printer Driver (LAN/Wireless LAN)
10. Click [Add Port].
A list of the printers found on the network appears.
11. Select the printer to add and click [Add].
If the printer is not shown on the list, click [Refresh]. If the printer is still not shown on the list, add
the printer using the following procedures.
132
a. Click [Manual].
b. Select [TCP/IP (LAN)] from [Select port type], and click [OK].
c.
Configure the TCP/IP (LAN) port.
(1) Enter the port name.
(2) Enter the printer name or IP address.
(3) Normally, it is not necessary to change the timeout settings.
(4) Confirm the entered information.
133
Installing the Printer Driver (LAN/Wireless LAN)
12. Click [Finish].
13. When the security warning screen appears, click [Install].
The printer driver is installed.
•
The warning screen above may not appear depending on the version of the printer
driver or your computer environment.
•
If a security warning screen indicating that another process is blocking access
appears, follow the steps on the screen, and click [Next].
134
14. Open [Devices and Printers]* and confirm that the printer driver is installed.
*[Printers] in Windows Vista
•
The settings of the printer driver should be performed by the Administrator Privilege.
Installing the Printer Driver (Bluetooth)
To use the printer driver with the Bluetooth interface connection, install the printer driver and add the
printer to the computer as a Bluetooth device. Then, it is necessary to change the port setting of the
printer driver according to the port setting of the added Bluetooth device.
The procedure for adding (pairing) the Bluetooth device varies depending on the environment of your
computer. The following procedure is an example of Windows 8.1. For details, refer to the user manual
of your computer.
135
Installing the Printer Driver (Bluetooth)
•
Before starting the installation, close all applications.
•
When you do the printer driver setup, the properties settings, or the print settings, log in
with Administrator Privilege.
•
When you use the printer driver, enable bi-directional communication.
•
If the terminal service is being started with Windows Server 2008, change the terminal
service to the install mode. However, it is not guaranteed that the printer driver can be
used in the terminal service environment.
•
When using multiple printers, it is necessary to install as many printer drivers as
printers, to identify each printer.
1. Start Windows.
2. Download the printer driver from the SATO printer driver download site http://
www.satoworldwide.com/software/gallerydriver.aspx.
3. Extract the downloaded compressed file of the printer driver.
4. Execute PrnInst.exe to start the installer.
5. If a user account control message appears, click [Yes] or [Continue].
6. Click [Next].
136
7. Click [Install Printer].
8. Select the model of the printer and click [Next].
137
Installing the Printer Driver (Bluetooth)
•
Select the model which is compatible with the resolution of the printer. The resolution of
the printer is displayed on the upper left of the Online/Offline screen.
9. Click [Add Port].
138
10. Click [Manual] and add a port manually.
11. Select [SERIAL (COM)] from the [Select port type] drop down list and click [OK].
12. Enter the port name (and port information as necessary), and click [OK].
Normally, it is not necessary to change the timeout settings.
139
Installing the Printer Driver (Bluetooth)
13. Click [Finish].
14. When the security warning screen appears, click [Install].
The printer driver is installed.
•
The warning screen above may not appear depending on the version of the printer
driver or your computer environment.
•
If a security warning screen indicating that another process is blocking access
appears, follow the steps on the screen, and click [Next].
140
15. Open [Devices and Printers]* and confirm that the printer driver is installed.
*[Printers] in Windows Vista
16. Power on the printer.
17. Confirm that Bluetooth is enabled (initial value) in the [Interface] menu of the
printer.
After you confirm it, return the printer to [Online].
141
Installing the Printer Driver (Bluetooth)
18. Right-click the Bluetooth icon at the lower-right corner of the Windows desktop
screen, and select [Add a Bluetooth Device].
19. Select the printer from the search device list and click [Pair].
•
The initial value of the device name for the printer is "SATO PRINTER_xxxxxxxxxxxx
(BD address)". You can check and change it on the [Bluetooth] > [Name] on the
[Interface] menu of the printer.
20. Enter the passcode for the printer and click [Next].
142
•
The default passcode of the printer is 0000. You can check and change it on the
[Bluetooth] > [PIN Code] on the [Interface] menu of the printer.
The printer is added as a Bluetooth device.
143
Installing the Printer Driver (Bluetooth)
21. Open [Devices and Printers]*, right-click the printer added as a Bluetooth device,
and select [Properties].
*[Printers] in Windows Vista
144
22. Confirm the port assigned as the [Serial port (SPP)] in the [Services] tab, and click
[OK].
145
Installing the Printer Driver (Bluetooth)
23. Again, open [Devices and Printers]*, right-click the printer checked in step 15, and
select [Printer properties].
*[Printers] in Windows Vista
146
24. Select the port of the Bluetooth device checked in step 22 in [Print to the following
port(s). ] in the [Ports] tab, and click [OK].
The printer driver can be used with the Bluetooth interface connection.
When printing, use the printer for which you changed the setting in steps 23 to 24, not the printer
added as the Bluetooth device.
147
Installing the Printer Driver (RS-232C)
•
The settings of the printer driver should be performed by the Administrator Privilege.
Installing the Printer Driver (RS-232C)
Do the following procedures to install the printer driver using RS-232C interfaces. The following
procedures use Windows 8.1 as an example.
148
•
Before starting the installation, close all applications.
•
Power off the printer and connect the interface cable to a computer.
•
When you do the printer driver setup, the properties settings, or the print settings, log in
with Administrator Privilege.
•
When you use the printer driver, enable bi-directional communication.
•
If the terminal service is being started with Windows Server 2008, change the terminal
service to the install mode. However, it is not guaranteed that the printer driver can be
used in the terminal service environment.
•
When using multiple printers, it is necessary to install as many printer drivers as
printers, to identify each printer.
•
The interface settings of the connection port (COM) for the printer and computer should
match. You can check the interface settings in the [Interface] menu of the printer. The
interface settings of the computer can be confirmed by the following. In the Device
Manager, right-click [Ports] > [Communications Port (COM1)] and select [Properties].
Then, check the [Port Settings] tab of the displayed Properties screen.
•
To use the RS-232C interface to connect with the computer, the printer's [Interface] >
[RS-232C] > [Interface] menu must be set to [RS-232C].
1. Connect the printer and computer with the RS-232C cable, and power on the
printer.
2. Start Windows.
3. Download the printer driver from the SATO printer driver download site http://
www.satoworldwide.com/software/gallerydriver.aspx.
4. Extract the downloaded compressed file of the printer driver.
5. Execute PrnInst.exe to start the installer.
6. If a user account control message appears, click [Yes] or [Continue].
149
Installing the Printer Driver (RS-232C)
7. Click [Next].
8. Click [Install Printer].
150
9. Select the model of the printer and click [Next].
•
Select the model which is compatible with the resolution of the printer. The resolution of
the printer is displayed on the upper left of the Online/Offline screen.
151
Installing the Printer Driver (RS-232C)
10. Click [Add Port].
11. Click [Manual] and add a port manually.
12. Select [SERIAL (COM)] from the [Select port type] drop down list and click [OK].
152
13. Enter the port name (and port information as necessary) and click [OK].
Normally, it is not necessary to change the timeout settings.
14. Click [Finish].
153
Installing the Printer Driver (RS-232C)
15. When the security warning screen appears, click [Install].
The printer driver is installed.
•
The warning screen above may not appear depending on the version of the printer
driver or your computer environment.
•
If a security warning screen indicating that another process is blocking access
appears, follow the steps on the screen, and click [Next].
16. Open [Devices and Printers]* and confirm that the printer driver is installed.
*[Printers] in Windows Vista
154
•
The settings of the printer driver should be performed by the Administrator Privilege.
Installing the Printer Driver (IEEE1284)
When the computer is connected to the Internet, the printer driver is automatically installed after
connecting the IEEE1284 compliant cable between the computer and the printer and powering on the
printer.
Do the following procedures to install the printer driver when the computer is not connected to the
Internet. The following procedures use Windows 8.1 as an example.
•
Before starting the installation, close all applications.
•
Power off the printer and connect the interface cable to a computer.
•
When you do the printer driver setup, the properties settings, or the print settings, log in
with Administrator Privilege.
•
When you use the printer driver, enable bi-directional communication.
•
If the terminal service is being started with Windows Server 2008, change the terminal
service to the install mode. However, it is not guaranteed that the printer driver can be
used in the terminal service environment.
•
When using multiple printers, it is necessary to install as many printer drivers as
printers, to identify each printer.
•
After installing the printer driver for the first printer, the printer driver for the second and
additional printers will be automatically installed when the printers are connected to
the computer and powered on. However, the name of the printer drivers will be "driver
name (1)", "driver name (2)", and so on. To change the driver name, right-click the
printer in [Devices and Printers], select [Printer properties], and change the name at
the top of the [General] tab.
1. Power off the printer and connect the IEEE1284 compliant cable to a computer.
2. Start Windows.
3. Download the printer driver from the SATO printer driver download site http://
www.satoworldwide.com/software/gallerydriver.aspx.
4. Extract the downloaded compressed file of the printer driver.
5. Power on the printer.
Windows' Plug & Play runs.
•
If a message is displayed that indicates new hardware is detected on Windows Vista/
Server 2008, cancel it.
To install the printer driver, right-click the device with a question mark in [Other devices]
of the Device Manager. Then, select [Properties], and install from the [Driver] tab of the
displayed Properties screen.
155
Installing the Printer Driver (IEEE1284)
6. Open [Devices and Printers], right-click the added printer in [Unspecified], and
select [Properties].
156
7. In the [Hardware] tab, click [Properties].
157
Installing the Printer Driver (IEEE1284)
8. In the [General] tab, click [Change settings] (if there is no [Change settings], move
to the next step.)
9. In the [Driver] tab, click [Update Driver].
158
10. Select [Browse my computer for driver software].
11. Click [Browse], select the folder of the downloaded printer driver, and click [Next].
159
Installing the Printer Driver (IEEE1284)
12. When the security warning screen appears, click [Install].
•
The warning screen above may not appear depending on the version of the printer
driver or your computer environment.
•
If a security warning screen indicating that another process is blocking access
appears, follow the steps on the screen, and click [Next].
13. Click [Close] to complete the installation.
14. Click [Close] to close the properties screen.
15. Click [OK] to close the properties screen.
160
16. Open [Devices and Printers]* and confirm that the printer driver is installed.
*[Printers] in Windows Vista
•
The settings of the printer driver should be performed by the Administrator Privilege.
Uninstalling the Printer Driver
The printer driver is uninstalled using the installer with the following procedures. The following
procedures use Windows 8.1 as an example.
Do not remove the device from [Devices and Printers].
•
Before starting the uninstallation, close all applications.
•
When you do the printer driver setup, the properties settings, or the print settings, log in
with Administrator Privilege.
1. Power off the printer.
2. Start Windows.
3. Download the printer driver from the SATO printer driver download site http://
www.satoworldwide.com/software/gallerydriver.aspx.
161
Uninstalling the Printer Driver
4. Extract the downloaded compressed file of the printer driver.
5. Execute PrnInst.exe to start the installer.
6. If a user account control message appears, click [Yes] or [Continue].
7. Click [Next].
8. Click [Uninstall Printer].
162
9. Check the check box of the printer you want to uninstall and click [Next].
You can select multiple printers.
The printer driver is uninstalled.
•
When the multiple printers are shown, as long as you do not remove all of the printers,
the files related to the installed printer drivers are not removed. In that case, only the
printer name is removed.
•
If a security warning screen indicating that another process is blocking access
appears, follow the steps on the screen, and click [Next].
10. Click [Exit].
163
Configuring the Printer Driver Settings as an Administrator
Printer Driver Features
The topics here explain how to open the printer driver setting screens and provide an overview of the
printer driver features.
Configuring the Printer Driver Settings as an Administrator
Configuring the Printer Driver Settings as an Administrator (Windows 7/8/8.1/Server 2012)
When printing a layout created by an application software, configure the printer driver settings first.
The settings of the printer driver should be done by the administrator. If you change a setting value
or add a printer port through someone other than the administrator, an error screen appears and the
processes you operated are not reflected.
In Windows 7/8/8.1/Server 2012, open the properties screen of the printer driver as an administrator
with the following procedures. The following procedures use Windows 8.1 as an example.
1. Open the [Devices and Printers] folder.
2. Right-click the icon of the printer you use and select [Printer properties].
164
3. Open the [Sharing] tab.
165
Configuring the Printer Driver Settings as an Administrator
4. Click [Change Sharing Options].
166
If [Change Sharing Options] is not shown, do the following procedures.
a. Open the [Control Panel] and select [Network and Sharing Center].
167
Configuring the Printer Driver Settings as an Administrator
b. Select [Change advanced sharing settings].
c.
In [File and printer sharing], select [Turn off file and printer sharing] and click the [Save changes]
button.
168
Configuring the Printer Driver Settings as an Administrator (Windows Vista/Server 2008)
When printing a layout created by an application software, configure the printer driver settings first.
The settings of the printer driver should be done by the administrator. If you change a setting value
or add a printer port through someone other than the administrator, an error screen appears and the
processes you operated are not reflected.
In Windows Vista/Server 2008, open the properties screen of the printer driver as an administrator with
the following procedures. The following procedures use Windows Vista as an example.
1. Open the [Printers] folder.
2. Right-click the icon of the printer you use and select [Run as administrator], and
then [Properties].
Configuring the Driver Settings
In the printer driver [Properties] > [Driver settings] tab, various settings can be configured, such as
adding media size and fonts and importing/exporting the driver settings.
169
Configuring the Driver Settings
•
The settings of the printer driver should be done by an administrator.
(1) [Stocks]
Manages stored media. The stored media can be used from applications.
(2) [Fonts]
Defines and manages barcode fonts and command fonts. You can add, modify, and delete
definitions. Also, you can print by replacing the system fonts with the printer’s device fonts when
defining replacement fonts.
(3) [Driver Settings]
Sets whether to enable the driver settings or application settings.
(4) [Configure Printer]
Obtains and changes the settings of the connected printer.
(5) [Maintenance]
Outputs the current driver settings to a file and reads the settings.
(6) [International]
Sets the display language of the printer driver.
•
Be sure to manage the master data for fonts by customer. SATO do not take
responsibility for data stored on the printer.
170
Configuring the Printer Settings
[Printing Defaults] and [Printing Preferences]
These functions can configure the media settings and printing modes of the printer from the printer
driver and send them to the printer.
Use [Printing Defaults] or [Printing Preferences] from the properties screen of the printer.
When configuring the printer driver for all users, use [Printing Defaults].
When configuring the printer driver for each user, use [Printing Preferences].
•
The settings of the printer driver should be done by an administrator.
How to Show the [Printing Defaults] Settings Screen
When you open the printer driver [Properties], select the [Advanced] tab and click [Printing Defaults],
the [Printing Defaults] settings screen is opened. The printer driver settings for all users can be
selected.
171
Configuring the Printer Settings
How to Show the [Printing Preferences] Settings Screen
When you open the printer driver [Properties], select the [General] tab and click [Preferences], the
[Printing Preferences] settings screen is opened. The user specific printer driver settings can be
selected.
•
When you right-click the printer in [Devices and Printers] and select [Printing
preferences], the same screen as the settings screen for the [Printing Preferences]
appears.
Overview of the Printer Settings
The printer settings can be configured from the printer settings screen of [Printing Defaults] or [Printing
Preferences].
•
The settings of the printer driver should be done by an administrator.
172
(1) [Page Setup]
Sets the size and sensor type of the media set to the printer.
(2) [Print Options]
Adjusts the settings of the print speed, print darkness, and base reference point.
(3) [Print Mode]
Sets the print mode of the printer.
(4) [Graphic Options]
Specifies dithering and the graphic form when sending to the printer.
It is not necessary to change it in particular, and it is available with initial values.
(5) [Custom Commands]
Specifies the method to control the printer behavior directly.
It is best to use this method only if user understands the SBPL command or the programming
references.
(6) [Maintenance]
Returns the printer driver settings to their initial values.
(7) [International]
Selects the unit to be used.
(8) [About]
Shows the version of the printer driver and provides access to the SATO homepage.
Outputting a Label from an Application Software
The method for starting a print job varies depending on application software. In general, print jobs
begin when you click [Print] button in the dialog that is displayed after selecting [Print] from the [File]
menu. Refer to the user manual of the application software you are using.
173
Outputting a Label from an Application Software
Before starting the print job, confirm that the printer driver to be used in the application software is set
to the appropriate printer driver for the printer you are using.
The method for setting the printer driver varies depending on the application software. In general,
select the item you want from the list that is displayed when you select [Print] from the [File] menu, or
when you click [▼] in [Printer Name] in the dialog.
Depending on the application software. it may be necessary to select the media again in the media
selection function of the application software to use the media selected in the [Page Setup] of the
printer driver.
174
•
If you use software such as NiceLabel, the settings of the software are enabled, not the
settings of the printer driver.
Printer Driver Sharing Function
Connecting When Using the Printer Driver with Sharing Settings
The figure below shows how to connect when using the printer driver with sharing settings.
Set one computer (PC-0) as the print server and set other computers (PC-1, PC-2, PC-3, and so on)
as clients. All computers should be connected using a LAN connection and the print server and printer
should be connected using LPT, COM, USB, or LAN.
Printer Driver Sharing Settings
The following shows how to set the printer driver when using the printer driver with sharing settings.
1. In both the print server and clients, download and install the printer driver from
the SATO printer driver download site http://www.satoworldwide.com/software/
gallerydriver.aspx.
•
If you are adding it with the [Add a printer] icon from the [Printers] folder, the necessary
files may not be installed and may not perform correctly (the copy of the sharing printer
icon on the network computer will be the same).
2. After confirming that a label can be output correctly from the printer driver of the
print server, set the printer driver to "Shared".
3. Specify the output port of the client's printer driver to the sharing printer
configured on the server.
Environment
Setting Method
Windows Vista/Server 2008
In the printer driver, open [Properties] > [Ports] > [Add Port]
> [Local Port], and specify the port name as "\\Sharing
computer name\Sharing printer name".
Windows 7/8/8.1/Server 2012
In the printer driver, open [Printer properties] > [Ports] >
[Add Port] > [Local Port], and specify the port name as "\
\Sharing computer name\Sharing printer name".
175
Printer Driver Sharing Function
4. Turn off the bi-directional communication of the printer driver in the client.
Environment
Setting Method
Windows Vista/Server 2008
In the printer driver, open [Properties] > [Ports], and
uncheck [Enable bidirectional support].
Windows 7/8/8.1/Server 2012
In the printer driver, open [Printer properties] > [Ports], and
uncheck [Enable bidirectional support].
Restrictions When Using the Printer Driver with Sharing Settings
When you use the printer driver with sharing settings, the following restrictions occur because bidirectional communication is disabled in the client.
•
Errors that occur with the printer, such as "Paper End" and "Ribbon End", cannot be recognized.
•
In the printer driver [Properties] > [Driver settings] tab > [Configure Printer], [Get from printer] and
[Send to printer] cannot be used.
•
The settings you change in the printer driver [Printing Preferences] > [Printer Settings] tab cannot
be sent to the printer (when the green check box is not selected).
176
All-In-One Tool Features
When you add the printer to the All-In-One Tool, you can easily set and manage the printer.
The main functions of the All-In-One Tool are as follows:
•
For details of the All-In-One Tool, download and read the All-In-One Tool Manual from
the SATO All-In-One Tool download site http://www.satoworldwide.com/software/all-inone-tool.aspx.
(1) Print and interface settings can be configured from the [Configuration] panel displayed when
selecting the printer on the main screen.
(2) Application settings and status monitoring of the printer can be enabled from the menu displayed
when right-clicking after selecting the printer on the main screen.
(3) Fonts and graphics can be stored in the printer and the SBPL command can be sent from the
[Tools] menu of the main screen.
177
Media, Ribbon and Print Methods
Loading Media and Ribbon
Media, Ribbon and Print Methods
The printer supports two types of print methods, thermal transfer and direct thermal.
The media or ribbon to be used varies depending on the print method.
Thermal transfer
Print using a ribbon.
Direct thermal
Print using direct thermal media.
•
Ribbon is not necessary if you are using direct thermal media.
178
Loading Media
The topics here explain how to load the media.
179
Usable Media
Usable Media
The printer can print on the following two types of media.
•
Media roll
•
Fan-fold media
The printer uses media sensors to detect I-marks or Gaps on the media in order to precisely print the
content.
I-mark label
Gap label
I-mark journal paper/
linerless label (CL4NX only)
(1) Media feed direction
180
Adjusting the Position of the Media Sensor
When you use nonstandard media (for example, media with printing on the underside, or media with
a special shape), the media sensor cannot detect the I-mark or Gap of the media correctly. In such a
case, adjust the position of the media sensor to detect the I-mark or Gap correctly.
•
Adjust the media sensor guide to the position where it can detect the I-mark or Gap of the
media.
•
The I-mark sensor (reflective type) is below the
type) is below the
mark.
181
mark, and the Gap sensor (transmissive
Loading the Media Roll
Loading the Media
Precautions for Loading the Media
Use genuine SATO media and ribbons for the printer, for optimum print quality.
•
The print head and its surroundings are hot after printing. Be careful not to touch it, to
avoid being burned.
•
Touching the edge of the print head with your bare hand could cause injury.
Loading the Media Roll
•
The routing path of the media is shown in the below picture.
Face-in media
Face-out media
1. Open the top cover (1).
182
•
Open the top cover fully to prevent accidental drop of the cover.
2. Push the head lock lever (2) towards the rear.
183
Loading the Media Roll
3. Pull the media holder guide (3) and media guide (4) away from the printer.
Turn the knob (5) counterclockwise to release the media guide.
4. Load the media in the media holder (6).
Make sure that the media roll is all the way in towards the inside of the printer.
5. Push the media holder guide (3) lightly against the media roll.
184
6. Pass the media below the media damper (7) and the media sensor guide (8) while
pushing the media to inside of the printer.
Make sure that the end of the media extends out the front of the printer.
7. Press the print head down until the head lock lever is locked.
8. Press the media guide (4) lightly against the end of the media, and turn the knob (5)
to lock the media guide.
9. Close the top cover.
185
Loading the Fan-fold Media
•
When closing the top cover, be careful not to pinch your fingers.
10. Perform a test print to make sure that the media is loaded correctly.
•
You need to load the ribbon when printing using thermal transfer.
Loading the Fan-fold Media
1. Open the top cover (1).
•
Open the top cover fully to prevent accidental drop of the cover.
2. Push the head lock lever (2) towards the rear.
186
3. Place the fan-fold media on a flat location, and load the media from the media slot
on the rear or the bottom of the printer.
The routing path of the media is shown in the below picture.
Load the media from the rear of the printer
Load the media from the bottom of the printer.
•
When loading the media, make sure that the print side faces up.
4. After passing the media through the slot, refer to the same steps as the Media Roll
to load the media.
5. Perform a test print to make sure that the media is loaded correctly.
•
You need to load the ribbon when printing using thermal transfer.
•
If a media jam frequently occurs with the media being loaded from the bottom of the
printer, change the load location to the rear of the printer.
Loading the Media with the Optional Cutter Unit
•
Be careful not to touch the cutter blade.
1. Open the top cover (1).
187
Loading the Media with the Optional Cutter Unit
•
Open the top cover fully to prevent accidental drop of the cover.
2. Push the head lock lever (2) towards the rear.
188
3. Pull the media holder guide (3) and media guide (4) away from the printer.
Turn the knob (5) counterclockwise to release the media guide.
4. Load the media roll or the fan-fold media.
For Media Roll
The routing path of the media is shown in the below picture.
Face-in media
Face-out media
189
Loading the Media with the Optional Cutter Unit
a. Load the media in the media holder (6).
Make sure that the media roll is all the way in towards the inside of the printer.
b. Push the media holder guide (3) lightly against the media roll.
For Fan-fold Media
a. Place the fan-fold media on a flat location, and then load the media from the rear of the printer or
from the media slot on the bottom of the printer.
The routing path of the media is shown in the below picture.
190
Load the media from the rear of the printer
Load the media from the bottom of the printer.
•
When loading the media, make sure that the print side faces up.
5. Pull the tab (7) of the cutter unit in the direction A, and then open up the cutteropen lever to (B).
6. Pass the media below the media damper (8) and media sensor guide (9) and
through the cutter unit while pushing the media to inside of the printer.
Make sure that the end of the media extends out the front of the printer.
191
Loading the Media with the Optional Cutter Unit
7. Press the print head down until the head lock lever is locked.
8. Close the cutter and then push the tab (7) in the reverse direction to lock it.
9. Press the media guide (4) lightly against the end of the media, and then turn the
knob (5) to lock the media guide.
10. Close the top cover.
•
When closing the top cover, be careful not to pinch your fingers.
11. Perform a test print to make sure that the media is loaded correctly.
192
•
You need to load the ribbon when printing using thermal transfer.
Loading the Media with the Optional Dispenser Unit and Liner Discharge Outlet
The below topic describes the procedure to dispense the label and eject the liner out of the printer.
1. Open the top cover (1).
•
Open the top cover fully to prevent accidental drop of the cover.
2. Push the head lock lever (2) towards the rear.
193
Loading the Media with the Optional Dispenser Unit and Liner Discharge Outlet
3. Pull the media holder guide (3) and media guide (4) away from the printer.
Turn the knob (5) counterclockwise to release the media guide.
4. Load the media in the media holder (6).
Make sure that the media roll is all the way in to inside of the printer.
5. Push the media holder guide (3) lightly against the media roll.
194
6. Pass the media below the media damper (7) and the media sensor guide (8) while
pushing the media to inside of the printer.
Make sure that the end of the media extends out the front of the printer.
7. Press the tab (9) at the front of the printer to open the dispenser unit (10).
8. Remove about 30 cm (11.8") of labels (11) from the liner (12).
195
Loading the Media with the Optional Dispenser Unit and Liner Discharge Rewinder
9. Pass the liner (12) through the gap of the dispenser unit to the outside of the
printer.
10. Adjust the dispenser roller (13) to the center of the label.
11. Close the print head.
12. Close the dispenser unit.
13. Press the media guide lightly against the end of the media, and then turn the knob
to lock the media guide.
14. Close the top cover.
•
When closing the top cover, be careful not to pinch your fingers.
15. Perform a test print to make sure that the media is loaded correctly.
•
You need to load the ribbon when printing using thermal transfer.
Loading the Media with the Optional Dispenser Unit and Liner Discharge Rewinder
The below topic describes the procedure to dispense the label and rewind the liner in the printer.
196
•
The maximum diameter of the liner that can be rewound in the printer is φ120 mm
(4.72").
•
The routing path of the media is shown in the below picture.
Label
Liner
1. Open the top cover (1).
•
Open the top cover fully to prevent accidental drop of the cover.
197
Loading the Media with the Optional Dispenser Unit and Liner Discharge Rewinder
2. Push the head lock lever (2) towards the rear.
3. Pull the media holder guide (3) and media guide (4) away from the printer.
Turn the knob (5) counterclockwise to release the media guide.
4. Load the media in the media holder (6).
Make sure that the media roll is all the way in to inside of the printer.
198
5. Push the media holder guide (3) lightly against the media roll.
6. Pass the media below the media damper (7) and the media sensor guide (8) while
pushing the media to inside of the printer.
Make sure that the end of the media extends out the front of the printer.
7. Press the tab (9) at the front of the printer to open the dispenser unit (10).
199
Loading the Media with the Optional Dispenser Unit and Liner Discharge Rewinder
8. Remove about 80 cm (31.5") of labels (11) from the liner (12).
9. Pass the liner (12) through the gap of the dispenser unit to the inside of the printer.
10. Adjust the dispenser roller (13) to the center of the label.
11. Pass the liner (12) below the liner rewinder (14), and attach it with the clip (15).
200
12. Rotate the liner rewinder (14) counterclockwise by hand, to wind the liner.
13. Close the print head.
14. Close the dispenser unit.
15. Press the media guide lightly against the end of the media, and then turn the knob
to lock the media guide.
16. Close the top cover.
•
When closing the top cover, be careful not to pinch your fingers.
17. Perform a test print to make sure that the media is loaded correctly.
•
You need to load the ribbon when printing using thermal transfer.
Removing the Liner from the Rewinder
•
The rewinder can take up maximum a diameter of 120 mm (4.72") of liner.
1. Pull the clip (1) away from the printer and pull to remove the liner (2).
201
Removing the Liner from the Rewinder
2. Place the clip back to its original position.
202
Loading Ribbon
You need to load the ribbon when printing using thermal transfer. The topics here explain how to load
and replace the ribbon.
203
Checking the Ink Side of the Ribbon
Checking the Ink Side of the Ribbon
There are two wind directions for the ribbon. Face-out means the ink is on the outer side and Face-in
means the ink is on the inner side. The printer supports both wind directions. You can examine the ink
side of the ribbon using the following procedure.
1. Place the outer side of the ribbon onto the media (touching).
2. Scratch the inner side of the ribbon with your fingernail or a pointed object.
If there is a mark on the media, the ink is coated on the outer side of the ribbon.
◦
The ink is coated on the outer side. (Face-out ribbon)
◦
The ink is coated on the inner side. (Face-in ribbon)
204
Loading the Ribbon
•
The print head and its surroundings are hot after printing. Be careful not to touch it, to
avoid being burned.
•
Touching the edge of the print head with your bare hand could cause injury.
•
Use genuine SATO media and ribbons for the printer, for optimum print quality.
•
The routing path of the ribbon is shown in the below picture.
Face-in ribbon
Face-out ribbon
•
You can also refer to the sticker located on the inner side of the top cover.
1. Open the top cover (1).
205
Loading the Ribbon
•
Open the top cover fully to prevent accidental drop of the cover.
2. Push the ribbon rewind spindle (2) all the way in.
If there is any ribbon on the ribbon rewind spindle, remove it from the spindle before installing new
ribbon.
3. Push the head lock lever (3) towards the rear.
206
4. Load the ribbon (4) onto the ribbon supply spindle (5).
While taking note of the wind direction, insert the ribbon all the way in.
5. From the ribbon supply spindle (5), pass the ribbon below the print head (6).
6. Wind the ribbon counterclockwise to the ribbon rewind spindle (2) and grip sheet
(7).
Turn the ribbon rewind spindle counterclockwise for several rounds, to wind the ribbon.
207
Loading the Ribbon
7. If the media is already loaded, press the print head down until the head lock lever
is locked.
If the media is not loaded, load the media.
8. Close the top cover.
•
When closing the top cover, be careful not to pinch your fingers.
208
Replacing the Ribbon
1. Open the top cover (1).
•
Open the top cover fully to prevent accidental drop of the cover.
2. Push the head lock lever (2) towards the rear.
209
Replacing the Ribbon
3. Press the tab (3) on the tip of the ribbon rewind spindle to pull it out.
4. Pull to remove the used ribbon from the ribbon rewind spindle.
5. Push the ribbon rewind spindle (4) all the way in.
6. Remove the used ribbon core from the ribbon supply spindle.
210
7. Load the ribbon (5) onto the ribbon supply spindle (6).
While taking note of the wind direction, insert the ribbon all the way in.
8. From the ribbon supply spindle (6), pass the ribbon below the print head (7).
9. Wind the ribbon counterclockwise to the ribbon rewind spindle (4) and grip sheet
(8).
Turn the ribbon rewind spindle counterclockwise for several rounds, to wind the ribbon.
211
Replacing the Ribbon
10. Press the print head down until the head lock lever is locked.
11. Close the top cover.
•
When closing the top cover, be careful not to pinch your fingers.
12. Press the
button (FEED) to feed the media.
13. Press the
button (ONLINE) to change to Online mode.
212
When to Replace Media and Ribbon
Checking the Remaining Amount of Media and Ribbon
You can check the remaining amount of media and ribbon according to the following procedure.
•
Checking through the window on the right side of the printer
You can visually check the remaining amount of media and ribbon in the printer through the window
on the right side of the printer (1).
•
Checking through the notifications of the printer
The printer has Near End and End detection functions for the media and ribbon.
With icons and error messages on the display of the printer, you can check if you need to replace
the media or ribbon soon, or if the remaining amount of media and ribbon is scarce.
*Label Near End is supported on printers from serial number 6B~ and above.
213
Conditions That Trigger Paper End
Conditions That Trigger Paper End, Label Near End, Ribbon End and
Ribbon Near End
Conditions That Trigger Paper End
The conditions that trigger paper end vary depending on the operation of the printer.
Conditions That Trigger Paper End in the Feeding Operation
A paper-end occurs if the no-paper condition persists even after the paper-end sensor detects the nopaper condition when 15 mm (0.59") continues to be fed.
(1) Print head position
(2) Paper end sensor: I-mark sensor/Gap sensor
Select in [Printing] > [Advanced] > [Paper End] menu, or specify by command.
(3) Media feed direction
Conditions That Trigger Paper End in the Printing Operation
1. The paper end sensor detects a no-paper condition at the position where 15 mm (0.59") has been
fed.
214
2. If the amount of printing remaining is less than the distance between the print head position and
paper end sensor -15 mm (-0.59"), a paper end error occurs after completing the output of 1.
If the amount of media remaining is more than the distance between the print head position and
paper end sensor -15 mm (-0.59"), a paper end error occurs right after detecting the paper end,
and the printer will reprint after clearing the paper end error.
(1) Print head position
(2) Paper end sensor: I-mark sensor/Gap sensor
Select in [Printing] > [Advanced] > [Paper End] menu, or specify by command.
(3) Media feed direction
If a paper end error is detected while printing, operation varies depending on the amounts of printing
and media remaining when the error was detected.
The amount of media remaining can be calculated as follows:
Amount of media remaining = distance between print head position and paper end sensor -15 mm
(-0.59")
(1) Print head position
(2) Distance between the print head position and paper end sensor
(3) Paper end sensor
(4) Amount of media remaining
215
Conditions That Trigger Paper End
•
When the Amount of Printing Remaining Is More Than the Amount of Media Remaining
If the amount of printing remaining is more than the amount of media remaining when a paper
end error is detected, the printer cannot finish the print job. Printing stops immediately and a
paper end error occurs.
(1) Print head position
(2) Paper end sensor
(3) Amount of media remaining
(4) Amount of printing remaining
•
When the Amount of Printing Remaining Is Less Than the Amount of Media Remaining
If the amount of printing remaining is less than the amount of media remaining, the printer will
finish the print job and a paper end error will occur.
(1) Print head position
(2) Paper end sensor
(3) Amount of media remaining
(4) Amount of printing remaining
216
If there are multiple sheets between the print head and paper end sensor when a paper end error
is detected, a paper end error will occur only after finishing the label currently being printed.
(1) Print head position
(2) Paper end sensor
(3) Amount of media remaining
(4) Amount of printing remaining
Conditions That Trigger Label Near End
Label near end is detected by the label near end sensor.
Label near end occurs when the amount of label remaining is less than approximately 12 meters (39.4
feet) (media thickness: 160 μm (0.0063"), label diameter: approximately φ96 mm (3" core)).
•
This feature is supported on printers from serial number 6B~ and above. Although this
setting appears on printers with serial number 6A~ or below, it is not supported.
•
Detection of the label near end is only for reference. The timing of label near end and
paper end may overlap, or the paper end may occur before the label near end occurs
depending on the label thickness and the top and bottom fluttering of the paper core.
Conditions That Trigger Ribbon End
Ribbon end error is detected by the ribbon sensor in the ribbon supply spindle. Ribbon end error
occurs when the printer detects that the ribbon in the ribbon supply spindle has not moved (rolled)
more than 15 mm (0.59") after feeding the media.
Conditions That Trigger Ribbon Near End
Ribbon near end is detected by the ribbon sensor in the ribbon supply spindle. Ribbon near end
occurs when the amount of ribbon remaining is approximately less than 15 meters (49.2 feet) (ribbon
diameter: approximately 36 mm (1.42")).
•
The amount of ribbon remaining (15 meters (49.2 feet)) is only for reference. The
timing of ribbon near end varies depending on the ribbon thickness and the reading
status of the ribbon sensor.
217
[Shortcut] Menu
Printer Settings
The [Settings] Menu
[Shortcut] Menu
Frequently used settings are listed in the [Shortcut] menu.
218
[Printing] Menu
The following settings are available in the [Printing] menu:
Label Length
Set the length of the media.
Label Width
Set the width of the media.
Auto Measure
Automatically measure the length of the media.
Ribbon
Set whether to print using a ribbon or direct thermal media.
Ribbon Near End
Enable or disable the warning when the ribbon is about to run out.
◦
Appears only if you have selected [Use Ribbon] in the [Ribbon] menu.
Speed
Set the print speed.
Sensor Type
Set the media sensor type.
Auto-mode
Automatically set the print mode.
Print Mode
Manually set the print mode.
Backfeed
Set the backfeed operation.
219
[Label Length]
Eject Cut
Set the time from the print completion until the print cut.
◦
Appears only if you have selected [Cut & Print] in the [Print Mode] menu.
Darkness Range
Set the range of the print darkness.
Darkness
Set the print darkness.
Imaging
Set the print reference position in the vertical and horizontal directions.
Advanced
Set the sensor operation and print motion.
[Label Length]
Set the length of the media.
The setting range varies depending on the print resolution of the printer.
The setting range of the label length is as follows:
Resolution
CL4NX
CL6NX
203 dpi
1 to 20000 dots
1 to 20000 dots
1 to 18000 dots
1 to 18000 dots
1 to 9600 dots
-
(1 dot = 0.125 mm
(0.0049"))
305 dpi
(1 dot = 0.083 mm
(0.0033"))
609 dpi
220
Resolution
CL4NX
CL6NX
(1 dot = 0.042 mm
(0.0017"))
•
Set the label size to a value that includes the liner.
[Label Width]
Set the width of the media.
The setting range varies depending on the print resolution of the printer.
The setting range of the label width is as follows:
Resolution
203 dpi
CL4NX
CL6NX
CL6NX
If [Head Base Position]
is [Standard]
If [Head Base Position]
is [Left-justify]
1 to 832 dots
1 to 1216 dots
1 to 1340 dots
1 to 1248 dots
1 to 1984 dots
1 to 2010 dots
1 to 2496 dots
-
-
(1 dot =
0.125 mm
(0.0049"))
305 dpi
(1 dot =
0.083 mm
(0.0033"))
609 dpi
(1 dot =
0.042 mm
(0.0017"))
•
Set the label size to a value that includes the liner.
221
[Auto Measure]
[Auto Measure]
The printer automatically measures the length of the media.
The measured length of the media will be automatically saved in [Label Length].
The Auto Measure function can be performed when [Sensor Type] is set to [Gap] or [I-Mark].
The setting procedure of the label length using the Auto Measure function is as follows:
1. Load the media.
2. Set [Auto Measure] to [Enabled].
3. Press the
button or
button to show the Online or Offline screen.
4. Open the print head. (Head Open error occurs.)
5. Close the print head. (The display returns to Offline screen.)
6. When you press the
button, the printer feeds two pieces of label and measures the label
length.
7. The measured label length is saved in [Label Length].
•
When you have set [Auto Measure] to [Enabled], this function executes when the
printer powers on.
222
[Ribbon]
Set whether to print using a ribbon or direct thermal media.
The options are as follows:
Use Ribbon
Print using a ribbon.
Direct Thermal
Print using direct thermal media.
[Ribbon Near End]
Shows or does not show the warning icon when the ribbon is about to run out. Printing does not stop
even if the warning icon shows up.
Appears only if you have selected [Use Ribbon] in the [Ribbon] menu.
The options are as follows:
Enabled
Shows the warning icon.
223
[Speed]
Disabled
Does not show the warning icon.
•
The warning icon is shown in the status bar on the upper part of the screen.
[Speed]
The setting range varies depending on the print resolution of the printer.
The setting range of the print speed is as follows:
Resolution
CL4NX
CL6NX
203 dpi (8 dots/mm)
2 to 10 ips (inches/sec) (50.8 to 254
mm/sec)
2 to 10 ips (inches/sec) (50.8 to 254
mm/sec)
305 dpi (12 dots/mm)
2 to 8 ips (inches/sec) (50.8 to
203.2 mm/sec)
2 to 8 ips (inches/sec) (50.8 to
203.2 mm/sec)
609 dpi (24 dots/mm)
2 to 6 ips (inches/sec) (50.8 to 152
mm/sec)
-
•
If the optional linerless cutter kit is installed to CL4NX, the setting range is as follows:
◦
The setting range is 2 to 6 ips (inches/sec) (50.8 to 152 mm/sec) regardless of the
printing resolution.
◦
If the [Speed] is set more than 7 ips (177.8 mm/sec), it is changed to 4 ips after
installing the linerless cutter kit.
•
Setting the print speed to a level that is too fast may affect the print quality.
224
[Sensor Type]
Set the sensor type for detecting the media.
The options are as follows:
None
Disable the media sensor.
Gap
Select when using the media of Gap type. Use the transmissive type sensor.
I-Mark
Select when using the media of I-mark type. Use the reflective type sensor.
•
If you have selected [Tear-Off], [Dispenser], or [Cut & Print] in the [Print Mode] menu,
only [Gap] and [I-Mark] will be available.
•
If you have selected [Linerless] in the [Print Mode] menu (CL4NX only), only [None]
and [I-Mark] will be available.
[Auto-mode]
225
[Print Mode]
When using [Auto-mode], the print mode changes automatically according to the status of the installed
option unit.
The options are as follows:
Enabled
The print mode changes automatically.
Disabled
The print mode changes according to the setting of the [Print Mode].
•
Operate in cutter mode if you have installed the optional cutter unit.
•
Operate in dispenser mode if you have installed the optional dispenser unit.
•
Operate in linerless mode if you have installed the optional linerless cutter kit (CL4NX
only).
[Print Mode]
Set the print mode.
The options are as follows:
Continuous
Continuously print the specified number of the media. The media remains in position for printing at
all times.
Tear-Off
After continuously printing the specified number of the media, feed the media to the point to
remove the media. After printing, tear off the media manually. The media will be back to the print
head position for starting the next printing.
Cutter
Cut each media while printing the specified number of media. You can specify this option only if
you have installed the cutter unit.
Cut & Print
Allows you to continuously print and cut at the specified media repeat. If no print data is received
within the period specified for [Eject Cut], the printer will feed the media to the cut position and cut
the last printed media. You can specify this option only if you have installed the cutter unit.
226
Dispenser
Peel the liner from the printed label as the label is fed to the printer’s front. Once the printed label
has been removed from the printer for application, the next label will retract and position itself for
printing. You can specify this option only if you have installed the dispenser unit.
Linerless (CL4NX only)
Cut each label while printing the specified number of labels. You can specify this option only if you
have installed the linerless cutter kit.
•
If no option is installed, [Continuous] and [Tear-Off] are available.
•
If the optional cutter unit is installed, [Continuous], [Tear-Off], [Cutter], and [Cut & Print]
are available.
•
If the optional dispenser unit is installed, [Continuous], [Tear-Off], and [Dispenser] are
available.
•
If the optional linerless cutter kit is installed to CL4NX, only [Linerless] is available.
•
You cannot set the [Print Mode] if [Auto-mode] is [Enabled].
[Backfeed]
[Backfeed] is applicable only when the print mode is set to tear-off mode, cutter mode, cut & print
mode, dispenser mode or linerless mode (CL4NX only).
The options are as follows:
None
Do not backfeed.
After
After cut, backfeed the front part of the next media to the print head position. For dispenser mode,
backfeed the front part of the next label after dispensing the label.
Before
Before printing, backfeed the front part of the next media to the print head position.
227
[Darkness Range]
•
If you have selected [Tear-Off] or [Linerless] (CL4NX only) in the [Print Mode], only
[Before] is available.
•
If you have selected [Cut & Print] in the [Print Mode], only [After] is available.
[Eject Cut]
Set the Eject cut motion for the last printed media. Cut the last media after the specified timing.
Appears only if you have selected [Cut & Print] in the [Print Mode] menu.
The setting range is Off, or from 1 to 4 (sec).
[Darkness Range]
Set the range of the print darkness.
The darkness range affects the print darkness.
The options are as follows:
A, B, C, D, E, F
•
The normal setting is A. You can also select B to F but the print darkness does not
change.
228
[Darkness]
Specify the print darkness from 10 steps.
The setting range is from 1 to 10. 1 is the lightest and 10 is the darkest.
•
To further fine tune the print darkness, set the items in [Printing] > [Advanced] >
[Adjustments] > [Darkness Adjust].
[Imaging]
Set the print reference position in the vertical and horizontal directions.
The setting items are as follows:
Vertical
Adjust the print position in the vertical (feed) direction.
Horizontal
Adjust the print position in the horizontal direction.
229
[Imaging]
Adjusting direction of the print reference position and base reference point
(1) Feed direction
(2) Liner
(3) Label
(4) Gap
(5) Adjustment of vertical base reference point
(6) Base reference point after adjustment
(7) Adjustment of horizontal base reference point
(8) Print reference position
[Vertical]
Set the print position in the vertical direction.
230
Set the correction value from the standard printing position as "-" for the direction of the paper feed
and "+" for the direction opposite to the paper feed.
(1) Feed direction
The setting range is from -792 to +792 dots.
•
The length of 1 dot varies depending on the print resolution of the printer.
◦
203 dpi : 1 dot = 0.125 mm (0.0049")
◦
305 dpi : 1 dot = 0.083 mm (0.0033")
◦
609 dpi : 1 dot = 0.042 mm (0.0017")
[Horizontal]
Set the print position in the horizontal direction.
231
[Advanced]
Set the correction value from the standard printing position when facing the printer as "-" to adjust to
the right side and "+" to adjust to the left side.
(1) Feed direction
The setting range is from -792 to +792 dots.
•
The length of 1 dot varies depending on the print resolution of the printer.
◦
203 dpi : 1 dot = 0.125 mm (0.0049")
◦
305 dpi : 1 dot = 0.083 mm (0.0033")
◦
609 dpi : 1 dot = 0.042 mm (0.0017")
[Advanced]
Set detailed sensor operation and print motion.
The setting items are as follows:
Calibrate
Adjust the media sensor.
232
Head Check
Check if there is a broken element of the print head.
Head Check Mode
Set the mode for head check.
◦
Appears only if you have selected [All] or [Barcode] in the [Head Check] menu.
Every Page
Set the interval for head check.
◦
Appears only if you have selected [Every Page] in the [Head Check Mode] menu.
Check Media Size
Enable or disable media size check.
◦
Appears only if you have selected [Gap] or [I-Mark] in the [Sensor Type] menu.
Adjustments
Correct the offset value, print position and print darkness.
Start Online
Set whether to power on the printer in Online mode.
Feed After Error
Set whether to automatically feed the media when recovering from an error.
Feed At Power On
Set whether to automatically feed the media at power on.
Finisher Feed
Set the length to feed after printing.
Paper End
Select the sensor for sensing the paper end.
Head Base Position
Set the edge position for printing.
Prioritize
Select the prioritized setting.
Reprint
Enable or disable the reprint function.
Print End Position
Adjust the media stop position or cut position when [Sensor Type] is set to [None].
Label Near End
Enable or disable the warning when the media is about to run out.
*This feature is supported on printers from serial number 6B~ and above. Although this setting
appears on printers with serial number 6A~ or below, it is not supported.
233
[Advanced]
[Calibrate]
Adjust the media sensor level.
In instances of media detection malfunction, adjust the media sensor level (Gap and I-mark sensors).
The setting items are as follows:
Auto-calibration
Automatically adjust the sensor level.
◦
Does not appear if you have installed the optional linerless cutter kit (CL4NX only).
GAP Levels
Manually set the Gap sensor level.
GAP Slice Level
Manually set the Gap sensor slice level.
I-Mark Levels
Manually set the I-mark sensor level.
I-Mark Slice Level
Manually set the I-mark sensor slice level.
234
[Auto-calibration]
Perform the auto-calibration for the selected media sensor.
[Auto-calibration] is not available if you have installed the optional linerless cutter kit (CL4NX only).
Gap + I-Mark
Adjusts both the Gap sensor and I-mark sensor.
Gap
Adjusts the Gap sensor.
I-Mark
Adjusts the I-mark sensor.
The procedure to auto-calibrate the media sensor is as follows:
1. Push the head lock lever towards the rear to unlock the print head.
2. Pass the media below the media sensor guide. If you are using labels, remove the label from the
liner. Align it so that the media sensor does not detect the I-mark (black mark).
3. Press the print head down until the head lock lever is locked. To get the correct adjustment result,
adjust after you have locked the print head.
4. Press the
/
buttons to select the type of sensor to be adjusted.
5. Press the
button or
button.
6. When the confirmation screen appears, press the
button to start the sensor adjustment.
7. The result of the sensor adjustment is shown. To exit the adjustment, press the
8. Set to Offline mode. Press the
•
button.
button to confirm that the media is fed correctly.
If the media is not fed correctly after [Auto-calibration], contact your SATO reseller or
technical support center.
235
[Advanced]
[GAP Levels]
Manually set the Gap sensor level.
The setting procedure is as follows:
First, adjust the "Low" level (voltage) of the Gap sensor.
1. Remove the label from the liner.
2. Pass the liner through the media sensor. Align it so that the media sensor does not detect the Imark (black mark).
3. Close the print head. To get the correct adjustment result, adjust after you have closed the print
head.
4. Select the [GAP Levels] in the [Calibrate] menu and press the
button.
5. Press the
/
buttons to change the [Emit] value until the [Sensor] value is below 0.5 (V).
Set the [Emit] value as low as possible.
6. If the [Sensor] value does not decrease below 0.5 after you changed the [Emit] value, press the
/
buttons to change the [Receive] value.
7. Take a note of the [Sensor] value from the above procedure. This is the "Low" level value for the
Gap sensor.
Next, check the "High" level (voltage) of the Gap sensor as follows:
1. Pass the media (attached with liner) between the media sensors. Align it so that the media sensor
does not detect the I-mark (black mark).
2. Close the print head.
3. Check the [Sensor] value.
If the value is 1.0 (V) higher than the "Low" level value you have recorded, this is the "High" level
value for the Gap sensor.
If the difference between the "High" and the "Low" levels is less than 1.0, adjust the [Emit] and
[Receive] values so that the difference is more than 1.0, or adjust the "Low" level (voltage) of the
Gap sensor again.
4. If both "High" and "Low" levels comply with the standard value, press the
button to
confirm the value.
The standard values for the "High" and "Low" levels for the Gap sensor are as follows:
236
◦
Low (with only liner) ≤ 0.5 (V)
◦
High (media attached with liner) - Low ≥ 1.0 (V)
[GAP Slice Level]
Set the Gap sensor slice level.
The setting procedure is as follows:
1. Use the following formula to calculate the slice level:
(High level - Low level) x 0.3 + Low level = slice level
2. Select the [GAP Slice Level] in the [Calibrate] menu and press the
button.
3. Press the
/
buttons to change the [Slice level] value. Set the [Slice level] to the level
calculated in step 1.
4. Press the
button to confirm the value.
•
If you set the [Slice level] to 0.0 (V), the printer sets the slice level automatically.
237
[Advanced]
[I-Mark Levels]
Manually set the I-mark sensor level.
The setting procedure is as follows:
First, adjust the "Low" level (voltage) of the I-mark sensor.
1. Pass the media (attached with liner) between the media sensors. Align it so that the media sensor
does not detect the I-mark (black mark).
2. Close the print head. To get the correct adjustment result, adjust after you have closed the print
head.
3. Select the [I-Mark Levels] in the [Calibrate] menu and press the
button.
4. Press the
/
buttons to change the [Emit] value until the [Sensor] value is below 0.5 (V).
Set the [Emit] value as low as possible.
5. If the [Sensor] value does not decrease below 0.5 after you changed the [Emit] value, press the
/
buttons to change the [Receive] value.
6. Take a note of the [Sensor] value from the above procedure. This is the "Low" level value for the Imark sensor.
Next, check the "High" level (voltage) of the I-mark sensor as follows:
1. Pass the media between the media sensors so that the media sensor can detect the I-mark (black
mark).
2. Close the print head.
3. Check the [Sensor] value.
If the value is 1.0 (V) higher than the "Low" level value you have recorded, this is the "High" level
value for the I-mark sensor.
If the difference between the "High" and the "Low" levels is less than 1.0, adjust the [Emit] and
[Receive] values so that the difference is more than 1.0, or adjust the "Low" level (voltage) of the Imark sensor again.
4. If both "High" and "Low" levels comply with the standard value, press the
button to
confirm the value.
The standard values for the "High" and "Low" levels for the I-mark sensor are as follows:
◦
Low (without I-mark) ≤ 0.5 (V)
238
◦
High (with I-mark) - Low ≥ 1.0 (V)
[I-Mark Slice Level]
Set the I-mark sensor slice level.
The setting procedure is as follows:
1. Use the following formula to calculate the slice level:
(High level - Low level) x 0.7 + Low level = slice level
2. Select the [I-Mark Slice Level] in the [Calibrate] menu and press the
button.
3. Press the
/
buttons to change the [Slice level] value. Set the [Slice level] to the slice level
calculated in step 1.
4. Press the
button to confirm the value.
•
If you set the [Slice level] to 0.0 (V), the printer sets the slice level automatically.
[Head Check]
239
[Advanced]
Automatically check if there is a broken element of the print head.
The options are as follows:
Off
Disable the Head Check.
All
Check the entire print area.
Barcode
Check only the area for printing a barcode. Head check is not applicable for barcodes printed as
graphic data.
•
Head check is a reference for checking for a broken element of the print head. This
function does not guarantee barcode readability. A regular barcode reader test is
required. When a void of printing got up, the head check function may not work
immediately. Some gaps may occur.
For the outputted label after the head error, perform the scanner reader of the printed
barcode to check the label.
[Head Check Mode]
Set the method for head check.
Appears only if you have selected [All] or [Barcode] in the [Head Check] menu.
The options are as follows:
Always
Perform the head check for every item.
After Batch
The head check occurs before starting to print and when printing is stopped. If backfeed is
applicable, the head check occurs before starting to print, when stopping to print and during the
backfeed.
Every Page
Perform the head check for each specified number of media.
240
[Every Page]
Perform the head check for each specified number of media.
Appears only if you have selected [Every Page] in the [Head Check Mode] menu.
The setting range is from 1 to 999999.
[Check Media Size]
Enable or disable media size check.
Media size check is a function to detect a Media Error when you load a media longer than the media
size specified by command, or if you have specified print data larger than the loaded media length.
Appears only if you have selected [Gap] or [I-Mark] in the [Sensor Type] menu.
The options are as follows:
Enabled
Enable media size check.
Disabled
Disable media size check.
241
[Advanced]
[Adjustments]
Correct the offset position, print position and print darkness.
The setting items are as follows:
Offset
Adjusts the backfeed/stop position for Tear-off/Cut/Dispense operation.
Pitch
Adjusts the leading edge of media position thus effects the vertical print position placement.
Darkness Adjust
Fine tune the print darkness.
[Offset]
Correct the offset position.
Offset adjusts the backfeed/stop position for Tear-off/Cut/Dispense operation.
Set the value '+' to move the offset position in the direction opposite to the feed direction and '-' to
move in the feed direction.
The setting range varies depending on the print resolution of the printer.
The setting range is as follows:
242
Resolution
CL4NX
CL6NX
203 dpi
-30 to 0 to 30 dots
-30 to 0 to 30 dots
-45 to 0 to 45 dots
-45 to 0 to 45 dots
-90 to 0 to 90 dots
-
(1 dot = 0.125 mm
(0.0049"))
305 dpi
(1 dot = 0.083 mm
(0.0033"))
609 dpi
(1 dot = 0.042 mm
(0.0017"))
[Pitch]
Pitch adjusts the leading edge of media position thus effects the vertical print position placement.
Set the value '+' to move print position in the direction opposite to the feed direction and '-' to move in
the feed direction.
(1) Feed direction
The setting range varies depending on the print resolution of the printer.
243
[Advanced]
The setting range is as follows:
Resolution
CL4NX
CL6NX
203 dpi
-30 to 0 to 30 dots
-30 to 0 to 30 dots
-45 to 0 to 45 dots
-45 to 0 to 45 dots
-90 to 0 to 90 dots
-
(1 dot = 0.125 mm
(0.0049"))
305 dpi
(1 dot = 0.083 mm
(0.0033"))
609 dpi
(1 dot = 0.042 mm
(0.0017"))
[Darkness Adjust]
Fine tune the print darkness.
The setting range is from 0 to 99.
0 is the lightest and 99 is the darkest.
[Start Online]
244
Select default mode at power on.
The options are as follows:
Enabled
The printer powers on in Online mode.
Disabled
The printer powers on in Offline mode.
[Feed After Error]
Set whether to automatically feed the media when recovering from an error and changing to Online
mode.
The options are as follows:
Enabled
Feed the media when changing to Online mode after recovering from an error.
Disabled
Do not feed the media when changing to Online mode after recovering from an error.
However, if [Feed At Power On] is set to [Enabled], the printer feeds the media when it is powered
on and changes to Online mode.
245
[Advanced]
[Feed At Power On]
Set whether to automatically feed the media at power on.
The options are as follows:
Enabled
Feed the media when the printer is powered on.
Disabled
Do not feed the media when the printer is powered on.
However, if [Feed After Error] is set to [Enabled], the printer feeds the media when it is powered
on and changes to Online mode.
[Finisher Feed]
Set the media feed amount for Tear-off, cut and dispense stop. Set the media feed amount based on
the print head position of 0.
The actual media feed amount is the value of [Offset] + [Finisher Feed].
The setting range varies depending on the print resolution of the printer.
The setting range is as follows:
246
Resolution
CL4NX
CL6NX
203 dpi
0 to 2040 dots
0 to 2040 dots
0 to 3060 dots
0 to 3060 dots
0 to 6120 dots
-
(1 dot = 0.125 mm
(0.0049"))
305 dpi
(1 dot = 0.083 mm
(0.0033"))
609 dpi
(1 dot = 0.042 mm
(0.0017"))
[Paper End]
Select the sensor for sensing the paper end.
The options are as follows:
Using I-mark
Use the I-mark sensor (reflective type) to detect the paper end.
Using Gap
Use the Gap sensor (transmissive type) to detect the paper end.
247
[Advanced]
[Head Base Position]
Set the position used for the base reference point for printing.
The options are as follows:
Item
CL4NX
CL6NX
[Standard]
Print with a standard base
reference point.
Print with a standard base
reference point.
[Left-justify]
Move the base reference point 2
mm (0.08") to the left toward the
printer.
Expand the width of the printable
area (maximum print width) to 167.5
mm (6.59").
Move the base reference point 2
mm (0.08") to the left toward the
printer.
•
A message prompting you to restart the printer will appear on the Online/Offline screen
if you have made any changes. In such a case, reboot the printer to apply the settings.
248
[Prioritize]
For printer settings, set whether to prioritize the settings through the printer or through commands.
The options are as follows:
Commands
Prioritize the settings through commands.
Settings
Prioritize the settings through the printer.
[Reprint]
Enable or disable the reprint function.
The options are as follows:
Enabled
Enable the reprint function.
Disabled
Disable the reprint function.
249
[Advanced]
If you have selected [Enabled] in [Reprint], you can press the
Online screen to print the previous data again.
•
button ([REPRINT]) on the
The previous data will be lost if you power off the printer.
[Print End Position]
Adjust the media stop position or cut position when the [Sensor Type] is set to [None]. This adjustment
also sets the blank amount from the media stop position.
The setting range varies depending on the print resolution of the printer.
The setting range is as follows:
Resolution
CL4NX
CL6NX
203 dpi
0 to 20000 dots
0 to 20000 dots
0 to 18000 dots
0 to 18000 dots
0 to 9600 dots
-
(1 dot = 0.125 mm
(0.0049"))
305 dpi
(1 dot = 0.083 mm
(0.0033"))
609 dpi
(1 dot = 0.042 mm
(0.0017"))
250
[Label Near End]
Shows or does not show the warning icon when the media is about to run out. Printing does not stop
even if the warning icon shows up.
The options are as follows:
Enabled
Shows the warning icon.
Disabled
Does not show the warning icon.
•
This feature is supported on printers from serial number 6B~ and above. Although this
setting appears on printers with serial number 6A~ or below, it is not supported.
•
The warning icon is shown in the status bar on the upper part of the screen.
251
[Interface] Menu
[Interface] Menu
The following settings are available in the [Interface] menu:
Network
Set the LAN connection and wireless LAN connection.
IEEE1284
Set the IEEE1284 connection.
◦
Appears only if the combo interface board is installed.
RS-232C
Set the RS-232C connection.
◦
Appears only if the combo interface board is installed.
USB
Set the USB connection.
Bluetooth
Set the Bluetooth connection.
NFC
Set the NFC connection.
*This feature is supported on printers from serial number 6B~ and above.
Ignore CR/LF
Set to ignore CR/LF codes.
Ignore CAN/DLE
Set to ignore CAN/DLE codes.
252
External I/O
Set the external signal (EXT).
◦
Appears only if the combo interface board is installed.
RFID
Set the RFID. (CL4NX only)
◦
Appears only for the RFID model.
[Network]
To use LAN and wireless LAN for the interface between the host and the printer.
The setting items are as follows:
Settings
Set the LAN or wireless LAN, or select the interface.
Services
Set the TCP/IP port number, NTP, LPD, FTP, SNMP, or SOS (SATO Online Services).
Advanced
Set the advanced function for the interface.
253
[Network]
[Settings]
Set the LAN or wireless LAN, or select the interface.
The setting items are as follows:
LAN
Set the LAN.
Wi-Fi
Set the wireless LAN.
◦
Appears only if you have installed the optional wireless LAN.
Interface
Select the network interface.
◦
This item is to select the network interface from LAN or wireless LAN when you have installed
the optional wireless LAN.
•
You cannot use LAN and wireless LAN at the same time. The wireless LAN function is
available only if you have installed the wireless LAN.
254
[LAN]
Set the IPv4, IPv6 or proxy for the LAN.
The setting items are as follows:
IPv4
Set the IPv4 for the LAN.
IPv6
Set the IPv6 for the LAN.
Proxy
Set the proxy for the LAN.
[IPv4]
Set IPv4 for the LAN.
The setting items are as follows:
Mode
Select the IP address assignment method.
DHCP / Renew Lease
Update the lease time and get the IP address from the DHCP server again.
255
[Network]
◦
Appears only if you have selected [DHCP] in the [Mode] menu and LAN is the active interface.
◦
Does not appear if the wireless LAN is the active interface.
IP Address
Set and check the IP address.
If you have selected [DHCP] in the [Mode] menu, the screen shows the IP address you received
from the DHCP server.
If you have selected [Static] in the [Mode] menu, select to set the IP address.
Netmask
Set and check the subnet mask address.
If you have selected [DHCP] in the [Mode] menu, the screen shows the subnet mask address you
received from the DHCP server.
If you have selected [Static] in the [Mode] menu, select to set the subnet mask address.
Gateway
Set and check the default gateway address.
If you have selected [DHCP] in the [Mode] menu, the screen shows the gateway address you
received from the DHCP server.
If you have selected [Static] in the [Mode] menu, select to set the default gateway address.
DNS
Set and check DNS server addresses.
If you have selected [Static] in the [Mode] menu, select to set and check DNS server addresses.
•
the
•
button to enable the new settings. Press
After doing the settings, press the
button to cancel the new settings and return to the previous settings.
You cannot change [IP Address], [Netmask], [Gateway], or [DNS] if [Mode] is [DHCP].
[Mode]
256
Select the IP address assignment method.
The options are as follows:
DHCP
Automatically retrieve the IP address, gateway and subnet mask from the DHCP server.
Static
Manually set the IP address, gateway and subnet mask.
[IP Address]
If you have selected [Static] in the [Mode] menu, set the IP address.
The setting range is as follows:
000.000.000.000 to 255.255.255.255
[Netmask]
If you have selected [Static] in the [Mode] menu, set the subnet mask address.
Each group of the address can be set cyclically among 0, 128, 192, 224, 240, 248, 252, 254 and 255.
The setting range is as follows:
128.000.000.000 to 255.255.255.254
257
[Network]
[Gateway]
If you have selected [Static] in the [Mode] menu, set the default gateway address.
The setting range is as follows:
000.000.000.000 to 255.255.255.255
[DNS]
If you have selected [Static] in the [Mode] menu, set and check DNS server addresses.
The setting range is as follows:
000.000.000.000 to 255.255.255.255
•
You can register up to three IP addresses for the DNS server. Use a comma to delimit
different IP addresses.
258
[IPv6]
Set the IPv6 for the LAN.
The setting items are as follows:
Mode
Select the IP address assignment method or disable IPv6.
DHCP / Renew Lease
Update the lease time and get the IP address from the DHCP server again.
◦
Appears only if you have selected [DHCP] in the [Mode] menu.
◦
Does not appear if the wireless LAN is the active interface.
IP Address
Set and check the IP address.
If you have selected [DHCP] in the [Mode] menu, the screen shows the IP address you received
from the DHCP server.
If you have selected [Static] in the [Mode] menu, select to set the IP address.
Prefix Length
Set and check the prefix.
Gateway
Set and check the default gateway address.
If you have selected [DHCP] in the [Mode] menu, the screen shows the gateway address you
received from the DHCP server.
If you have selected [Static] in the [Mode] menu, select to set the default gateway address.
DNS
Set and check the address of the primary DNS server.
If you have selected [Static] in the [Mode] menu, select to set the primary address of the DNS
server.
259
[Network]
•
After doing the settings, press the
the
•
button to enable the new settings. Press
button to cancel the new settings and return to the previous settings.
You cannot change [IP Address], [Prefix Length], [Gateway], or [DNS] if [Mode] is
anything other than [Static].
[Mode]
Select the IP address assignment method or disable IPv6.
The options are as follows:
Disable
Disable IPv6.
Auto
Automatically generate the IP address and gateway (stateless mode).
DHCP
Automatically retrieve the IP address and gateway from the DHCP server (stateful mode).
Static
Manually set the IP address, gateway and prefix length.
260
[IP Address]
If you have selected [Static] in the [Mode] menu, set the IP address.
The setting range is as follows:
0:0:0:0:0:0:0:1 to ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff
[Prefix Length]
If you have selected [Static] in the [Mode] menu, set the prefix.
The setting range is from 1 to 128.
261
[Network]
[Gateway]
If you have selected [Static] in the [Mode] menu, set the default gateway address.
The setting range is as follows:
0:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 to ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff
[DNS]
If you have selected [Static] in the [Mode] menu, set the primary address of the DNS server.
The setting range is as follows:
0:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 to ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff
•
You can register only one IP address for the DNS server for IPv6.
262
[Proxy]
Set the proxy for the LAN.
The setting items are as follows:
Enabled
Enable or disable use of proxy.
Server
Set the proxy server address.
Exclude
Exclude the proxy server usage.
[Enabled]
Enable or disable use of proxy.
The options are as follows:
Enabled
Enable proxy server usage.
263
[Network]
Disabled
Disable proxy server usage.
•
To enable the proxy, [Server] should be set and [Exclude] must contain at least
127.0.0.1 and localhost.
[Server]
Set the name or IP address of the proxy server.
•
Server should be set with a valid name or IP address and port number.
[Exclude]
Set names, IP addresses or domains for the proxy to exclude.
•
Exclude must contain at least 127.0.0.1 and localhost.
264
[Wi-Fi]
Set the wireless LAN.
Appears only if you have installed the optional wireless LAN.
The setting items are as follows:
IPv4
Configure IPv4 for Wi-Fi.
IPv6
Configure IPv6 for Wi-Fi.
Proxy
Configure the proxy for Wi-Fi.
Wi-Fi Protected Setup
Set the wireless LAN connection with the Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) function.
Wi-Fi Direct
Set the Wi-Fi Direct function.
◦
Enabled only if you have selected [Infrastructure] in the [Mode] menu.
SSID
Set the SSID.
Hidden SSID
Set the hidden SSID.
◦
Appears only if you have selected [Infrastructure] in the [Mode] menu.
Mode
Set the communication mode.
Channel
Set the communication channel.
Security
Set the security (encryption method).
265
[Network]
WEP Conf.
Set the WEP key.
◦
Appears only if you have selected [WEP] in the [Security] menu.
WPA Conf.
Set the WPA authentication.
◦
Appears only if you have selected [WPA+WPA2] or [WPA2] in the [Security] menu.
EAP Conf.
Set the EAP authentication.
◦
Appears only if you have selected [Dynamic WEP] in the [Security] menu.
•
the
•
button to enable the new settings. Press
After doing the settings, press the
button to cancel the new settings and return to the previous settings.
When [Wi-Fi Direct] is active, [IPv6] and [Wi-Fi Protected Setup] do not appear on the
screen.
[IPv4]
Configure IPv4 for Wi-Fi.
The setting items are as follows:
Mode
Select the IP address assignment method.
DHCP / Renew Lease
Update the lease time and get the IP address from the DHCP server again.
◦
Appears only if you have selected [DHCP] in the [Mode] menu.
◦
Does not appear if LAN is the active interface.
266
IP Address
Set and check the IP address.
If you have selected [DHCP] in the [Mode] menu, the screen shows the IP address you received
from the DHCP server.
If you have selected [Static] in the [Mode] menu, select to set the IP address.
Netmask
Set and check the subnet mask address.
If you have selected [DHCP] in the [Mode] menu, the screen shows the subnet mask address you
received from the DHCP server.
If you have selected [Static] in the [Mode] menu, select to set the subnet mask address.
Gateway
Set and check the default gateway address.
If you have selected [DHCP] in the [Mode] menu, the screen shows the gateway address you
received from the DHCP server.
If you have selected [Static] in the [Mode] menu, select to set the default gateway address.
DNS
Set and check DNS server addresses.
If you have selected [Static] in the [Mode] menu, select to set and check DNS server addresses.
•
After doing the settings, return to the [Wi-Fi] screen by pressing the
then press the
button to enable the new settings. Press the
to cancel the new settings and return to the previous settings.
•
button, and
button
When [Wi-Fi Direct] is active, [Mode], [DHCP] and [DNS] do not appear. In addition,
you cannot change [IP Address], [Netmask], or [Gateway] if [DHCP] or [Wi-Fi Direct] is
active. [DNS] cannot be changed if [Mode] is [DHCP].
[Mode]
Select the IP address assignment method.
The options are as follows:
267
[Network]
DHCP
Automatically retrieve the IP address, gateway and subnet mask from the DHCP server.
Static
Manually set the IP address, gateway and subnet mask.
[IP Address]
If you have selected [Static] in the [Mode] menu, set the IP address.
The setting range is as follows:
000.000.000.000 to 255.255.255.255
[Netmask]
If you have selected [Static] in the [Mode] menu, set the subnet mask address.
Each group of the address can be set cyclically among 0, 128, 192, 224, 240, 248, 252, 254 and 255.
The setting range is as follows:
128.000.000.000 to 255.255.255.254
268
[Gateway]
If you have selected [Static] in the [Mode] menu, set the default gateway address.
The setting range is as follows:
000.000.000.000 to 255.255.255.255
[DNS]
If you have selected [Static] in the [Mode] menu, set and check DNS server addresses.
The setting range is as follows:
000.000.000.000 to 255.255.255.255
•
You can register up to three IP addresses for the DNS server. Use a comma to delimit
different IP addresses.
269
[Network]
[IPv6]
Configure IPv6 for Wi-Fi.
The setting items are as follows:
Mode
Select the IP address assignment method or disable IPv6.
DHCP / Renew Lease
Update the lease time and get the IP address from the DHCP server again.
◦
Appears only if you have selected [DHCP] in the [Mode] menu.
◦
Does not appear if LAN is the active interface.
IP Address
Set and check the IP address.
If you have selected [DHCP] in the [Mode] menu, the screen shows the IP address you received
from the DHCP server.
If you have selected [Static] in the [Mode] menu, select to set the IP address.
Prefix Length
Set and check the prefix.
Gateway
Set and check the default gateway address.
If you have selected [DHCP] in the [Mode] menu, the screen shows the gateway address you
received from the DHCP server.
If you have selected [Static] in the [Mode] menu, select to set the default gateway address.
DNS
Set and check the address of the primary DNS server.
If you have selected [Static] in the [Mode] menu, select to set the primary address of the DNS
server.
270
•
After doing the settings, return to the [Wi-Fi] screen by pressing the
button, and
button to enable the new settings. Press the
then press the
to cancel the new settings and return to the previous settings.
•
button
When [Wi-Fi Direct] is active, this [IPv6] screen does not appear. In addition, you
cannot change [IP Address], [Prefix Length], [Gateway], or [DNS] if [Mode] is anything
other than [Static].
[Mode]
Select the IP address assignment method or disable IPv6.
The options are as follows:
Disable
Disable IPv6.
Auto
Automatically generate the IP address and gateway (stateless mode).
DHCP
Automatically retrieve the IP address and gateway from the DHCP server (stateful mode).
Static
Manually set the IP address, gateway and prefix length.
271
[Network]
[IP Address]
If you have selected [Static] in the [Mode] menu, set the IP address.
The setting range is as follows:
0:0:0:0:0:0:0:1 to ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff
[Prefix Length]
If you have selected [Static] in the [Mode] menu, set the prefix.
The setting range is from 1 to 128.
272
[Gateway]
If you have selected [Static] in the [Mode] menu, set the default gateway address.
The setting range is as follows:
0:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 to ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff
[DNS]
If you have selected [Static] in the [Mode] menu, set the primary address of the DNS server.
The setting range is as follows:
0:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 to ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff
•
You can register only one IP address for the DNS server for IPv6.
273
[Network]
[Proxy]
Configure the proxy for Wi-Fi.
The setting items are as follows:
Enabled
Enable or disable use of proxy.
Server
Set the proxy server address.
Exclude
Exclude the proxy from usage.
[Enabled]
Enable or disable use of proxy.
The options are as follows:
Enabled
Enable proxy server usage.
274
Disabled
Disable proxy server usage.
•
To enable the proxy, [Server] should be set and [Exclude] must contain at least
127.0.0.1 and localhost.
[Server]
Set the name or IP address of the proxy server.
•
Server should be set with a valid name or IP address and port number.
[Exclude]
Set names, IP addresses or domains for the proxy to exclude.
•
Exclude must contain at least 127.0.0.1 and localhost.
275
[Network]
[Wi-Fi Protected Setup]
Set the wireless LAN connection using the push button or PIN code method.
The setting items are as follows:
Button (PBC)
Set the wireless LAN connection using the push button method.
PIN
Set the wireless LAN connection using the PIN code method.
•
Refer to the manual of the access point device for its operation.
•
This screen does not appear if [LAN] or [Wi-Fi Direct] is active.
[Button (PBC)]
Set the wireless LAN connection using the push button method.
1. Select [Button (PBC)] in the [Wi-Fi Protected Setup] menu and press the
button.
2. When [Scanning...] appears on the screen, press the WPS button on the access point of the
wireless LAN device.
276
3. When the connection to the access point is established, [Successfully configured.] appears on the
screen.
[PIN]
Set the wireless LAN connection using the PIN code method.
1. Select [PIN] in the [Wi-Fi Protected Setup] menu and press the
button.
2. When [Scanning...] appears on the screen, set the PIN code shown on the screen to the access
point of the wireless LAN or computer.
277
[Network]
3. When the connection to the access point is established, [Successfully configured.] appears on the
screen.
[Wi-Fi Direct]
Connect without group
Connect with group
Set the Wi-Fi Direct function.
278
The Wi-Fi Direct function is enabled only if you have selected [Infrastructure] in the [Mode] menu. If
you have changed the setting from [Ad-hoc] to [Infrastructure] in the [Mode] menu, reboot the printer
before setting the Wi-Fi Direct function.
The setting procedure is as follows:
1. Set the device name for the printer using [Device Name]. You can enter 1 to 32 characters.
Alphabets (capital and small letters), numbers and symbols can be used. Press the
button to
button to enable changes.
return to the [Wi-Fi] menu and press the
2. Select [Connect] to search and show the connectable device names or to accept connection
requests when the printer is the GO (Group Owner). Select the device name you want to connect
using the
/
buttons, and press the
button.
3. Select [Start Group] if you want to start a new persistent group or select a group from the list.
4. Select [Remove Group] to remove the persistent group in step 3.
5. Complete the connection according to the display on the printer or device you want to connect.
6. Select [Disconnect] if you want to stop the connection.
279
[Network]
•
You can connect a maximum of 10 devices.
•
When Wi-Fi Direct is active, [Device Name] cannot be changed.
•
[Start Group] and [Remove Group] are shown only if Wi-Fi is active and the printer is
not connected to a Wi-Fi Direct network.
•
[Remove Group] is shown if Wi-Fi is active and the printer is connected.
•
After setting up a start group, the printer will be set to the GO (Group Owner) and will
wait for a connection request from another device.
•
If the printer is powered off during a persistent group connection, the group will be
started automatically after the printer is powered on.
[SSID]
Set the SSID.
The screen shows the Wi-Fi network detected by the printer.
Select the name of the Wi-Fi network you want to connect using the
/
buttons and press the
button to confirm.
To register a Wi-Fi network manually, press the
button and enter the name of the network.
You can enter a maximum of 32 characters. Alphabets (capital and small letters), numbers and
symbols can be used.
280
[Hidden SSID]
Set the hidden SSID (stealth function).
Appears only if you have selected [Infrastructure] in the [Mode] menu.
The options are as follows:
Enabled
Enable the hidden SSID.
Disabled
Disable the hidden SSID.
[Mode]
Set the communication method of the wireless LAN.
The options are as follows:
•
[Infrastructure]
•
[Ad-hoc]
281
[Network]
[Channel]
Set the communication channel.
[Channel] can be set only if you have selected [Ad-hoc] in the [Mode] menu.
The number of channels you can set varies depending on the region of the printer.
[Security]
Set the security method of the network. Set the security methods so that the printer, host and network
devices match.
The options are as follows:
•
[None]
•
[WEP]
•
[WPA+WPA2]
•
[WPA2]
•
[Dynamic WEP]
If you have selected [Ad-hoc] in the [Mode] menu, only [None] and [WEP] will be available.
282
[WEP Conf.]
Set the WEP key.
Appears only if you have selected [WEP] in the [Security] menu.
The setting items are as follows:
Authentication
Set the WEP authentication method.
Key Index
Set the key index.
Key #1 to Key #4
Set the WEP key1 - key4.
[Authentication]
Set the WEP authentication method.
The options are as follows:
•
[Open System]
•
[Shared Key]
283
[Network]
[Key Index]
Set the key index.
Set the key index (WEP key) according to the access point of the wireless LAN you connect.
The setting range is from 1 to 4.
•
Depending on the product, the range of the key index may be 0 to 3. In such a case, if
you have set the printer to 1, set the product to 0.
[Key #1] to [Key #4]
Set the WEP key #1 - key #4.
You can enter alphabet (capital and small letters) and numbers.
Depending on the length of the WEP key, the number of characters you can set is as follows:
•
When the key length is 64 bits
ASCII: Five characters
Hexadecimal: 10 characters
•
When the key length is 128 bits
ASCII: Thirteen characters
Hexadecimal: 26 characters
284
[WPA Conf.]
Set the WPA authentication.
Appears only if you have selected [WPA+WPA2] or [WPA2] in the [Security] menu.
The setting items are as follows:
WPA Authentication
Set the WPA authentication method.
PSK
Set the PSK shared key.
◦
Appears only if you have selected [Personal (PSK)] in the [WPA Authentication] menu.
EAP Conf.
Set the functions for EAP.
◦
Appears only if you have selected items other than [Personal (PSK)] in the [WPA Authentication]
menu.
[WPA Authentication]
285
[Network]
Set the WPA authentication method.
The options are as follows:
•
[Personal (PSK)]
•
[Enterprise (802.1x)]
•
[CCKM]
[PSK]
Set the PSK shared key.
Appears only if you have selected [Personal (PSK)] in the [WPA Authentication] menu.
You can enter 8 to 63 ASCll characters or 64 hexadecimal digits. Alphabets, numbers and symbols
can be used.
[EAP Conf.]
Set the functions for EAP.
Appears only if you have selected items other than [Personal (PSK)] in the [WPA Authentication] menu
or if you have selected [Dynamic WEP] in the [Security] menu.
The setting items are as follows:
EAP Mode
Set the EAP Mode (authentication mode).
286
Inner Method
Set the inner method.
◦
Appears only if you have selected [FAST], [PEAP], or [TTLS] in the [EAP Mode] menu.
Username
Set the user name.
Password
Set the password.
Anon. Outer ID
Set the external ID.
◦
Appears only if you have selected [FAST], [PEAP], or [TTLS] in the [EAP Mode] menu.
Verify Server Cert.
Enable or disable server authentication.
◦
Appears only if you have selected anything other than [LEAP] in the [EAP Mode] menu.
Private Key P/W
Set the Private Key password.
◦
Appears only if you have selected [TLS] in either the [EAP Mode] menu or [Inner Method] menu.
PAC Auto Provisioning
Enable or disable PAC Auto Provisioning.
◦
Appears only if you have selected [FAST] in the [EAP Mode] menu.
PAC P/W
Set the PAC password.
◦
Appears only if you have selected [FAST] in the [EAP Mode] menu and if you have selected
[Disabled] in [PAC Auto Provisioning].
287
[Network]
[EAP Mode]
Set the EAP Mode (authentication mode).
The options are as follows:
•
[FAST]
•
[LEAP]
•
[PEAP]
•
[TLS]
•
[TTLS]
[Inner Method]
Set the inner method.
Appears only if you have selected [FAST], [PEAP], or [TTLS] in the [EAP Mode] menu.
•
If you have selected [FAST] in the [EAP Mode] menu, the options are [MSCHAPv2], [GTC], and
[TLS].
•
If you have selected [PEAP] in the [EAP Mode] menu, the options are [MSCHAPv2], [GTC],
[MD5], [OTP], and [TLS].
•
If you have selected [TTLS] in the [EAP Mode] menu, the options are [MSCHAPv2], [MSCHAP],
[CHAP], [PAP], [EAP-GTC], [EAP-MD5], [EAP-MSCHAPV2], [EAP-OTP], and [EAP-TLS].
288
[Username]
Set the user name.
You can enter 0 to 63 characters. Alphabets, numbers and symbols can be used.
[Password]
Set the password.
You can enter 0 to 32 characters. Alphabets, numbers and symbols can be used.
289
[Network]
[Anon. Outer ID]
Set the external ID.
Appears only if you have selected [FAST], [PEAP], or [TTLS] in the [EAP Mode] menu.
You can enter 0 to 63 characters. Alphabets, numbers and symbols can be used.
[Verify Server Cert.]
Enable or disable server certificate validation.
Appears only if you have selected anything other than [LEAP] in the [EAP Mode] menu.
The options are as follows:
Enabled
Enable server certificate validation.
Disabled
Disable server certificate validation.
290
[Private Key P/W]
Set the Private Key password.
Appears only if you have selected [TLS] in either the [EAP Mode] menu or [Inner Method] menu.
You can enter 0 to 64 characters. Alphabets, numbers and symbols can be used.
[PAC Auto Provisioning]
Enable or disable PAC auto provisioning.
Appears only if you have selected [FAST] in the [EAP Mode] menu.
The options are as follows:
Enabled
Enable PAC auto provisioning.
Disabled
Disable PAC auto provisioning.
291
[Network]
[PAC P/W]
Set the PAC password.
Appears only if you have selected [FAST] in the [EAP Mode] menu and if you have selected [Disabled]
in [PAC Auto Provisioning].
You can enter 0 to 64 characters. Alphabets, numbers and symbols can be used.
[Interface]
Select the network interface.
This item is to select the network interface from LAN or wireless LAN when you have installed the
optional wireless LAN.
The options are as follows:
Auto
Automatically select between LAN and wireless LAN interface at printer startup. LAN is selected if
LAN cable is connected to a link-established hub (Link LED is flashing) at printer startup. Wireless
LAN is selected if LAN is not detected at printer startup.
LAN
Use LAN interface (or force LAN interface).
Wi-Fi
Use wireless LAN interface (or force wireless LAN interface).
292
◦
Appears only if you have installed the optional wireless LAN.
•
A message prompting you to restart the printer will appear on the Online/Offline screen
if you have made any changes. In such a case, reboot the printer to apply the settings.
[Services]
Set the TCP/IP port number, NTP, LPD, FTP, SNMP, or SOS (SATO Online Services).
The setting items are as follows:
Ports
Set the port number.
NTP
Set the functions for NTP.
LPD
Set the functions for LPD.
FTP
Set the functions for FTP.
SNMP
Set the functions for SNMP.
Online Services
Set the functions for SOS (SATO Online Services).
293
[Network]
[Ports]
The setting items are as follows:
Port1
Set the port number.
Port2
Set the port number.
Port3
Set the port number.
Flow Control
Set the communication protocol.
Multiple connections
Set whether to receive connection requests from multiple hosts or applications.
Legacy Status for Port 9100
Set whether to change the return status format of port3 to legacy status.
◦
Does not appear if you have selected [None] in the [Flow Control] menu.
BCC
Set the BCC check function.
◦
Appears only if you have selected [Status5] in the [Flow Control] menu.
294
[Port1]
Set the port number.
The setting range is from 1 to 65535.
•
Each port (1, 2 and 3) must be set to different values.
[Port2]
Set the port number.
The setting range is from 1 to 65535.
•
Each port (1, 2 and 3) must be set to different values.
•
This setting is disabled when AEP mode is enabled.
295
[Network]
[Port3]
Set the port number.
The setting range is from 1 to 65535.
•
Each port (1, 2 and 3) must be set to different values.
•
You can change the return status format of port3 to legacy status by enabling [Legacy
Status for Port 9100].
[Flow Control]
Set the communication protocol.
The options are as follows:
•
[Status4]
•
[Status4 ENQ]
•
[Status3]
•
[Status5]
•
[None]
296
[Multiple connections]
Set whether to receive connection requests from multiple hosts or applications.
The options are as follows:
Enabled
While connecting with one host or application, the printer can receive connection requests from
other hosts or applications. The subsequent connection requests are put on hold, and processed
in order of reception after the first connection is closed.
Disabled
While connecting with one host or application, the printer cannot receive connection requests from
other hosts or applications.
•
When you have selected [Enabled], be sure to use one port connection for Status3,
Status4, and Status5. Operation using two port connections for Status4 is not
guaranteed.
[Legacy Status for Port 9100]
Set whether to change the return status format of port3 to legacy status.
Does not appear if you have selected [None] in the [Flow Control] menu.
297
[Network]
The options are as follows:
Enabled
Change the return status format of port3 to legacy status.
Disabled
Do not change the return status format of port3 to legacy status.
In legacy status, the return status format of port3 becomes as follows:
Status3
Mode
Data format
Normal
([Legacy
Status
for Port
9100] is
[Disabled])
Legacy
status
([Legacy
Status for
Port 9100]
is [Enabled])
Status4
Mode
Data format
Normal
([Legacy
Status
for Port
9100] is
[Disabled])
Legacy
status
([Legacy
Status for
Port 9100]
is [Enabled])
Status5
298
Mode
Data format
Normal
([Legacy
Status
for Port
9100] is
[Disabled])
Legacy
status
([Legacy
Status for
Port 9100]
is [Enabled])
[BCC]
Enable or disable the BCC check function.
Appears only if you have selected [Status5] in the [Flow Control] menu.
The options are as follows:
Enabled
Enable the BCC check function.
Disabled
Disable the BCC check function.
299
[Network]
[NTP]
Set the functions for NTP.
The NTP function gets the time information from the NTP server through the network and sets the time
of the printer.
The setting items are as follows:
Enable
Enable or disable the functions for NTP.
Error
Set to show the NTP error message if detected.
Time Server IP
Set the IP address of the NTP server.
[Enable]
Enable or disable the functions for NTP.
The options are as follows:
Enabled
Enable the NTP function.
300
Disabled
Disable the NTP function.
[Error]
Set to show the NTP error message if detected.
The options are as follows:
Enabled
Shows the error message.
Disabled
Does not show the error message.
[Time Server IP]
Set the IP address of the NTP server.
The setting range is as follows:
0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255
301
[Network]
The IP address should normally be set to 0.0.0.0 (the default value). It means that the global NTP
servers will be assigned automatically. Set to a valid IP if the time synchronization is requested for a
specific server.
[LPD]
Set the functions for LPD.
The setting items are as follows:
Enable
Enable or disable the LPD function.
DNS Lookup
Enable or disable the DNS Lookup function.
[Enable]
Enable or disable the LPD function.
The options are as follows:
Enabled
Enable the LPD function.
302
Disabled
Disable the LPD function.
[DNS Lookup]
Enable or disable the DNS Lookup function.
The options are as follows:
Enabled
Enable the DNS Lookup function.
Disabled
Disable the DNS Lookup function.
[FTP]
Set the functions for FTP.
The setting items are as follows:
Enable
Enable or disable the functions for FTP.
303
[Network]
FTP Timeout
Set the connection timeout period between the printer's FTP server and clients.
[Enable]
Enable or disable the functions for FTP.
The options are as follows:
Enabled
Enable the FTP function.
Disabled
Disable the FTP function.
[FTP Timeout]
Set the connection timeout period between the printer's FTP server and clients.
Specify the maximum number of seconds that the printer's FTP server will allow clients to stay
connected without receiving any data on either the control or data connection.
The setting range is from 10 to 3600 seconds.
304
[SNMP]
Set the functions for SNMP.
The SNMP function enables you to monitor and manage a UDP/IP based network.
The setting items are as follows:
sysContact
Set the contact information.
sysName
Set the name information.
sysLocation
Set the location information.
prtMarkerCounterUnit
Set the unit to use for reporting counter values for subunits.
Agent
Set the Agent function.
Traps
Set the Traps function.
305
[Network]
[sysContact]
Set the contact information.
You can enter 0 to 255 characters. Alphabets, numbers and symbols can be used.
[sysName]
Set the name information.
You can enter 0 to 255 characters. Alphabets, numbers and symbols can be used.
306
[sysLocation]
Set the location information.
You can enter 0 to 255 characters. Alphabets, numbers and symbols can be used.
[prtMarkerCounterUnit]
Set the unit to use for reporting counter values for subunits.
The options are as follows:
impressions
Report the number of printed labels.
meters
Report the length of printed labels in meters.
307
[Network]
[Agent]
Set the Agent function.
The setting items are as follows:
Enable
Use the Agent function.
Read-Only
Set the read-only function.
Read-Write
Set the read-write function.
[Enable]
Enable or disable the functions for Agent.
The options are as follows:
Enabled
Enable the functions for Agent.
308
Disabled
Disable the functions for Agent.
[Read-Only]
Set the read-only function.
The setting items are as follows:
SNMP Version
Set the SNMP version.
Community
Set the read-only community name.
◦
Appears only if you have selected [1|2c|3] or [1|2c] in the [SNMP Version] menu.
User
Set the read-only user name.
◦
Appears only if you have selected [1|2c|3] or [3] in the [SNMP Version] menu.
User Security
Set the read-only security level.
◦
Appears only if you have selected [1|2c|3] or [3] in the [SNMP Version] menu.
Authentication Protocol
Set the authentication protocol.
◦
Appears only if you have selected [Authentication] or [Privacy] in the [User Security] menu.
Authentication Passphrase
Set the authentication passphrase.
◦
Appears only if you have selected [Authentication] or [Privacy] in the [User Security] menu.
309
[Network]
Privacy Protocol
Set the privacy protocol.
◦
Appears only if you have selected [Privacy] in the [User Security] menu.
Privacy Passphrase
Set the privacy passphrase.
◦
Appears only if you have selected [Privacy] in the [User Security] menu.
[SNMP Version]
Set the SNMP version.
The options are as follows:
•
[1|2c|3]
•
[1|2c]
•
[3]
•
[Disabled]
[Community]
310
Set the read-only community name.
Appears only if you have selected [1|2c|3] or [1|2c] in the [SNMP Version] menu.
You can enter 1 to 32 characters. Alphabets, numbers and symbols can be used.
Initial setting: public
[User]
Set the read-only user name.
Appears only if you have selected [1|2c|3] or [3] in the [SNMP Version] menu.
You can enter 1 to 32 characters. Alphabets, numbers and symbols can be used.
Initial setting: rouser
[User Security]
Set the read-only security level.
Appears only if you have selected [1|2c|3] or [3] in the [SNMP Version] menu.
The options are as follows:
•
[None]
•
[Authentication]
•
[Privacy]
311
[Network]
[Authentication Protocol]
Set the authentication protocol.
Appears only if you have selected [Authentication] or [Privacy] in the [User Security] menu.
The options are as follows:
•
[MD5]
•
[SHA]
[Authentication Passphrase]
Set the authentication passphrase.
Appears only if you have selected [Authentication] or [Privacy] in the [User Security] menu.
You can enter 8 to 32 characters. Alphabets, numbers and symbols can be used.
Initial setting: mypassword
312
[Privacy Protocol]
Set the privacy protocol.
Appears only if you have selected [Privacy] in the [User Security] menu.
The options are as follows:
•
[DES]
•
[AES]
[Privacy Passphrase]
Set the privacy passphrase.
Appears only if you have selected [Privacy] in the [User Security] menu.
You can enter 8 to 32 characters. Alphabets, numbers and symbols can be used.
Initial setting: mypassword
313
[Network]
[Read-Write]
Set the read-write function.
The setting items are as follows:
SNMP Version
Set the SNMP version.
Community
Set the read-write community name.
◦
Appears only if you have selected [1|2c|3] or [1|2c] in the [SNMP Version] menu.
User
Set the read-write user name.
◦
Appears only if you have selected [1|2c|3] or [3] in the [SNMP Version] menu.
User Security
Set the read-write security level.
◦
Appears only if you have selected [1|2c|3] or [3] in the [SNMP Version] menu.
Authentication Protocol
Set the authentication protocol.
◦
Appears only if you have selected [Authentication] or [Privacy] in the [User Security] menu.
Authentication Passphrase
Set the authentication passphrase.
◦
Appears only if you have selected [Authentication] or [Privacy] in the [User Security] menu.
Privacy Protocol
Set the privacy protocol.
◦
Appears only if you have selected [Privacy] in the [User Security] menu.
314
Privacy Passphrase
Set the privacy passphrase.
◦
Appears only if you have selected [Privacy] in the [User Security] menu.
[SNMP Version]
Set the SNMP version.
The options are as follows:
•
[1|2c|3]
•
[1|2c]
•
[3]
•
[Disabled]
[Community]
Set the read-write community name.
Appears only if you have selected [1|2c|3] or [1|2c] in the [SNMP Version] menu.
You can enter 1 to 32 characters. Alphabets, numbers and symbols can be used.
315
[Network]
Initial setting: private
[User]
Set the read-write user name.
Appears only if you have selected [1|2c|3] or [3] in the [SNMP Version] menu.
You can enter 1 to 32 characters. Alphabets, numbers and symbols can be used.
Initial setting: rwuser
[User Security]
Set the read-write security level.
Appears only if you have selected [1|2c|3] or [3] in the [SNMP Version] menu.
The options are as follows:
•
[None]
•
[Authentication]
•
[Privacy]
316
[Authentication Protocol]
Set the authentication protocol.
Appears only if you have selected [Authentication] or [Privacy] in the [User Security] menu.
The options are as follows:
•
[MD5]
•
[SHA]
[Authentication Passphrase]
Set the authentication passphrase.
Appears only if you have selected [Authentication] or [Privacy] in the [User Security] menu.
You can enter 8 to 32 characters. Alphabets, numbers and symbols can be used.
Initial setting: mypassword
317
[Network]
[Privacy Protocol]
Set the privacy protocol.
Appears only if you have selected [Privacy] in the [User Security] menu.
The options are as follows:
•
[DES]
•
[AES]
[Privacy Passphrase]
Set the privacy passphrase.
Appears only if you have selected [Privacy] in the [User Security] menu.
You can enter 8 to 32 characters. Alphabets, numbers and symbols can be used.
Initial setting: mypassword
318
[Traps]
If [SNMP Version] is [1]
If [SNMP Version] is [3]
If [Security] is [Privacy]
Set the Traps function.
The setting items are as follows:
319
[Network]
Enable
Enable the Traps function.
SNMP Version
Set the SNMP version.
IP Version
Set the IP version to use for trap destinations.
Destinations
Set the number of trap destinations.
Destination 1
Set address 1 for the trap destination.
Destination 2
Set address 2 for the trap destination.
◦
Appears only if you have selected [2] or [3] in the [Destinations] menu.
Destination 3
Set address 3 for the trap destination.
◦
Appears only if you have selected [3] in the [Destinations] menu.
Community
Set the Traps community name.
◦
Appears only if you have selected [1] or [2c] in the [SNMP Version] menu.
User
Set the Traps user name.
◦
Appears only if you have selected [3] in the [SNMP Version] menu.
Engine ID
Set the engine ID.
◦
Appears only if you have selected [3] in the [SNMP Version] menu.
Security
Set the security level.
◦
Appears only if you have selected [3] in the [SNMP Version] menu.
Authentication Protocol
Set the authentication protocol.
◦
Appears only if you have selected [Authentication] or [Privacy] in the [Security] menu.
320
Authentication Passphrase
Set the authentication passphrase.
◦
Appears only if you have selected [Authentication] or [Privacy] in the [Security] menu.
Privacy Protocol
Set the privacy protocol.
◦
Appears only if you have selected [Privacy] in the [Security] menu.
Privacy Passphrase
Set the privacy passphrase.
◦
Appears only if you have selected [Privacy] in the [Security] menu.
[Enable]
Enable or disable the functions for Traps.
The options are as follows:
Enabled
Enable the Traps function.
Disabled
Disable the Traps function.
321
[Network]
[SNMP Version]
Set the SNMP version.
The options are as follows:
•
[1]
•
[2c]
•
[3]
[IP Version]
Set the IP version to use for trap destinations.
The options are as follows:
4
Set the IP version to IPv4.
6
Set the IP version to IPv6.
322
[Destinations]
Set the number of trap destinations.
The setting range is from 1 to 3.
[Destination 1]
Set address 1 for the trap destination.
The displayed IP version differs depending on the [IP Version] setting.
323
[Network]
[Destination 2]
Set address 2 for the trap destination.
The displayed IP version differs depending on the [IP Version] setting.
Appears only if you have selected [2] or [3] in the [Destinations] menu.
[Destination 3]
Set address 3 for the trap destination.
The displayed IP version differs depending on the [IP Version] setting.
Appears only if you have selected [3] in the [Destinations] menu.
324
[Community]
Set the Traps community name.
Appears only if you have selected [1] or [2c] in the [SNMP Version] menu.
You can enter 1 to 32 characters. Alphabets, numbers and symbols can be used.
Initial setting: trapcom
[User]
Set the Traps user name.
Appears only if you have selected [3] in the [SNMP Version] menu.
You can enter 1 to 32 characters. Alphabets, numbers and symbols can be used.
Initial setting: trapuser
325
[Network]
[Engine ID]
Set the engine ID.
Appears only if you have selected [3] in the [SNMP Version] menu.
Initial setting: Created from the MAC address.
Hexadecimal characters are allowed and the range is from 10 to 64 characters. (Only an even number
of characters are allowed.)
[Security]
Set the security level.
Appears only if you have selected [3] in the [SNMP Version] menu.
The options are as follows:
•
[None]
•
[Authentication]
•
[Privacy]
326
[Authentication Protocol]
Set the authentication protocol.
Appears only if you have selected [Authentication] or [Privacy] in the [Security] menu.
The options are as follows:
•
[MD5]
•
[SHA]
[Authentication Passphrase]
Set the authentication passphrase.
Appears only if you have selected [Authentication] or [Privacy] in the [Security] menu.
You can enter 8 to 32 characters. Alphabets, numbers and symbols can be used.
Initial setting: mypassword
327
[Network]
[Privacy Protocol]
Set the privacy protocol.
Appears only if you have selected [Privacy] in the [Security] menu.
The options are as follows:
•
[DES]
•
[AES]
[Privacy Passphrase]
Set the privacy passphrase.
Appears only if you have selected [Privacy] in the [Security] menu.
You can enter 8 to 32 characters. Alphabets, numbers and symbols can be used.
Initial setting: mypassword
328
[Online Services] (SOS users only)
Set the functions for SOS (SATO Online Services).
To use SOS Real-Time and On-Demand periodic notification, it is necessary to first create an SOS
account and add the printer.
The setting items are as follows:
SOS Mode
Selects the mode for SOS or disable SOS.
Allow Remote Control
Sets whether to allow setting the printer (remote control) from SOS.
◦
Appears only if you have selected [Real-Time] in the [SOS Mode] menu.
SOS Association
Shows the serial number and association code that are necessary when adding the printer to
SOS.
◦
Appears only if you have selected [On-Demand] or [Real-Time] in the [SOS Mode] menu.
Copy Log Files
Copies an SOS log file to USB memory.
◦
Appears only if you have selected [On-Demand] or [Real-Time] in the [SOS Mode] menu. It is
available only when the log data is in the printer and USB memory is inserted into the printer.
Contact Information
Sets the SOS contact information that is displayed at the time of the error outbreak.
◦
Appears only if you have selected [On-Demand] or [Real-Time] in the [SOS Mode] menu.
Periodic Notification
Sets the functions for periodic SOS notifications.
A specialized application is required to scan the QR code displayed on the screen of this function.
◦
Appears only if you have selected [On-Demand] in the [SOS Mode] menu.
329
[Network]
Update Screen
Sets whether or not to print the QR code displayed with the regular notification or with SOS
update.
A specialized application is required to scan the QR code.
◦
Appears only if you have selected [On-Demand] in the [SOS Mode] menu.
SOS Update
Shows the current printer information with a QR code. Scan the QR code with a tablet or
smartphone, and send it to the SOS cloud.
A specialized application is required to scan the QR code.
◦
Appears only if you have selected [On-Demand] in the [SOS Mode] menu.
[SOS Mode] (SOS users only)
Select or disable the SOS (SATO Online Services) mode.
The options are as follows:
Disabled
Disables SOS.
On-Demand
Shows the printer information with a QR code. Scan the displayed QR code with a tablet or
smartphone, and send the information to the SOS cloud.
A specialized application is required to scan the QR code.
Real-Time
Sends the printer information to the SOS cloud in real time using the LAN/wireless LAN
connection.
The confirmation screen is shown if you select [Real-Time]. To agree on the Terms of Use and
enable the Real-Time mode, press the
button.
330
[Allow Remote Control] (SOS users only)
Set whether or not to allow setting the printer (remote control) from SOS (SATO Online Services).
Appears only if you have selected [Real-Time] in the [SOS Mode] menu.
The options are as follows:
Deny
Does not allow remote control from SOS.
Until Reboot
Allows remote control from SOS until the printer reboots.
Always
Always allows remote control from SOS.
[SOS Association] (SOS users only)
Shows the serial number and association code that are necessary when adding the printer to SOS
(SATO Online Services).
Appears only if you have selected [On-Demand] or [Real-Time] in the [SOS Mode] menu.
In Real-Time Mode
331
[Network]
The screen shown above appears after the standby screen (the SOS password is required if an error
occurs).
In the SOS specialized application, scan the QR code or input the information displayed on the screen.
Finally, press the
button to complete SOS association.
In On-Demand Mode
A QR code and serial number appears. In the SOS specialized application, scan the QR code or input
the information displayed on the screen. Then press the
button.
When a password input screen appears, input the SOS password and press the
button.
The screen including the association code shown above appears. In the SOS specialized application,
scan the QR code or input the information displayed on the screen. Finally, press the
button
to complete SOS association.
•
To add a printer to SOS, refer to the SOS user manual.
http://www.sato-sos.com/en/support/sos_usermanual.pdf
[Copy Log Files] (SOS users only)
Copies SOS (SATO Online Services) log files to USB memory.
Appears only if you have selected [On-Demand] or [Real-Time] in the [SOS Mode] menu.
It is available only when the log data is in the printer and the USB memory is inserted into the printer.
•
Be sure to perform a virus check on the USB memory before connecting it to the
printer. SATO Corporation shall not be held responsible for any printer malfunctions
caused by a virus spread via USB memory.
The procedure to copy the log file is as follows:
1. Select the file to copy and press the
file name.
2. After selecting the file, press the
button. A check mark is shown on the right side of the
button to copy the selected file to the USB memory.
332
[Contact Information] (SOS users only)
Sets the SOS (SATO Online Services) contact information that is displayed at the time of the error
outbreak.
Appears only if you have selected [On-Demand] or [Real-Time] in the [SOS Mode] menu.
The setting items are as follows:
Phone Number (SOS users only)
Sets the phone number that is displayed on the SOS error screen when you select the SOS icon
on an error message screen.
[Phone Number] (SOS users only)
Sets the phone number that is displayed on the SOS error screen when you select the SOS (SATO
Online Services) icon on an error message screen.
333
[Network]
[Periodic Notification] (SOS users only)
When [Counter] is set with [Head] in the [Type] menu
Sets the function for periodic SOS (SATO Online Services) notifications.
Appears only if you have selected [On-Demand] in the [SOS Mode] menu.
In this function, the printer information is shown periodically with a QR code. Scan the displayed QR
code with a tablet or smartphone, and send the information to the SOS cloud.
A specialized application is required to scan the QR code.
The setting items are as follows:
Type
Select the timing to perform the periodic notification or disable this function.
Counter
You can select the counter for the print head or cutter for the timing to perform the periodic
notification.
◦
Appears only if you have selected [Counter] in the [Type] menu.
Meters
Specifies the print distance of the print head for the timing to perform the periodic notification.
◦
Appears only if you have set [Counter] with [Head] in the [Type] menu.
Cuts
Specifies the number of cut times of the cutter for the timing to perform the periodic notification.
◦
Appears only if you have set [Counter] with [Cutter] in the [Type] menu.
Last Update
Shows the print distance of the print head or the number of cut times of the cutter for the last
periodic notification.
◦
Appears only if you have selected [Counter] in the [Type] menu.
334
Next Update
Shows the print distance of the print head or the number of cut times of the cutter for the next
periodic notification.
◦
Appears only if you have selected [Counter] in the [Type] menu.
Current Value
Shows the current print distance of the print head or the current number of cut times of the cutter.
◦
Appears only if you have selected [Counter] in the [Type] menu.
Notifications
Specifies the number of periodic notifications to be sent per day.
◦
Appears only if you have enabled the NTP function or installed the optional RTC kit, and if you
have selected [Daily] in the [Type] menu.
Weekday
Specifies the day of the week to perform the periodic notification.
◦
Appears only if you have enabled the NTP function or installed the optional RTC kit, and if you
have selected [Weekly] in the [Type] menu.
Day
Sets the date to perform the periodic notification.
◦
Appears only if you have enabled the NTP function or installed the optional RTC kit, and if you
have selected [Monthly] in the [Type] menu.
Time 1
Specifies the time to perform the first periodic notification.
◦
Appears only if you have enabled the NTP function or installed the optional RTC kit, and if you
have selected [Daily] in the [Type] menu.
Time 2
Specifies the time to perform the second periodic notification.
◦
Appears only if you have enabled the NTP function or installed the optional RTC kit, and if you
have set [Daily] in the [Type] menu and have set twice or more in [Notifications].
Time 3
Specifies the time to perform the third periodic notification.
◦
Appears only if you have enabled the NTP function or installed the optional RTC kit, and if you
have set [Daily] in the [Type] menu and have set three times in [Notifications].
Time
Specifies the time of the specified day or date to perform periodic notifications.
335
[Network]
◦
Appears only if you have enabled the NTP function or installed the optional RTC kit, and if you
have selected [Weekly] or [Monthly] in the [Type] menu.
[Type] (SOS users only)
Select the timing to perform the periodic notification or disable this function.
Advanced setting items or measured values appear on the [Periodic Notification] menu according to
the selected options.
The options are as follows:
Disabled
Disables the periodic notification function.
Daily
Displays the notification screen every day for specified number of times, at the specified time.
◦
Appears only if you have enabled the NTP function or installed the optional RTC kit.
Weekly
Displays the notification screen every week at the specified day of week and time.
◦
Appears only if you have enabled the NTP function or installed the optional RTC kit.
Monthly
Displays the notification screen every month at the specified day and time.
◦
Appears only if you have enabled the NTP function or installed the optional RTC kit.
Counter
Displays the notification screen when the counter of a consumable reaches to the specified value.
Offline
Displays the notification screen when the printer is changed to Offline mode.
336
[Counter] (SOS users only)
You can select the counter for the print head or cutter for the timing to perform the periodic notification.
Appears only if you have selected [Counter] in the [Type] menu.
Advanced setting items or measured values appear on the [Periodic Notification] menu according to
the selected options.
The options are as follows:
•
[Head]
•
[Cutter]
[Meters] (SOS users only)
Specifies the print distance of the print head for the timing to perform the periodic notification. You will
be notified for every meter you specify.
Appears only if you have set [Counter] with [Head] in the [Type] menu.
The setting range is from 1 to 100000.
337
[Network]
[Cuts] (SOS users only)
Specifies the number of cut times of the cutter for the timing to perform the periodic notification. You
will be notified for each number of cut times you specify.
Appears only if you have set [Counter] with [Cutter] in the [Type] menu.
The setting range is from 1 to 1000000.
[Notifications] (SOS users only)
Specifies the number of periodic notifications to be sent per day.
Appears only if you have enabled the NTP function or installed the optional RTC kit, and if you have
selected [Daily] in the [Type] menu.
The setting range is from 1 to 3.
338
[Weekday] (SOS users only)
Specifies the day of the week to perform the periodic notification.
Appears only if you have enabled the NTP function or installed the optional RTC kit, and if you have
selected [Weekly] in the [Type] menu.
The setting range is from Monday to Sunday.
[Day] (SOS users only)
Sets the date to perform the periodic notification.
Appears only if you have enabled the NTP function or installed the optional RTC kit, and if you have
selected [Monthly] in the [Type] menu.
The setting range is from 1 to 28.
339
[Network]
[Time 1] (SOS users only)
Specifies the time to perform the first periodic notification.
Appears only if you have enabled the NTP function or installed the optional RTC kit, and if you have
selected [Daily] in the [Type] menu.
[Time 2] (SOS users only)
Specifies the time to perform the second periodic notification.
Appears only if you have enabled the NTP function or installed the optional RTC kit, and if you have
set [Daily] in the [Type] menu and have set twice or more in [Notifications].
340
[Time 3] (SOS users only)
Specifies the time to perform the third periodic notification.
Appears only if you have enabled the NTP function or installed the optional RTC kit, and if you have
set [Daily] in the [Type] menu and have set three times in [Notifications].
[Time] (SOS users only)
Specifies the time of the specified day or date to perform periodic notifications.
Appears only if you have enabled the NTP function or installed the optional RTC kit, and if you have
selected [Weekly] or [Monthly] in the [Type] menu.
341
[Network]
[Update Screen] (SOS users only)
Sets whether to print a QR code displayed with SOS (SATO Online Services) periodic notification or
SOS update.
Appears only if you have selected [On-Demand] in the [SOS Mode] menu.
A specialized application is required to scan the QR code.
The options are as follows:
Normal
Shows the scan screen of a normal QR code.
Print
Prints with the scan screen for the QR code. Press the
button to print the QR code.
To print the QR code, use media of more than 33 mm (1.3") in length and more than 33 mm (1.3")
in width (not including the liner).
[SOS Update] (SOS users only)
Shows the current printer information with a QR code. Scan the QR code with a tablet or smartphone,
and send it to the SOS cloud.
Appears only if you have selected [On-Demand] in the [SOS Mode] menu.
342
A specialized application is required to scan the QR code.
If you have selected [Print] in the [Update Screen], press the
button to print the QR code.
To print the QR code, use media of more than 33 mm (1.3") in length and more than 33 mm (1.3") in
width (not including the liner).
[Advanced]
Set the advanced function for the interface.
The setting item is as follows:
ARP Announcement
Set the ARP announcement.
[ARP Announcement]
Set the functions for ARP announcement.
The ARP announcement is useful for updating other hosts mapping of a hardware address when the
IP address or MAC address of the sender has changed.
The setting items are as follows:
343
[Network]
Additional
Enable or disable the additional ARP announcement.
Periodic
Set the periodic timing for ARP announcement.
[Additional]
Set the additional ARP announcement.
The options are as follows:
Enabled
Enable the additional ARP announcement. The ARP is sent at 1, 2, 4, 8 and 16 seconds after the
link up/DHCP assignment.
Disabled
Disable the additional ARP announcement. The ARP is only sent at 1 second after the link up/
DHCP assignment.
[Periodic]
Set the interval of the ARP announcement in the range of 0 to 600 seconds.
344
Initial setting: 0
[IEEE1284]
Set the IEEE1284 connection.
Appears only if the combo interface board is installed.
The setting items are as follows:
Flow Control
Set the communication protocol.
BCC
Set the BCC check function.
◦
Appears only if you have selected [Status5] in the [Flow Control] menu.
[Flow Control]
Set the communication protocol.
The options are as follows:
•
[Status4 Multi]
345
[RS-232C]
•
[Status5]
•
[None]
[BCC]
Enable or disable the BCC check function.
Appears only if you have selected [Status5] in the [Flow Control] menu.
The options are as follows:
Enabled
Enable the BCC check function.
Disabled
Disable the BCC check function.
[RS-232C]
Set the RS-232C connection.
Appears only if the combo interface board is installed.
The setting items are as follows:
346
Interface
Set the RS-232C interface usage.
Baudrate
Set the communication speed.
Parameters
Set the data parameters.
Flow Control
Set the communication protocol.
BCC
Set the BCC check function.
◦
Appears only if you have selected [STATUS5] in the [Flow Control] menu.
•
When [Interface] is set to [RS-232C Reader], you cannot change [Baudrate],
[Parameters], [Flow Control] or [BCC].
[Interface]
Set the RS-232C interface usage.
The options are as follows:
RS-232C
Use the RS-232C interface for communicating with computers.
RS-232C Reader
Select this when you connect the KEYENCE barcode checkers for the barcode check function.
•
A message prompting you to restart the printer will appear on the Online/Offline screen
if you have made any changes. In such a case, reboot the printer to apply the settings.
347
[RS-232C]
[Baudrate]
Set the baudrate (bps).
Available to change only if you have selected [RS-232C] in the [Interface] menu.
The options are as follows:
•
[2400]
•
[4800]
•
[9600]
•
[19200]
•
[38400]
•
[57600]
•
[115200]
[Parameters]
Set the data parameters.
Available to change only if you have selected [RS-232C] in the [Interface] menu.
The options are as follows:
Refer to the table below for the parameter configurations.
348
•
[8-N-1]
•
[8-O-1]
•
[8-E-1]
•
[8-N-2]
•
[8-O-2]
•
[8-E-2]
•
[7-N-1]
•
[7-O-1]
•
[7-E-1]
•
[7-N-2]
•
[7-O-2]
•
[7-E-2]
Parameter Configurations List
Parameters
Data length
Parity
(bit)
Stop bit
(bit)
8-N-1
8
NONE
1
8-O-1
8
ODD
1
8-E-1
8
EVEN
1
8-N-2
8
NONE
2
8-O-2
8
ODD
2
8-E-2
8
EVEN
2
7-N-1
7
NONE
1
7-O-1
7
ODD
1
7-E-1
7
EVEN
1
7-N-2
7
NONE
2
7-O-2
7
ODD
2
7-E-2
7
EVEN
2
349
[RS-232C]
[Flow Control]
Set the communication protocol.
Available to change only if you have selected [RS-232C] in the [Interface] menu.
The options are as follows:
•
[READY/BUSY Multi]
•
[XON/XOFF Multi]
•
[STATUS3]
•
[STATUS4]
•
[STATUS5]
•
[None]
[BCC]
Enable or disable the BCC check function.
Appears only if you have selected [RS-232C] in the [Interface] menu and if you have selected
[STATUS5] in the [Flow Control] menu.
The options are as follows:
350
Enabled
Enable the BCC check function.
Disabled
Disable the BCC check function.
[USB]
Set the USB connection.
The setting items are as follows:
Flow Control
Set the communication protocol.
BCC
Set the BCC check function.
◦
Appears only if you have selected [Status5] in the [Flow Control] menu.
[Flow Control]
351
[Bluetooth]
Set the communication protocol.
The options are as follows:
•
[Status4]
•
[Status5]
•
[None]
[BCC]
Enable or disable the BCC check function.
Appears only if you have selected [Status5] in the [Flow Control] menu.
The options are as follows:
Enabled
Enable the BCC check function.
Disabled
Disable the BCC check function.
[Bluetooth]
352
Set the Bluetooth connection.
The setting items are as follows:
Enable
Enable or disable the functions for Bluetooth.
Name
Set the device name for the printer.
PIN Code
Set the PIN code.
BD Address
Shows the BD address of the printer. (You cannot change this address.)
Firm Version
Shows the firmware version of the Bluetooth. (You cannot change this value.)
Host BD Addr
Check the Host BD address.
Authentication
Set the authentication level.
ISI
Set the ISI communication parameter.
ISW
Set the ISW communication parameter.
PSI
Set the PSI communication parameter.
PSW
Set the PSW communication parameter.
CRC Mode
Set the CRC check function.
Flow Control
Set the communication protocol.
353
[Bluetooth]
[Enable]
Enable or disable the functions for Bluetooth.
The options are as follows:
Enabled
Enable the Bluetooth function.
Disabled
Disable the Bluetooth function.
[Name]
Set the device name for the printer.
You can enter 1 to 53 characters. Alphabets (capital and small letters), numbers and symbols can be
used.
354
[PIN Code]
Set the PIN code.
You can enter 4 to 16 characters for the PIN code. Alphabets (capital and small letters), numbers and
symbols can be used.
[Authentication]
Set the authentication level.
The options are as follows:
None
None
Level 2-1
PIN code authentication, service level, no encryption
Level 2-2
PIN code authentication, service level, encryption
Level 3
PIN code authentication, link level, no encryption
355
[Bluetooth]
Level 4
Secure Simple Pairing compatible, service level, encryption (Can be communicated with devices
that are not compatible with Secure Simple Pairing)
[ISI]
Set the ISI communication parameter.
The setting range is from 18 to 4096.
Set to a value that is higher than the ISW communication parameter setting value.
[ISW]
Set the ISW communication parameter.
The setting range is 0, or from 17 to 4096.
The setting range varies depending on the ISI communication parameter setting value.
Set to a value that is less than the ISI communication parameter setting value.
356
[PSI]
Set the PSI communication parameter.
The setting range is from 18 to 4096.
Set to a value that is higher than the PSW communication parameter setting value.
[PSW]
Set the PSW communication parameter.
The setting range is from 17 to 4096.
The setting range varies depending on the PSI communication parameter setting value.
Set to a value that is less than the PSI communication parameter setting value.
357
[Bluetooth]
[CRC Mode]
Enable or disable the CRC check function.
The options are as follows:
Enabled
Enable the CRC check function.
Disabled
Disable the CRC check function.
[Flow Control]
Set the communication protocol.
The options are as follows:
•
[Status3]
•
[Status4 Multi]
•
[None]
358
[NFC]
Sets the NFC connection.
The setting item is as follows:
I/F Enable
Enables or disables the NFC interface.
•
This feature is supported on printers from serial number 6B~ and above.
[I/F Enable]
Enables or disables the NFC interface.
The options are as follows:
Enabled
Enables the NFC interface.
Disabled
Disables the NFC interface.
359
[Ignore CAN/DLE]
•
This feature is supported on printers from serial number 6B~ and above.
[Ignore CR/LF]
Set whether to ignore the CR/LF code (0x0D / 0x0A) in the received data.
The options are as follows:
Enabled
Ignore the CR/LF code.
Disabled
Do not ignore the CR/LF code.
[Ignore CAN/DLE]
Set whether to ignore the CAN/DLE code (0x10 / 0x18) in the received data.
The options are as follows:
Enabled
Ignore the CAN/DLE code.
360
Disabled
Do not ignore the CAN/DLE code.
[External I/O]
Use the external (EXT) terminal as an interface between the external device and the printer.
Appears only if the combo interface board is installed.
The setting items are as follows:
Enable
Enable or disable the external signal interface.
Signals
Set the external signal.
◦
Appears only if you have selected [Enabled] in the [Enable] menu.
EXT I/O Re-print
Set the reprint function that uses the external terminal.
361
[External I/O]
[Enable]
Enable or disable the external signal interface.
The options are as follows:
Enabled
Enable the external signal interface.
Disabled
Disable the external signal interface.
[Signals]
Set the external signal.
Appears only if you have selected [Enabled] in the [Enable] menu.
The setting items are as follows:
EXT 9PIN
Set the function of the EXT 9PIN output.
EXT Mode
Set the mode of the Print End Signal.
362
Inputs
Set the input pin No. of the Signal Print Start/Signal Reprint.
Outputs
Set the output pin No. of the signals.
[EXT 9PIN]
Set the function of the EXT 9PIN output.
The options are as follows:
MODE1
The output signal becomes "Active" only when there is data in print buffer and printer is ONLINE.
MODE2
The output signal becomes "Active" when printer is ONLINE regardless of print data in buffer.
[EXT Mode]
Set the mode of the Print End Signal.
The options are as follows:
363
[External I/O]
TYPE1
The print end signal (PREND) is "High" before label printing, and it becomes "Low" after print
completion. The signal level becomes "High" after 20 ms.
TYPE2
The print end signal (PREND) is "Low" before label printing, and it becomes "High" after print
completion. The signal level becomes "Low" after 20 ms.
TYPE3
The print end signal (PREND) is "High" before label printing, becomes "Low" from the start to the
end of print, and becomes "High" again after print completion.
TYPE4
The print end signal (PREND) is "Low" before label printing, becomes "High" from the start to the
end of print, and becomes "Low" again after print completion.
[Inputs]
Set the input pin No. of the Signal Print Start/Signal Reprint.
Press the
/
buttons to highlight the item that you want to change, and press the
buttons to change the pin No.
Press the
button to save the settings and return to the [Signals] menu.
The setting items are as follows:
Start Print
Set the input pin No. of the Signal Print Start.
The options are as follows:
[PIN 5]
Set the Signal Print Start to pin 5.
[PIN 7]
Set the Signal Print Start to pin 7.
Reprint
Set the input pin No. of the Signal Reprint.
The options are as follows:
364
/
[PIN 5]
Set the Signal Reprint to pin 5.
[PIN 7]
Set the Signal Reprint to pin 7.
•
You cannot set any inputs using the same pin number. If you attempt to set the same
number, the settings will be shown in red and you cannot save the settings.
[Outputs]
If the mode is other than RFID mode
If RFID mode is enabled (CL4NX only)
Set the output pin No. of the signals.
Press the
/
buttons to highlight the item that you want to change, and press the
buttons to change the pin No.
Press the
button to save the settings and return to the [Signals] menu.
The setting items are as follows:
Paper End
365
/
[External I/O]
Paper/Ribbon End (If RFID mode is enabled) (CL4NX only)
Set the output pin No. of the Signal Paper End.
Set the output pin No. of the Signal Paper/Ribbon End if you have installed the RFID.
Ribbon End
RFID Tag Error (If RFID mode is enabled) (CL4NX only)
Set the output pin No. of the Signal Ribbon End.
Set the output pin No. of the Signal RFID Tag Error if you have installed the RFID.
Machine Error
Machine/RFID Error (If RFID mode is enabled) (CL4NX only)
Set the output pin No. of the Signal Machine Error.
Set the output pin No. of the Signal Machine/RFID Error if you have installed the RFID.
Print Done
Set the output pin No. of the Signal Print End.
Qty
Offline
[Qty] is shown if [MODE1] is selected in the [EXT 9PIN] menu.
[Offline] is shown if [MODE2] is selected in the [EXT 9PIN] menu.
Set the output pin No. of the Signal Qty/Offline.
Ribbon Near End
Set the output pin No. of the Signal Ribbon Near End.
Dispenser
Set the output pin No. of the Signal Dispenser.
◦
Use this signal to connect the dispenser unit or linerless cutter kit (CL4NX only).
Label Near End
Set the output pin No. of the Signal Label Near End.
*This feature is supported on printers from serial number 6B~ and above.
The options for each signal output are as follows:
[PIN 1]
Set the selected signal to pin 1.
[PIN 3]
Set the selected signal to pin 3.
[PIN 4]
Set the selected signal to pin 4.
[PIN 6]
Set the selected signal to pin 6.
[PIN 9]
Set the selected signal to pin 9.
[PIN 10]
Set the selected signal to pin 10.
[OFF]
Set the selected signal to off mode.
366
•
You cannot set any outputs using the same pin number. If you attempt to set the same
number, the settings will be shown in red and you cannot save the settings.
[EXT I/O Re-print]
Set the reprint function that uses the external terminal.
The options are as follows:
Enabled
Enable the reprint function.
Disabled
Disable the reprint function.
[RFID] (CL4NX only)
Set the RFID.
Appears only for the RFID model.
The setting items are as follows:
367
[RFID] (CL4NX only)
Antenna Pitch
Set the antenna pitch.
Write Power
Set radio power level used to write information to RFID tag.
Read Power
Set radio power level used to read information from RFID tag.
Tag Offset
Set distance to print on label BEFORE pausing to encode RFID.
Reader Model
Shows the RFID module model.
Reader Version
Shows the RFID module firmware version.
View
Shows the RFID tag data.
Retry Mode
Set whether to retry encoding of failed data when an RFID error occurs.
Retries
Set the number of failed encoding attempts before error warning/print pause.
Mark bad tags
Set the error print for the RFID tag error.
Non-RFID Warning
Set the non-RFID warning message.
Log RFID Data
Set the log function to record the encoded tag information.
Data To Record
Set the data to be recorded.
Output Error Mode
Set the signal type for RFID errors.
Pulse Length
Set the length of an RFID error pulse.
◦
Appears only if you have selected [Pulse] in the [Output Error Mode] menu.
Counters
Shows the RFID counter.
368
[Antenna Pitch]
Set the antenna pitch according to the Inlay Configuration Guide. For details, access the following
URL:
http://www.satoworldwide.com/rfid/
Appears only if the module is UHF.
The options are as follows:
•
[Standard]
•
[Short]
[Write Power]
Set radio power level used to write information to RFID tag according to the Inlay Configuration Guide.
For details, access the following URL:
http://www.satoworldwide.com/rfid/
Appears only if the module is UHF.
The setting range is from 0 to 24 dBm.
369
[RFID] (CL4NX only)
[Read Power]
Set radio power level used to read information from RFID tag according to the Inlay Configuration
Guide. For details, access the following URL:
http://www.satoworldwide.com/rfid/
Appears only if the module is UHF.
The setting range is from 0 to 24 dBm.
[Tag Offset]
Set distance to print on label BEFORE pausing to encode RFID according to the Inlay Configuration
Guide. This setting will be used when labels are not compatible with the CL4NX’s antenna positions.
For details, access the following URL:
http://www.satoworldwide.com/rfid/
The setting range is from 0 to 240 mm.
370
[View]
Shows the RFID tag data.
Press the
Press the
data.
button to change to the [Memory Bank] screen.
button (READ) to change to the [Data Reading] screen, to read and show the
On the [Data Reading] screen, you can press the
read the tag currently set in the printer.
button to feed the media and attempt to
[Memory Bank]
Set the memory area of the RFID tag to read.
The readable memory areas are as follows:
If the installed module is UHF
EPC
EPC area
TID
TID area
371
[RFID] (CL4NX only)
USER
USER area
PC
PC/AFI area
If the installed module is HF
USER
USER area
UID
UID area
[Retry Mode]
Set whether to retry encoding of failed data when an RFID error occurs.
The options are as follows:
Retry
The printer will continue to attempt encoding the same data. However, if you have set [Retries] to
0, the RFID error screen appears and printing continues.
Release
Deletes the current print job, allowing the printer to move on to the next print job. If the RFID error
occurs continuously and reaches the maximum number of [Retries], printing stops.
372
[Retries]
Set the number of failed encoding attempts before error warning/print pause.
The setting range is from 0 to 9.
If you set to 0, the RFID error screen appears and printing continues.
[Mark bad tags]
Set the error print for the RFID tag error.
Enabled
Enable the RFID error print function.
Disabled
Disable the RFID error print function.
373
[RFID] (CL4NX only)
[Non-RFID Warning]
Set whether to warn the use of an RFID tag by mistake if RFID command is not used.
The options are as follows:
Enabled
Shows the non-RFID warning upon error.
Disabled
Ignore the non-RFID error.
With Non-RFID warning enabled and RFID tag loaded, if the items received do not contain an RFID
issue command, a warning error appears before printing so that the RFID tag will not be wasted.
Press the
button (CANCEL) to clear the warning message.
374
[Log RFID Data]
Set the log function to record the encoded tag information.
The log data can record up to 100 tags of information.
The options are as follows:
Enabled
Enable the log function to record the RFID data.
Disabled
Disable the log function to record the RFID data.
•
UID data is recorded if the module is HF.
[Data To Record]
Set the data to record the log when [Log RFID Data] is enabled.
Appears only if the module is UHF.
The options are as follows:
375
[RFID] (CL4NX only)
EPC and TID
Store the EPC and TID data.
EPC
Store the EPC data.
TID
Store the TID data.
[Output Error Mode]
Set the signal type for RFID errors.
The options are as follows:
Pulse
Outputs a pulse as the output signal when an RFID error occurs.
Level
Outputs a level as the output signal when an RFID error occurs.
[Pulse Length]
376
Set the length of an RFID error pulse.
Appears only if you have selected [Pulse] in the [Output Error Mode] menu.
The options are as follows:
•
[100 ms]
•
[200 ms]
•
[300 ms]
•
[400 ms]
•
[500 ms]
[Counters]
Shows the RFID counter.
The display items are as follows:
Lifetime
Shows the number of encoding successes, failures, and total attempts.
User
Shows the number of encoding successes, failures, and total attempts after the RFID counter is
cleared.
377
[RFID] (CL4NX only)
[Lifetime]
Shows the number of encoding successes, failures, and total attempts.
The display items are as follows:
Count Success
Shows the total number of successful times you have written to an RFID tag.
Count Failure
Shows the total number of RFID write errors.
Count Total
Shows the total number of times you have written to an RFID tag.
This is the total number including [Count Success] and [Count Failure].
[User]
Shows the number of encoding successes, failures, and total attempts after the RFID counter is
cleared.
The display items are as follows:
378
Count Success
Shows the total number of successful times you have written to an RFID tag after the RFID
counter is cleared.
Count Failure
Shows the total number of RFID write errors after the RFID counter is cleared.
Count Total
Shows the total number of times you have written to an RFID tag after the RFID counter is
cleared.
This is the total number including [Count Success] and [Count Failure].
•
You can reset the counter using the
or higher.
button ([CLEAR]) when the counter is 1
379
[Applications] Menu
[Applications] Menu
The following settings are available in the [Applications] menu:
Protocol
Set the printer language.
SBPL
Set the SBPL printer command.
SZPL
Set the SZPL printer command.
SIPL
Set the SIPL printer command.
STCL
Set the STCL printer command.
SDPL
Set the SDPL printer command.
SEPL
Set the SEPL printer command.
AEP
Set the functions for AEP (Application Enabled Printing).
380
[Protocol]
Set the printer language.
The options are as follows:
AUTO
Automatically analyze the received print data and set the printer language. In [AUTO] mode, the
printer can change the language after startup by receiving another language.
SBPL
Set when you use the SBPL printer language or XML.
SZPL
Set when you use the SZPL printer language.
SIPL
Set when you use the SIPL printer language.
SDPL
Set when you use the SDPL printer language.
STCL
Set when you use the STCL printer language.
SEPL
Set when you use the SEPL printer language.
381
[SBPL]
(When [AUTO] is selected in the [Protocol] menu)
•
When [AUTO] is selected, a message prompting you to restart the printer will appear
on the Online/Offline screen. In such a case, reboot the printer to apply the settings.
•
Once the printer language is fixed, the name of the printer language will appear on the
Online/Offline screen. The area to show the name of the printer language will remain
blank until the printer language is finalized.
The area remains blank until the
printer language is finalized.
When the print data has been sent in
SBPL.
•
Printer language is finalized with the received print data.
•
When [SBPL] > [Standard Code] in the [Applications] menu is disabled, the [Protocol]
setting will be changed to [SBPL].
[SBPL]
SBPL (Sato Barcode Printer Language) is the common command that controls SATO barcode label
printers.
To use SBPL as a printer command, set the following items:
Show Error
Enable or disable the command error indication.
Standard Code
Set the protocol code.
382
Orientation
Set the layout for printing.
Font Settings
Set the font.
Compatible
Set the compatible code.
[Show Error]
Enable or disable the command error indication when incorrect command or parameter is detected in
the print data.
The options are as follows:
Enabled
Enable the command error indication. The command error is shown and the print operation is
paused when incorrect command or parameter is detected in the print data.
Disabled
Disable the command error indication.
383
[SBPL]
[Standard Code]
Set the protocol code.
The options are as follows:
Enabled
Use a standard code.
Disabled
Use a non-standard code.
•
A message prompting you to restart the printer will appear on the Online/Offline screen
if you have made any changes. In such a case, reboot the printer to apply the settings.
When [AUTO] is selected in the [Protocol] menu while [Disabled] is selected, the
setting will be changed to [Enabled].
[Orientation]
Select the layout for printing the label.
Portrait
Use a portrait layout. (No rotation)
384
Landscape
Use a landscape layout. (90-degree rotation)
Inv. Portrait
Use an inverse portrait layout. (180-degree rotation)
Inv. Landscape
Use an inverse landscape layout. (270-degree rotation)
[Font Settings]
Set the font.
The setting items are as follows:
Zero Slash
Set the type for printing zero.
Kanji
Set the kanji code to be used.
Proportional
Set the character pitch for printing.
Code Page
Set the code page to be used.
€
Set the European currency symbol to an ASCII code.
385
[SBPL]
[Zero Slash]
Set whether to print the number zero (0) with or without a slash (/).
This setting is applied to the following bitmap fonts:
U, S, M, WB, WL, XU, XS, XM, XL, X20, X21, X22, X23, X24
The options are as follows:
Enabled
Print zero with a slash.
Disabled
Print zero without a slash.
[Kanji]
Set the kanji code to be used.
The setting items are as follows:
Kanji Set
Set the kanji code to be used.
Character Code
Set the character code to be used.
386
Kanji Style
Set the font to be used.
[Kanji Set]
Set the kanji code to be used.
The options are as follows:
•
[JP-COMPATIBLE]
•
[JP-JISX0208]
•
[JP-JISX0213]
•
[GB18030]
•
[BIG5]
•
[KSC5601]
[Character Code]
Set the character code to be used.
The options vary depending on the kanji code set in the [Kanji Set]:
•
When set to [JP-COMPATIBLE] or [JP-JISX0208]
◦
[JIS]
387
[SBPL]
◦
[SJIS]
◦
[UTF-16]
•
When set to [JP-JISX0213]
◦
[SJIS]
◦
[UTF-16]
•
When set to [GB18030]
◦
[GB18030]
•
When set to [BIG5]
◦
[BIG5]
•
When set to [KSC5601]
◦
[KSC5601]
[Kanji Style]
Set the font to be used.
The options are as follows:
•
[Mincho]
•
[Gothic]
388
[Proportional]
Set whether to print each character using a proportional pitch or fixed pitch.
The options are as follows:
Enabled
Print each character with a proportional pitch.
Disabled
Print all characters with a fixed pitch.
[Code Page]
Select the code page to be used from the list.
389
[SBPL]
[€]
Set the European currency symbol to an ASCII code.
The setting range is from 00 to ff (hexadecimal).
[Compatible]
Set the compatible code for SBPL.
The setting items are as follows:
M-8400 Compatibility
Enable or disable the M-8400 printer compatibility function.
CODE128(C) Zero Fill
Set whether to allow odd digits and print the barcode with zero-filling when start code C is used in
CODE128.
◦
If [M-8400 Compatibility] is set to [Enabled], this setting is automatically enabled and does not
appear.
Kanji Command
Set the printer behavior when the received data includes the Kanji command ESC+K5, ESC+K6
or ESC+K7.
390
Call Font/Logo
Set how to process the character code specified in Recall font & logo command (ESC+RF).
ENQ Reply Delay
Set the period to delay status reply to status request ENQ.
ENQ Reply Cycle
Set the interval for the status reply cycle to status request ENQ.
[M-8400 Compatibility]
Enable or disable the M-8400 printer compatibility function.
The options are as follows:
Enabled
Enable the M-8400 printer compatibility function.
Disabled
Disable the M-8400 printer compatibility function.
•
Contact your SATO sales representative for more information about the M-8400 printer
compatibility function.
•
If [M-8400 Compatibility] is set to [Enabled], [CODE128(C) Zero Fill] is automatically
enabled and the setting item does not appear.
391
[SBPL]
[CODE128(C) Zero Fill]
Set whether to allow odd digits and print the barcode with zero-filling when start code C is used in
CODE128.
If [M-8400 Compatibility] is set to [Enabled], this setting is automatically enabled and does not appear.
The options are as follows:
Enabled
Allow odd digits and print the barcode with zero-filling.
Disabled
Do not allow odd digits. A command error occurs and the barcode will not be printed.
[Kanji Command]
Set the printer behavior when the received data includes the Kanji command ESC+K5, ESC+K6 or
ESC+K7.
The options are as follows:
Enabled
Change the Kanji commands ESC+K5, ESC+K6 and ESC+K7 in the received data to the proper
commands and print.
◦
ESC+K5: 16x16 dots Kanji in horizontal line with one-byte character
392
◦
ESC+K6: 24x24 dots Kanji in horizontal line with one-byte character
◦
ESC+K7: 22x22 dots Kanji in horizontal line
Disabled
Do not change the Kanji commands ESC+K5, ESC+K6 and ESC+K7 in the received data. The
printer behavior when it receives these commands is as follows:
◦
ESC+K5: Print with 40x40 dots Kanji in horizontal line.
◦
ESC+K6: A command error occurs and the data will not be printed.
◦
ESC+K7: A command error occurs and the data will not be printed.
[Call Font/Logo]
Set how to process the character code specified in Recall font & logo command (ESC+RF).
The options are as follows:
Enabled
Character codes are processed in little-endian format.
Disabled
Character codes are processed in big-endian format.
393
[SBPL]
[ENQ Reply Delay]
Set the period to delay status reply to status request ENQ.
The target interfaces are LAN and Wireless LAN.
The target statuses are Status3, Status4 ENQ reply, and Status5.
The setting range is from 0 to 9999 ms.
[ENQ Reply Cycle]
Set the interval for the status reply cycle to status request ENQ.
The target interfaces are LAN and Wireless LAN.
The target status is Status4 reply cycle.
The setting range is from 100 to 999 ms.
394
[SZPL]
To use SZPL as a printer command, set the following items:
Label
Set the print position.
Caret
Set the caret (^) code.
Delimiter
Set the delimiter (,) code.
Tilde
Set the tilde (~) code.
Clock Format
Set the date format.
[Label]
Set the print position.
395
[SZPL]
The setting items are as follows:
Shift
Set the shift offset position of the label.
Top
Set the top offset position of the label.
[Shift]
Set the shift offset position of the label.
The setting range varies depending on the print resolution of the printer.
The setting range is as follows:
Resolution
CL4NX
CL6NX
203 dpi
-832 to 0 to 832 dots
-832 to 0 to 832 dots
-1248 to 0 to 1248 dots
-1248 to 0 to 1248 dots
-2496 to 0 to 2496 dots
-
(1 dot = 0.125 mm
(0.0049"))
305 dpi
(1 dot = 0.083 mm
(0.0033"))
609 dpi
(1 dot = 0.042 mm
(0.0017"))
396
[Top]
Set the top offset position of the label.
The setting range is from -120 to 0 to 120 dots.
•
The length of 1 dot varies depending on the print resolution of the printer.
◦
203 dpi : 1 dot = 0.125 mm (0.0049")
◦
305 dpi : 1 dot = 0.083 mm (0.0033")
◦
609 dpi : 1 dot = 0.042 mm (0.0017")
[Caret]
Set the caret (^) code.
The setting range is from 0 to 255.
397
[SZPL]
[Delimiter]
Set the delimiter (,) code.
The setting range is from 0 to 255.
[Tilde]
Set the tilde (~) code.
The setting range is from 0 to 255.
398
[Clock Format]
Set the date format.
The options are as follows:
•
[(none)]
•
[MM/DD/YY (24-hour clock)]
•
[MM/DD/YY (12-hour clock)]
•
[DD/MM/YY (24-hour clock)]
•
[DD/MM/YY (12-hour clock)]
[SIPL]
To use SIPL as a printer command, set the following items:
Font Settings
Set the font.
Format Save
Set whether to save the user format data registered at printing in the printer.
399
[SIPL]
[Font Settings]
Set the font.
The setting items are as follows:
Code Page
Set the code page to be used.
New Font Encoding
Enable or disable new font encoding.
c20 Proportional Pitch
Set the character pitch for printing.
Zero Slash
Set the type for printing zero.
[Code Page]
Select the code page to be used from the list.
400
[New Font Encoding]
Enable or disable new font encoding.
The options are as follows:
Enabled
Enable new font encoding.
Disabled
Disable new font encoding.
•
Contact your SATO sales representative for more information about the new font.
[c20 Proportional Pitch]
Set whether to print each character using a proportional pitch or fixed pitch.
The options are as follows:
Enabled
Print each character with a proportional pitch.
401
[SIPL]
Disabled
Print all characters with a fixed pitch.
[Zero Slash]
Set whether to print the number zero (0) with or without a slash (/).
The options are as follows:
Enabled
Print zero with a slash.
Disabled
Print zero without a slash.
[Format Save]
Set whether to save the user format data registered at printing in the printer.
The options are as follows:
Enabled
Save the user format data registered at printing in the printer.
402
Disabled
Do not save the user format data registered at printing in the printer. The user format data
remains in the printer memory until the printer is powered off. You need to register a user format
again after reboot.
[STCL]
To use STCL as a printer command, set the following items:
Command Head
Set the command head.
Font Settings
Set the font.
Rotation
Set the page orientation for label printing.
Ignore Paper Size Command
Set whether to ignore a paper size command in the print data.
403
[STCL]
[Command Head]
Set the command head.
The setting items are as follows:
Control Code
Set the control code.
1st Byte Code
Set the first byte code.
2nd Byte Code
Set the second byte code.
3rd Byte Code
Set the third byte code.
[Control Code]
Set the control code.
The options are as follows:
404
Auto
Perform the protocol detection automatically.
ESC|LF|NUL
Set the control code to ESC|LF|NUL.
7B|7C|7D
Set the control code to 7B|7C|7D.
Custom
Change the first to third byte codes.
[1st Byte Code]
Set the first byte code.
You can change the code only if you have selected [Custom] in the [Control Code] menu.
The setting range is from 0 to 255.
[2nd Byte Code]
Set the second byte code.
You can change the code only if you have selected [Custom] in the [Control Code] menu.
The setting range is from 0 to 255.
405
[STCL]
[3rd Byte Code]
Set the third byte code.
You can change the code only if you have selected [Custom] in the [Control Code] menu.
The setting range is from 0 to 255.
[Font Settings]
Set the font.
The setting items are as follows:
Zero Slash
Set the type for printing zero.
€
Set the European currency symbol to an ASCII code.
Code Page
Set the code page to be used.
Half-width Symbol
Set whether to print symbols with half-width characters.
406
[Zero Slash]
Set whether to print the number zero (0) with or without a slash (/).
The options are as follows:
Enabled
Print zero with a slash.
Disabled
Print zero without a slash.
[€]
Set the European currency symbol to an ASCII code.
The setting range is from 00 to ff (hexadecimal).
407
[STCL]
[Code Page]
Select the code page to be used from the list.
[Half-width Symbol]
Set whether to print symbols with half-width characters.
The options are as follows:
Enabled
Print symbols with half-width characters.
Disabled
Do not print symbols with half-width characters.
408
[Rotation]
Set the page orientation for label printing.
The options are as follows:
0 degree
Labels are printed in portrait orientation.
90 degree
Labels are printed in landscape orientation.
[Ignore Paper Size Command]
Set whether to ignore a paper size command in the print data.
The options are as follows:
Enabled
Ignore a paper size command in the print data.
Disabled
Do not ignore a paper size command in the print data.
409
[SDPL]
[SDPL]
To use SDPL as a printer command, set the following items:
Control Code
Set the control code.
Label Rotation
Set the page orientation for label printing.
SOP Emulation
Set the SOP emulation.
Compatible Mode
Set the compatible mode for SDPL.
Right-to-Left print
Set the Right-to-Left printing function.
Prioritize
Select the settings to be prioritized for the SDPL command.
Format Attribute
Set the format attribute.
Pause Mode
Enable or disable the pause mode.
1 Byte Codepage
Select the code page to be used for one-byte characters.
SDPL Measure Unit
Set the measurement unit.
Scalable Font Style
Set the style of the scalable fonts.
410
•
[Format Attribute], [Pause Mode], [1 Byte Codepage], [SDPL Measure Unit] and
[Scalable Font Style] are available only if [Settings] is selected for the corresponding
setting item under the [Prioritize] menu.
[Control Code]
Set the control code.
The setting items are as follows:
Code Type
Set the type of the control code.
SOH
Set the SOH code.
STX
Set the STX code.
CR
Set the CR code.
CNTBY
Set the CNTBY code.
411
[SDPL]
[Code Type]
Set the type of the control code.
The options are as follows:
•
[Standard]
•
[Alternate 1]
•
[Alternate 2]
•
[Custom]
[SOH]
Set the SOH code.
You can change the code only if you have selected [Custom] in the [Code Type] menu.
The setting range is from 00 to ff (hexadecimal).
412
[STX]
Set the STX code.
You can change the code only if you have selected [Custom] in the [Code Type] menu.
The setting range is from 00 to ff (hexadecimal).
[CR]
Set the CR code.
You can change the code only if you have selected [Custom] in the [Code Type] menu.
The setting range is from 00 to ff (hexadecimal).
413
[SDPL]
[CNTBY]
Set the CNTBY code.
You can change the code only if you have selected [Custom] in the [Code Type] menu.
The setting range is from 00 to ff (hexadecimal).
[Label Rotation]
Set the page orientation for label printing.
The label size set in the printer is used as a reference of rotation.
The options are as follows:
0 degree
Labels are printed in portrait orientation.
90 degree
Labels are printed in landscape orientation.
180 degree
Labels are printed in inverse-portrait orientation.
270 degree
Labels are printed in inverse-landscape orientation.
414
[SOP Emulation]
Set the SOP emulation.
The options are as follows:
•
[Disabled]
•
[Prodigy Plus - 110]
•
[Allegro - 220]
•
[Prodigy - 250]
•
[Auto]
[Compatible Mode]
Set the compatible mode for SDPL.
The setting items are as follows:
TTF
Enable or disable TrueType font compatible mode.
Graphics
Set whether to allow the registration of graphic data even if a line feed code is omitted.
415
[SDPL]
[TTF]
Enable or disable TrueType font compatible mode.
The options are as follows:
Enabled
Enable TrueType font compatible mode. The bold TrueType fonts are printed in smaller pitch.
Disabled
Disable TrueType font compatible mode.
[Graphics]
Set whether to allow the registration of graphic data even if a line feed code is omitted.
The options are as follows:
Enabled
Allow the registration of graphic data even when a line feed code is omitted.
Disabled
Do not allow the registration of graphic data when a line feed code is omitted.
416
[Right-to-Left print]
Set the Right-to-Left printing function.
The options are as follows:
Disabled
All texts are printed from left to right.
Auto
When an Arabic font is detected, the Arabic text is printed from right to left.
[Prioritize]
Select the settings to be prioritized for each setting item of the SDPL command. You can set whether
to prioritize settings through the printer or through commands.
When you select [Settings] for an item, the setting specified in the [SDPL] menu of the printer will be
used.
The setting items are as follows:
Format Attribute
Select the setting to be prioritized for the format attribute.
417
[SDPL]
Pause Mode
Select the setting to be prioritized for pause mode.
1 Byte Codepage
Select the setting to be prioritized for the 1 byte code page.
SDPL Measure Unit
Select the setting to be prioritized for the measurement unit.
Scalable Font Style
Select the setting to be prioritized for the scalable font style.
Darkness
Factory Offset
Speed
Sensor Type
The option selected in the [Printing] > [Advanced] > [Prioritize] menu is applied to these four
settings and shown on this screen.
[Format Attribute]
Set whether to prioritize the settings through the printer or through commands for the format attribute
setting.
The options are as follows:
Commands
Prioritize the settings through commands.
Settings
Prioritize the settings through the printer.
418
[Pause Mode]
Set whether to prioritize the settings through the printer or through commands for the pause mode
setting.
The options are as follows:
Commands
Prioritize the settings through commands.
Settings
Prioritize the settings through the printer.
[1 Byte Codepage]
Set whether to prioritize the settings through the printer or through commands for the 1 byte code
page setting.
The options are as follows:
Commands
Prioritize the settings through commands.
Settings
Prioritize the settings through the printer.
419
[SDPL]
[SDPL Measure Unit]
Set whether to prioritize the settings through the printer or through commands for the measurement
unit setting.
The options are as follows:
Commands
Prioritize the settings through commands.
Settings
Prioritize the settings through the printer.
[Scalable Font Style]
Set whether to prioritize the settings through the printer or through commands for the scalable font
style settings.
The options are as follows:
Commands
Prioritize the settings through commands.
Settings
Prioritize the settings through the printer.
420
[Format Attribute]
Set the format attribute.
You can change this setting only if you have selected [Settings] in the [Prioritize] > [Format Attribute]
menu.
The options are as follows:
•
[XOR]
•
[Transparent]
•
[Opaque]
•
[Inverse]
[Pause Mode]
Enable or disable the pause mode.
You can change this setting only if you have selected [Settings] in the [Prioritize] > [Pause Mode]
menu.
The options are as follows:
Enabled
Enable the pause mode.
421
[SDPL]
Disabled
Disable the pause mode.
[1 Byte Codepage]
Select the code page to be used for one-byte characters from the list.
You can change this setting only if you have selected [Settings] in the [Prioritize] > [1 Byte Codepage]
menu.
[SDPL Measure Unit]
Set the measurement unit.
You can change this setting only if you have selected [Settings] in the [Prioritize] > [SDPL Measure
Unit] menu.
The options are as follows:
•
[Inch]
•
[Millimeter]
422
[Scalable Font Style]
Set the style of the scalable fonts.
You can change this setting only if you have selected [Settings] in the [Prioritize] > [Scalable Font
Style] menu.
The setting items are as follows:
Bold
Set whether to use bold.
Italic
Set whether to use italics.
[Bold]
Set whether to use bold for the scalable fonts.
The options are as follows:
Enabled
Use bold.
423
[SEPL]
Disabled
Do not use bold.
[Italic]
Set whether to use italics for the scalable fonts.
The options are as follows:
Enabled
Use italics.
Disabled
Do not use italics.
[SEPL]
To use SEPL as a printer command, set the following items:
Home Reference
Adjust the print reference position by specifying the offset position in the horizontal and vertical
directions.
424
Memory Device
Select the printer's memory space in which to store forms, graphics and fonts.
Sim. 300 DPI Head
When you are using the printer with 305 dpi resolution, enable or disable 300 dpi simulation
mode.
[Home Reference]
Adjust the print reference position by specifying the offset position in the horizontal and vertical
directions.
The setting items are as follows:
Horz. Offset
Specify the offset position in the horizontal direction.
Vert. Offset
Specify the offset position in the vertical direction.
[Horz. Offset]
Specify the offset position in the horizontal direction.
425
[SEPL]
The setting range is from 0 to 400 dots.
•
The length of 1 dot varies depending on the print resolution of the printer.
◦
203 dpi : 1 dot = 0.125 mm (0.0049")
◦
305 dpi : 1 dot = 0.083 mm (0.0033")
◦
609 dpi : 1 dot = 0.042 mm (0.0017")
[Vert. Offset]
Specify the offset position in the vertical direction.
The setting range is from 0 to 400 dots.
•
The length of 1 dot varies depending on the print resolution of the printer.
◦
203 dpi : 1 dot = 0.125 mm (0.0049")
◦
305 dpi : 1 dot = 0.083 mm (0.0033")
◦
609 dpi : 1 dot = 0.042 mm (0.0017")
[Memory Device]
426
Select the printer's memory space in which to store forms, graphics and fonts.
The options are as follows:
Internal RAM
Use the printer's RAM. The data will be lost if the printer is powered off.
Internal FLASH
Use the printer's flash memory.
Front USB
Use the USB memory connected to the USB connector (Type A) on the front side of the printer.
Rear USB
Use the USB memory connected to the USB connector (Type A) on the rear side of the printer.
•
Be sure to perform a virus check on the USB memory before connecting it to the
printer. SATO Corporation shall not be held responsible for any printer malfunctions
caused by a virus spread via USB memory.
[Sim. 300 DPI Head]
When you are using the printer with 305 dpi resolution, enable or disable 300 dpi simulation mode.
The options are as follows:
Enabled
Enable 300 dpi simulation mode. The sizes and positions of objects such as lines, boxes and
barcodes in the print data are automatically adjusted to the equivalent 300 dpi sizes and positions
for printing.
Disabled
Disable 300 dpi simulation mode.
427
[AEP]
[AEP]
Set the functions for AEP (Application Enabled Printing).
AEP mode allows you to use the printer as a stand-alone printer by running applications within the
printer.
Use the standard application, or install custom applications to the printer from a USB memory, All-InOne Tool, WebConfig page, etc.
In AEP mode, you can use USB keyboards and barcode scanners to input data.
The setting items are as follows:
Enable
Enable or disable AEP mode.
Start Application
Select the application to start at printer startup in AEP mode.
Label Rotation
Set whether to rotate the page orientation for label printing.
•
Contact your SATO sales representative for more information about the use of AEP
mode.
428
[Enable]
Enable or disable AEP (Application Enabled Printing) mode.
The options are as follows:
Enabled
Enable AEP mode.
Disabled
Disable AEP mode.
•
A message prompting you to restart the printer will appear on the Online/Offline screen
if you have made any changes. In such a case, reboot the printer to apply the settings.
[Start Application]
Select the application to start at printer startup in AEP (Application Enabled Printing) mode.
Select the application using the
/
buttons and press the
429
button to confirm.
[AEP]
[Label Rotation]
Set whether to rotate the page orientation for label printing.
The options are as follows:
Enabled
Rotates the page orientation 180 degrees.
Disabled
Does not rotate the page orientation.
430
[System] Menu
The following settings are available in the [System] menu:
Regional
Set the display language, time zone, calendar and unit.
Notifications
Set the function to notify when to clean and replace parts.
Sound
Set the buzzer sound.
Energy Saving
Set the period before the printer enters sleep mode.
LCD Brightness
Set the brightness of the screen.
Show Total Count
Enable or disable the indication of the total print count.
Password
Set the password.
Start on AC
Set whether to power on/off the printer by powering on/off the main power source.
431
[Regional]
[Regional]
Set the display language, time zone, calendar and unit.
The setting items are as follows:
Messages
Set the display language of the LCD.
USB Keyboard
Set the language for the USB keyboard connected to the printer.
Locale
Set the locale to be used in AEP (Application Enabled Printing) mode.
Unit
Set the unit of length for indication.
Time
Set the time.
•
You can set the time only if you have installed the optional RTC kit.
Date
Set the date.
•
You can set the date only if you have installed the optional RTC kit.
Time Zone
Set the time zone.
432
[Messages]
Set the display language of the LCD.
Select the display language from the list.
[USB Keyboard]
Set the language for the USB keyboard connected to the printer.
Select the USB keyboard layout from Western and Eastern European languages, Japanese, Chinese
and Korean.
•
Japanese, Chinese, and Korean only support a change in the layout of the keyboard.
The IME (Input Method Editor) is not compatible, so you cannot input hiragana,
katakana, or kanji.
433
[Regional]
[Locale]
Set the locale to be used in AEP (Application Enabled Printing) mode.
This setting determines the format of time, dates, numbers, prices, names of weekdays, months, etc.
in AEP applications.
Select the locale from the list.
[Unit]
Set the unit of length for indication.
The options are as follows:
•
[dot]
•
["] (inch)
•
[mm]
434
[Time]
Set the time.
You can set the time only if you have installed the optional RTC kit.
[Date]
Set the date.
You can set the time only if you have installed the optional RTC kit.
The setting range is as follows:
2000-01-01 to 2035-12-31
•
The date format is Year - Month - Date.
435
[Notifications]
[Time Zone]
Set the time zone.
First select the region from the [Region] list.
Then select the city from the [City] list.
[Notifications]
436
Set the function to notify when to clean and replace parts.
The setting items are as follows:
Clean Printhead
Notify when the print head needs to be cleaned.
Change Printhead
Notify when the print head needs to be replaced.
Change Cutter
Notify when the cutter unit needs to be replaced.
Change Platen
Notify when the platen roller needs to be replaced.
[Clean Printhead]
Notify when the print head needs to be cleaned.
The setting items are as follows:
Clean Printhead
Enable or disable the notification function about when the print head needs to be cleaned.
Cleaning Interval
Set the notification interval about when the print head needs to be cleaned.
Clean Counter
Shows the current print distance.
437
[Notifications]
[Clean Printhead]
Enable or disable the notification function about when the print head needs to be cleaned.
The options are as follows:
Enabled
Enable the notification function.
Disabled
Disable the notification function.
[Cleaning Interval]
Set the notification interval about when the print head needs to be cleaned.
You can change the setting only if you have selected [Enabled] in the [Clean Printhead] menu.
The printer shows the print distance as a setting value. The setting range is from 10 to 1000 meters.
438
[Change Printhead]
Notify when the print head needs to be replaced.
The setting items are as follows:
Change Printhead
Enable or disable the notification function about when the print head needs to be replaced.
Printhead Interval
Set the notification interval about when the print head needs to be replaced.
Printhead Count
Shows the current print distance.
[Change Printhead]
Enable or disable the notification function about when the print head needs to be replaced.
The options are as follows:
Enabled
Enable the notification function.
439
[Notifications]
Disabled
Disable the notification function.
[Printhead Interval]
Set the notification interval about when the print head needs to be replaced.
You can change the setting only if you have selected [Enabled] in the [Change Printhead] menu.
The printer shows the print distance as a setting value. The setting range is from 10 to 100 km.
[Change Cutter]
Notify when the cutter unit needs to be replaced.
The setting items are as follows:
Change Cutter
Enable or disable the notification function about when the cutter unit needs to be replaced.
Cutter Life
Set the notification interval about when the cutter unit needs to be replaced.
Cutter Count
Shows the current number of cuts by the cutter.
440
[Change Cutter]
Enable or disable the notification function about when the cutter unit needs to be replaced.
The options are as follows:
Enabled
Enable the notification function.
Disabled
Disable the notification function.
[Cutter Life]
Set the notification interval about when the cutter unit needs to be replaced.
You can change the setting only if you have selected [Enabled] in the [Change Cutter] menu.
The printer shows the cutter count as the setting value. The setting range is from 10 to 1000 Kcuts.
441
[Notifications]
[Change Platen]
Notify when the platen roller needs to be replaced.
The setting items are as follows:
Change Platen
Enable or disable the notification function about when the platen roller needs to be replaced.
Platen Interval
Set the notification interval about when the platen roller needs to be replaced.
Platen Count
Shows the current distance the platen roller has fed.
[Change Platen]
Enable or disable the notification function about when the platen roller needs to be replaced.
The options are as follows:
Enabled
Enable the notification function.
442
Disabled
Disable the notification function.
[Platen Interval]
Set the notification interval about when the platen roller needs to be replaced.
You can change the code only if you have selected [Enabled] in the [Change Platen] menu.
The printer shows the fed distance as the setting value. The setting range is from 10 to 100 km.
[Sound]
Set the buzzer sound.
The setting item is as follows:
Error Sound
Set the buzzer volume for the error sound.
443
[Energy Saving]
[Error Sound]
Set the buzzer volume for the error sound.
The options are as follows:
Off
Mute the sound.
Low
Low volume.
Medium
Medium volume.
High
High volume.
[Energy Saving]
The setting item is as follows:
444
Sleep Timeout
Set the period before the printer enters sleep mode.
[Sleep Timeout]
Set the period before the printer enters sleep mode.
The setting range is from 0 to 60 minutes.
•
The sleep function is disabled if you set to 0.
•
This setting is disabled if [External I/O] is set to [Enabled].
[LCD Brightness]
Set the brightness of the screen.
The setting range is from 0 to 9.
0 is the darkest and 9 is the brightest.
Press the
button to complete the setting.
445
[Show Total Count]
•
The printer has a built-in energy saving function, which will decrease the brightness of
the screen when you have not operated the printer for a period.
[Show Total Count]
Enable or disable the indication of the total print count.
If set to [Enabled], the total print count appears on both the Online and Offline screens.
The number in the brackets to the right of [QTY] on the Online and Offline screens is the total print
count.
The options are as follows:
Enabled
Enable the indication of the total print count.
Disabled
Disable the indication of the total print count.
•
Shows the total print count from the time the printer is on until it is off.
When you power off the printer, the count is reset to [0].
446
[Password]
The setting items are as follows:
Password Enable
Enable or disable the password setting.
Install Security
Enable or disable the password input for the package file download.
NFC Security
Set whether to show the confirmation message or enable the password input before settings are
written to the printer from an Android device with the NFC interface.
Change Password
Change the password.
[Password Enable]
Enable or disable the password setting.
If you have set the password to [Enabled], the printer requires you to enter the password set in the
[Password] screen before you enter the [Settings] menu.
447
[Password]
The options are as follows:
Enabled
Enable the password setting.
Disabled
Disable the password setting.
•
The default password is 0310. You can change the password in [Password] > [Change
Password] > [level1].
[Install Security]
Enable or disable the password input for installing the pkg file to the printer.
If you have enabled the password input, the printer requires you to enter the password set in the
[Password] screen before you can download the package file.
The options are as follows:
Disabled
No password is required to install a pkg file.
USB
Password is required to install a pkg file from the USB memory.
Always
Password is required to install a pkg file from the USB memory or downloaded from computer.
•
The password used for installing a pkg file can be any passwords set in the [System] >
[Password].
Contact your SATO reseller or technical support center for more information of the pkg
file.
448
[NFC Security]
Set whether to show the confirmation message or enable the password input before settings are
written to the printer from an Android device with the NFC interface.
To use the NFC Security function, the settings must be written from the Android device while the
printer is powered off. The confirmation message or password input screen is shown when the printer
is powered on.
The options are as follows:
None
No confirmation message is shown and no password is required before the settings are written to
the printer.
Confirm
The confirmation message is shown before the settings are written to the printer.
Password
You need to enter the password set in the [Password] screen before the settings are written to the
printer.
[Change Password]
Change the password.
449
[Start on AC]
You can enter 4 to 32 characters. Alphabets (capital and small letters), numbers and symbols can be
used.
The setting items are as follows:
admin
This is the setting item for factory.
Strictly for SATO authorized personnel use.
manager
The password for accessing the [Service] menu.
Strictly for SATO authorized personnel use.
level1
The password for accessing the [Settings] menu.
rfid
This is the setting item for factory.
Strictly for SATO authorized personnel use.
•
The [admin], [manager] and [rfid] passwords are for factory and maintenance
personnel. You cannot change these passwords.
[Start on AC]
Set whether to power on/off the printer by powering on/off the main power source.
The options are as follows:
Enabled
Power on/off the printer by powering on/off the main power source.
Disabled
Power on/off the printer by pressing the
power button of the printer.
450
•
Do not repeatedly power on/off the printer.
•
If you power the main power source off and then on again quickly, the printer may not
be powered on because it is still in the powering off process. In such a case, press the
power button to power on the printer.
•
Do not power off the printer during operation, such as when printing or updating. Doing
so could cause a malfunction of the printer.
•
Do not disconnect the power cord until the powering off process is completed on the
printer.
•
An incorrect power on/off operation may damage the printer settings. In such a case,
the printer settings are reset to their default values. It is always recommended to use
the power button to allow proper shutdown of the printer and ensure changes made to
menu settings are saved appropriately.
451
[Tools] Menu
[Tools] Menu
The following settings are available in the [Tools] menu:
Test Print
Perform a test print.
HEX-Dump
Save the hex dump print data or dump data from the receive buffer to the USB memory.
Reset
Initialize the setting or counter of the printer.
Profiles
Utilize the printer settings as profiles.
Service
These are the setting items for service.
Strictly for SATO authorized service personnel use.
Factory
These are the setting items for factory.
Strictly for SATO authorized service personnel use.
Certificates
Set the wireless LAN authentication.
◦
Available only if you have installed the USB memory.
Barcode Checker
Set the barcode check function using a barcode checker.
Clone
Copy the current printer settings and data to the USB memory.
452
◦
Available only if you have installed the USB memory.
Startup Guide
Enable or disable the startup guide.
[Test Print]
Perform a test print.
The setting items are as follows:
Factory
Perform the factory test print.
Configure List
Print the printer setting information.
Configure QR
Print the printer setting information with a QR code.
Paper Sensor
Print the detection result of the media sensor level.
453
[Test Print]
[Factory]
Perform the factory test print.
1. Check and set the items as listed on the [Factory] menu.
2. Press the
button to start the test print. Press the
print.
To stop the test print, first pause the print and then press the
button again to pause the
button.
The setting items are as follows:
Label Width
Shows the necessary media width of the test print.
The necessary media width is 101.6 mm (4") for [Large].
Pitch
Set the print position in the vertical direction.
The setting range varies depending on the print resolution of the printer.
The setting range is as follows:
Resolution
CL4NX
CL6NX
203dpi
-30 to 0 to 30 dots
-30 to 0 to 30 dots
-45 to 0 to 45 dots
-45 to 0 to 45 dots
-90 to 0 to 90 dots
-
(1dot = 0.125 mm
(0.0049"))
305dpi
(1dot = 0.083 mm
(0.0033"))
609dpi
454
Resolution
CL4NX
CL6NX
(1dot = 0.042 mm
(0.0017"))
When you decrease the setting value, the print position moves in the feed direction (toward the
front part of the media).
When you increase the setting value, the print position moves opposite the feed direction (toward
the end part of the media).
Offset
Set the stop position of the media.
The setting range varies depending on the print resolution of the printer.
The setting range is as follows:
Resolution
CL4NX
CL6NX
203dpi
-30 to 0 to 30 dots
-30 to 0 to 30 dots
-45 to 0 to 45 dots
-45 to 0 to 45 dots
-90 to 0 to 90 dots
-
(1dot = 0.125 mm
(0.0049"))
305dpi
(1dot = 0.083 mm
(0.0033"))
609dpi
(1dot = 0.042 mm
(0.0017"))
When you decrease the setting value, the stop position moves in the feed direction (toward the
front part of the media).
When you increase the setting value, the stop position moves opposite the feed direction (toward
the end part of the media).
Darkness Adjust
Fine tune the print darkness of the test print.
0 is the lightest and 99 is the darkest.
•
The value of [Pitch], [Offset] and [Darkness Adjust] set in the [Factory] menu will reflect
to the same item settings in the [Configure List] menu, [Configure QR] menu and
[Paper Sensor] menu.
455
[Test Print]
[Configure List]
Print the printer setting information.
1. Check and set the items as listed on the [Configure List] menu.
2. Press the
button to start the test print. Press the
print.
To stop the test print, first pause the print and then press the
button again to pause the
button.
The setting items are as follows:
Label Width
Shows the necessary media width of the test print.
The necessary media width is 50.8 mm (2") for [Small].
Label Length
Set the length of one piece of the media used for the test print.
The setting range varies depending on the print resolution of the printer.
The setting range is as follows:
Resolution
CL4NX
CL6NX
203 dpi
400 to 1600 dots
400 to 1600 dots
600 to 2400 dots
600 to 2400 dots
1200 to 4800 dots
-
(1 dot = 0.125 mm
(0.0049"))
305 dpi
(1 dot = 0.083 mm
(0.0033"))
609 dpi
(1 dot = 0.042 mm
(0.0017"))
456
Pitch
Set the print position in the vertical direction.
The setting range varies depending on the print resolution of the printer.
The setting range is as follows:
Resolution
CL4NX
CL6NX
203 dpi
-30 to 0 to 30 dots
-30 to 0 to 30 dots
-45 to 0 to 45 dots
-45 to 0 to 45 dots
-90 to 0 to 90 dots
-
(1 dot = 0.125 mm
(0.0049"))
305 dpi
(1 dot = 0.083 mm
(0.0033"))
609 dpi
(1 dot = 0.042 mm
(0.0017"))
When you decrease the setting value, the print position moves in the feed direction (toward the
front part of the media).
When you increase the setting value, the print position moves opposite the feed direction (toward
the end part of the media).
Offset
Set the stop position of the media.
The setting range varies depending on the print resolution of the printer.
The setting range is as follows:
Resolution
CL4NX
CL6NX
203 dpi
-30 to 0 to 30 dots
-30 to 0 to 30 dots
-45 to 0 to 45 dots
-45 to 0 to 45 dots
-90 to 0 to 90 dots
-
(1 dot = 0.125 mm
(0.0049"))
305 dpi
(1 dot = 0.083 mm
(0.0033"))
609 dpi
(1 dot = 0.042 mm
(0.0017"))
When you decrease the setting value, the stop position moves in the feed direction (toward the
front part of the media).
When you increase the setting value, the stop position moves opposite the feed direction (toward
the end part of the media).
457
[Test Print]
Darkness Adjust
Fine tune the print darkness of the test print.
0 is the lightest and 99 is the darkest.
•
The value of [Label Length], [Pitch], [Offset] and [Darkness Adjust] set in the [Configure
List] will be reflected to the same item settings in the [Factory] menu, [Configure QR]
menu and [Paper Sensor] menu.
[Configure QR]
Print the printer setting information with a QR code.
1. Check and set the items as listed on the [Configure QR] menu.
2. Press the
button to start the test print. Press the
print.
To stop the test print, first pause the print and then press the
button again to pause the
button.
The setting items are as follows:
Label Width
Shows the necessary media width of the test print.
The necessary media width is 50.8 mm (2") for [Small].
Label Length
Set the length of one piece of the media used for the test print.
The setting range varies depending on the print resolution of the printer.
The setting range is as follows:
Resolution
CL4NX
CL6NX
203 dpi
400 to 1600 dots
400 to 1600 dots
458
Resolution
CL4NX
CL6NX
600 to 2400 dots
600 to 2400 dots
1200 to 4800 dots
-
(1 dot = 0.125 mm
(0.0049"))
305 dpi
(1 dot = 0.083 mm
(0.0033"))
609 dpi
(1 dot = 0.042 mm
(0.0017"))
Pitch
Set the print position in the vertical direction.
The setting range varies depending on the print resolution of the printer.
The setting range is as follows:
Resolution
CL4NX
CL6NX
203 dpi
-30 to 0 to 30 dots
-30 to 0 to 30 dots
-45 to 0 to 45 dots
-45 to 0 to 45 dots
-90 to 0 to 90 dots
-
(1 dot = 0.125 mm
(0.0049"))
305 dpi
(1 dot = 0.083 mm
(0.0033"))
609 dpi
(1 dot = 0.042 mm
(0.0017"))
When you decrease the setting value, the print position moves in the feed direction (toward the
front part of the media).
When you increase the setting value, the print position moves opposite the feed direction (toward
the end part of the media).
Offset
Set the stop position of the media.
The setting range varies depending on the print resolution of the printer.
The setting range is as follows:
Resolution
CL4NX
CL6NX
203 dpi
-30 to 0 to 30 dots
-30 to 0 to 30 dots
-45 to 0 to 45 dots
-45 to 0 to 45 dots
(1 dot = 0.125 mm
(0.0049"))
305 dpi
459
[Test Print]
Resolution
CL4NX
CL6NX
-90 to 0 to 90 dots
-
(1 dot = 0.083 mm
(0.0033"))
609 dpi
(1 dot = 0.042 mm
(0.0017"))
When you decrease the setting value, the stop position moves in the feed direction (toward the
front part of the media).
When you increase the setting value, the stop position moves opposite the feed direction (toward
the end part of the media).
Darkness Adjust
Fine tune the print darkness of the test print.
0 is the lightest and 99 is the darkest.
•
The value of [Label Length], [Pitch], [Offset] and [Darkness Adjust] set in the [Configure
QR] will be reflected to the same item settings in the [Factory] menu, [Configure List]
menu and [Paper Sensor] menu.
[Paper Sensor]
Print the detection result of the media sensor level.
1. Check and set the items as listed on the [Paper Sensor] menu.
2. Press the
button to start the test print. Press the
print.
To stop the test print, first pause the print and then press the
The setting items are as follows:
460
button.
button again to pause the
Label Width
Shows the necessary media width of the test print.
The necessary media width is 101.6 mm (4") for [Large] and 50.8 mm (2") for [Small].
Label Length
Set the length of one piece of the media used for the test print.
The setting range varies depending on the print resolution of the printer.
The setting range is as follows:
Resolution
CL4NX
CL6NX
203 dpi
400 to 1600 dots
400 to 1600 dots
600 to 2400 dots
600 to 2400 dots
1200 to 4800 dots
-
(1 dot = 0.125 mm
(0.0049"))
305 dpi
(1 dot = 0.083 mm
(0.0033"))
609 dpi
(1 dot = 0.042 mm
(0.0017"))
Pitch
Set the print position in the vertical direction.
The setting range varies depending on the print resolution of the printer.
The setting range is as follows:
Resolution
CL4NX
CL6NX
203 dpi
-30 to 0 to 30 dots
-30 to 0 to 30 dots
-45 to 0 to 45 dots
-45 to 0 to 45 dots
-90 to 0 to 90 dots
-
(1 dot = 0.125 mm
(0.0049"))
305 dpi
(1 dot = 0.083 mm
(0.0033"))
609 dpi
(1 dot = 0.042 mm
(0.0017"))
When you decrease the setting value, the print position moves in the feed direction (toward the
front part of the media).
When you increase the setting value, the print position moves opposite the feed direction (toward
the end part of the media).
461
[HEX-Dump]
Offset
Set the stop position of the media.
The setting range varies depending on the print resolution of the printer.
The setting range is as follows:
Resolution
CL4NX
CL6NX
203 dpi
-30 to 0 to 30 dots
-30 to 0 to 30 dots
-45 to 0 to 45 dots
-45 to 0 to 45 dots
-90 to 0 to 90 dots
-
(1 dot = 0.125 mm
(0.0049"))
305 dpi
(1 dot = 0.083 mm
(0.0033"))
609 dpi
(1 dot = 0.042 mm
(0.0017"))
When you decrease the setting value, the stop position moves in the feed direction (toward the
front part of the media).
When you increase the setting value, the stop position moves opposite the feed direction (toward
the end part of the media).
Darkness Adjust
Fine tune the print darkness of the test print.
0 is the lightest and 99 is the darkest.
•
The value of [Label Length], [Pitch], [Offset] and [Darkness Adjust] set in the [Paper
Sensor] will be reflected to the same item settings in the [Factory] menu, [Configure
List] menu and [Configure QR] menu.
[HEX-Dump]
462
Save the hex dump print data or dump data from the receive buffer to the USB memory.
The setting items are as follows:
Hex Dump Mode
Enable or disable the Hex Dump mode.
Buffer Dump
Save the receive buffer data to the printer.
Log Files
Manage the log files of the printer.
[Hex Dump Mode]
Enable or disable the Hex Dump mode.
If you set the [Hex Dump Mode] to [Enabled], the printer prints the received data and at the same time
creates a file of the received data inside "hexdump/".
When you return the setting to [Disabled], you can check the file on the screen.
463
[HEX-Dump]
•
If you set the [Hex Dump Mode] to [Enabled], the design of the Online/Offline screen
changes.
•
You can save a maximum of 10 received data files for each type of interface.
Depending on the file size, the number of files you can save will be less than 10.
•
The details of the files created inside "hexdump/" of the printer are as follows:
BT00xx.bin
Received data through Bluetooth.
LAN00xx.bin
Received data through LAN.
LPT00xx.bin
Received data through IEEE1284.
NFC00xx.bin
Received data through NFC.
PIPE00xx.bin
Received data through pipe.
SCI00xx.bin
Received data through RS-232C.
USB00xx.bin
Received data through USB.
WIFI00xx.bin
Received data through wireless LAN.
[Buffer Dump]
Save the receive buffer data to the printer.
Available only if you have set to [Disabled] in the [Hex Dump Mode] menu.
Press the [START] button (
button) on the startup screen to save the data to the printer.
Save the receive buffer data to "buff/" in the printer.
464
•
The data files of the receive buffer are created for each type of interface.
•
The details of the file created inside "buff/" of the printer are as follows:
BT0001.bin
The contents of the receive buffer for Bluetooth.
LAN0001.bin
The contents of the receive buffer for LAN.
LPT0001.bin
The contents of the receive buffer for IEEE1284.
NFC0001.bin
The contents of the receive buffer for NFC.
PIPE0001.bin
The contents of the receive buffer for pipe.
SCI0001.bin
The contents of the receive buffer for RS-232C.
USB0001.bin
The contents of the receive buffer for USB.
WIFI0001.bin
The contents of the receive buffer for wireless LAN.
•
If you perform the [Buffer Dump] again, the existing file will be overwritten.
[Log Files]
The setting items are as follows:
Copy
Copy the log files of the printer to the USB memory.
◦
Available only if you have installed the USB memory.
465
[HEX-Dump]
Remove
Delete the log files of the printer.
Print
Print a hex dump of the log files of the printer.
[Copy]
Copy the log files of the printer to the USB memory.
Available only if you have installed the USB memory.
•
Be sure to perform a virus check on the USB memory before connecting it to the
printer. SATO Corporation shall not be held responsible for any printer malfunctions
caused by a virus spread via USB memory.
The procedure to copy the log files is as follows:
1. Select the file type to copy and press the
◦
button.
buff/
The buffer data saved after you perform the [Buffer Dump].
◦
hexdump/
The received data created through [Hex Dump Mode].
466
2. Select the file to copy and press the
file name.
button. A checkmark appears on the right side of the
3. After you select the file, press the
button to copy the selected file to the USB memory.
•
When [Hex Dump Mode] is set to [Enabled], it may take some time before the files
appear.
[Remove]
Delete the log files of the printer.
The procedure to delete the log files is as follows:
1. Select the file type to delete and press the
◦
button.
buff/
The buffer data saved after you perform the [Buffer Dump].
◦
hexdump/
The received data created through [Hex Dump Mode].
467
[HEX-Dump]
2. Select the file to delete and press the
file name.
3. After you select the file, press the
•
button. A checkmark appears on the right side of the
button to delete the selected file.
When [Hex Dump Mode] is set to [Enabled], it may take some time before the files
appear.
[Print]
Print a hex dump of the log files of the printer.
The procedure to print the log files is as follows:
1. Select the file type to print and press the
◦
button.
buff/
The buffer data saved after you perform the [Buffer Dump].
◦
hexdump/
The received data created through [Hex Dump Mode].
468
2. Select the file to print and press the
button or
•
Printing the contents of the file may use a lot of media.
•
When [Hex Dump Mode] is set to [Enabled], it may take some time before the files
appear.
[Reset]
Initialize the data and setting values of the printer.
Press
button to perform the dump print.
button to show the [Select] menu.
469
[Reset]
[Select]
Select the items to be initialized.
The items are as follows:
Data
Initialize the data saved in the printer.
Data & Settings
Initialize the data and setting values of the printer.
Settings
Initialize the setting values of the printer.
[Data]
Initialize the data saved in the printer.
The data to be initialized are the fonts and graphics registered in the printer.
When you select [Data], the confirmation screen appears.
Press the
button to cancel or
button to perform the initialization.
The printer will reboot after the initialization.
470
•
Normally, it is not necessary to perform the initialization. Doing so could change the
print conditions.
[Data & Settings]
Initialize the data and setting values of the printer.
Select the items to be initialized.
The options are as follows:
User Reset
Initialize the data and setting values.
User Reset (-Interface)
Initialize the data and setting values, except the [Interface] menu.
Factory Reset
Initialize to the status of the factory shipment.
Factory Reset (-Interface)
Initialize to the status of the factory shipment, except the items in the [Interface] menu.
Interface
Initialize the data and setting values in the [Interface] menu.
Printing
Initialize the data and setting values in the [Printing] menu.
471
[Reset]
Select the item to be initialized using the
show the confirmation screen.
Press the
/
button to cancel or
buttons and then press the
button to
button to perform the initialization.
The printer will reboot after the initialization.
•
The data to be initialized are the fonts and graphics registered in the printer.
[Settings]
Select the items to be initialized.
The options are as follows:
User Reset
Initialize the setting values.
User Reset (-Interface)
Initialize the setting values, except the [Interface] menu.
Factory Reset
Initialize to the status of the factory shipment.
Factory Reset (-Interface)
Initialize to the status of the factory shipment, except the items in the [Interface] menu.
472
Interface
Initialize the setting values in the [Interface] menu.
Printing
Initialize the setting values in the [Printing] menu.
Select the item to be initialized using the
show the confirmation screen.
Press the
button to cancel or
/
buttons and then press the
button to
button to perform the initialization.
After initialization, if a message prompting you to restart the printer appears on the Online/Offline
screen, reboot the printer to apply the settings.
[Profiles]
Maintain the customized profile of the printer settings.
The name of the last loaded profile appears in the parentheses.
The setting items are as follows:
Delete
Delete the profile of the printer.
473
[Profiles]
◦
Not available if no profile is saved.
Load
Load the profile of the printer.
◦
Not available if no profile is saved.
Save
Save the current printer settings as a new profile.
Start with
Select the profile to load at printer startup.
◦
Not available if no profile is saved.
[Delete]
Delete the profile of the printer.
The procedure to delete the profile is as follows:
1. Select the profile to be deleted using the
2. Press the
button or press the
/
buttons.
button to confirm.
The profile name is deleted from the list.
474
[Load]
Load the profile of the printer.
The procedure to load the profile is as follows:
1. Select the profile to be loaded using the
2. Press the
/
button or press the
buttons.
button to confirm.
A checkmark appears on the right side of the loaded profile name. And the name of the loaded
profile appears on the [Profiles] menu in the parentheses.
[Save]
Save the current printer settings as a new profile.
The screen shows a list of the profiles saved in the printer. If no profile is saved, the screen shows an
empty list.
475
[Profiles]
To save the current printer settings as a new profile, press the
the profile.
button and enter the name of
You can enter a maximum of 32 characters. You can use alphabet (capital and small letters), numbers
and symbols.
Press the
button to confirm.
The new profile name appears on the list and is loaded.
[Start with]
Select the profile to be loaded at printer startup.
The procedure to load the profile at printer startup is as follows:
1. Select the profile to be loaded at printer startup using the
2. Press the
button or press the
/
button to confirm.
476
buttons.
[Certificates]
Install certificates used for Wi-Fi authentication and for HTTPS.
Available only if you have installed the USB memory.
•
Be sure to perform a virus check on the USB memory before connecting it to the
printer. SATO Corporation shall not be held responsible for any printer malfunctions
caused by a virus spread via USB memory.
The setting items are as follows:
HTTPS
Installs the HTTPS certificates from the USB memory.
Wi-Fi Root CA
Installs the Wi-Fi Root CA certificates from the USB memory.
Wi-Fi Client
Installs the Wi-Fi client certificates from the USB memory.
Wi-Fi Private Key
Installs the Wi-Fi private key from the USB memory.
EAP-FAST PAC File
Installs the EAP-FAST PAC file from the USB memory.
The procedure to install the certificates and PAC files is as follows:
1. Save the certificate files to the USB thumb drive memory’s root folder.
Acceptable file extensions are as follows:
◦
.pem, .crt, .cer, .der for Root CA and client certificate in PEM or DER format
◦
.pfx and .p12 for client certificates in PKCS #12 format
◦
.prv and .key for private keys in PEM/PKCS#8 format
◦
.pac for PAC files
477
[Barcode Checker]
2.
3.
4.
5.
Insert the USB memory into the USB connector (Type A).
Go to the [Settings] > [Tools] > [Certificates] menu.
Select the certificate you want to install. Refer to the item description above.
Select the certificate file from the list.
[Barcode Checker]
Set the barcode check function.
By connecting a barcode checker to the printer, you can check the barcodes after printing.
The setting items are as follows:
Test
Set up the barcode checker.
◦
Available only if you have connected the barcode checker.
Settings
Set the barcode check function.
478
•
This function cannot be used in the following conditions:
◦
When the print mode is tear-off mode
◦
When you are using CL4NX RFID models
◦
When the printer is in AEP mode
•
Use the optional barcode checker stand kit to mount the barcode checker to the printer.
For details, refer to the Barcode Checker Stand Kit Installation Manual that came with
the barcode checker stand kit.
[Test]
Set up the barcode checker.
Available only if you have connected the barcode checker.
The setting items are as follows:
Reader Name
Shows the barcode checker connected to the printer.
Reading Test
Perform a test read with the connected barcode checker.
479
[Barcode Checker]
[Reading Test]
Perform a test read with the connected barcode checker.
Available only if you have connected the barcode checker.
Set a label with barcodes within the scanning range of the barcode checker, and then press the
button to start reading.
If reading is successful, the code type and read data are displayed. The data is displayed only up to 23
bytes from the beginning.
If the reading is unsuccessful, or if the displayed read result is not correct, adjust the position of the
barcode checker by operating the barcode checker stand. For details on how to use the barcode
checker stand, refer to the Barcode Checker Stand Kit Installation Manual that came with the barcode
checker stand kit.
480
[Settings]
Set the barcode check function.
The setting items are as follows:
Mode
Select the check mode or disable the barcode check function.
Start Position
Adjust the position at which the barcode check starts (position of the barcode checker at which
reading starts).
VOID Print
Set whether to print error marks on the media when a barcode reading error or barcode
comparison error occurs.
Retry Count
Set how many times the printer will try to print and check the same barcode after VOID printing
when a barcode reading error or barcode comparison error occurs.
◦
Appears only if you have selected [Enabled] in the [VOID Print] menu.
Host Notification
Set whether to return the barcode check results to the host from which the print data is sent.
Logs
Manage the barcode check log data saved in the printer.
481
[Barcode Checker]
[Mode]
Select the check mode or disable the barcode check function.
The options are as follows:
Disabled
Disable the barcode check function.
Readable
Check if the printed barcodes are readable.
Comparison
Check if the read results of the printed barcodes match the barcode data in the print data.
[Start Position]
Adjust the position at which the barcode check starts (position of the barcode checker at which reading
starts).
The barcode checker starts reading each media after the specified length passes from the printing
start position.
482
This setting can be used to exclude first barcode(s) from the check target when multiple barcodes are
printed on each media.
The setting range varies depending on the print resolution of the printer.
The setting range is as follows:
Resolution
CL4NX
CL6NX
203 dpi
10 to 20000 dots
10 to 20000 dots
15 to 18000 dots
15 to 18000 dots
30 to 9600 dots
-
(1 dot = 0.125 mm
(0.0049"))
305 dpi
(1 dot = 0.083 mm
(0.0033"))
609 dpi
(1 dot = 0.042 mm
(0.0017"))
[VOID Print]
Set whether to print error marks on the media when a barcode reading error or barcode comparison
error occurs.
6 x 6 mm (0.24" x 0.24") error marks are printed within the width of the print data image and in a length
of up to 30 mm (1.18") from the trailing end of the label. The length varies depending on the image
length of the print data and the operation mode.
The options are as follows:
483
[Barcode Checker]
Enabled
If a reading error or comparison error occurs, the printer prints error marks on the label without
pausing.
After VOID printing, the printer prints and checks the same label until it reaches the number of
retries specified in [Retry Count]. If the error still occurs after the specified number of retries are
done, the printer pauses after VOID printing, and shows an error message on the display.
Disabled
If a reading error or comparison error occurs, the printer pauses and shows an error message on
the display.
•
Printing of the VOID mark is not supported in dispenser and linerless (CL4NX only)
modes.
[Retry Count]
Set how many times the printer will try to print and check the same barcode after VOID printing when a
barcode reading error or barcode comparison error occurs.
Appears only if you have selected [Enabled] in the [VOID Print] menu.
The setting range is from 0 to 10.
As long as the error continues to occur, the label is reprinted up to the number of times specified in this
setting.
For example, if you set it to 0, if the error occurs while checking the first label, the printer pauses and
shows an error message after VOID printing. If set to 5, if the error continues to occur until the 6th
label, the printer pauses after VOID printing for the 6th label, and shows an error message.
484
[Host Notification]
Set whether to return the barcode check results to the host from which the print data is sent.
The options are as follows:
Enabled
Return the barcode check result of each label to the host as follows:
◦
When the check is successful: <STX>BV, OK<ETX>
◦
When the check is unsuccessful: <STX>BV, NG<ETX>
Disabled
Do not return the barcode check results to the host.
[Logs]
Manage the barcode check log data saved in the printer.
Available only if there is barcode check log data in the printer.
Note that new log data overwrites on older log data when the log file reaches its maximum size (1
MB).
485
[Barcode Checker]
The setting items are as follows:
Copy
Copy the barcode check log data to the USB memory.
◦
Available only if you have installed the USB memory.
Remove
Remove the barcode check log data.
Format and Contents of the Barcode Check Log Data
The barcode check log data is created in the following format:
Format ID
YYYY
MM
DD
hh
mm
ss
ZZZ
TTTTTTT
Description
1
Year of the date when the barcode check was performed
1
Month of the date when the barcode check was performed
1
Day of the date when the barcode check was performed
1
Hour of the time when the barcode check was performed
1
Minute of the time when the barcode check was performed
Second of the time when the barcode check was performed
1
1
Time zone
The total number of printed labels after the printer is powered on.
*When the total number of printed labels becomes greater than an 8-digit
number, the output digit will increase.
IR
The number of read data received after reaching the position at which the
check starts.
*When the check result is "IGNORED", this shows "00".
SRSR
Size of read data (bytes)
drdr...
Read data
RRRRRRR
Check result
SUCCESS
•
In readable mode, this means everything is correct.
•
In comparison mode, this means that the read data and
print data match.
486
Format ID
Description
FAILURE
IGNORED
IC
•
In readable mode, this means that the barcode checker
could not read the number of printed barcode data.
•
In comparison mode, this means that the read data and
print data do not match.
This means that the data is read during a period other
than from the start to the end of checking, while the printer
is active.
The amount of print data as a check target
*If the check result is "IGNORED", this becomes "--".
SCSC
Size of print data (bytes)
*If the check result is "IGNORED", this becomes "----".
dcdc...
Print data
*If the check result is "IGNORED", nothing is output.
1
If the optional RTC kit is not installed, the system time will be output.
[Copy]
Copy the barcode check log data to the USB memory.
Available only if there is barcode check log data in the printer and if you have installed the USB
memory.
•
Press the
Be sure to perform a virus check on the USB memory before connecting it to the
printer. SATO Corporation shall not be held responsible for any printer malfunctions
caused by a virus spread via USB memory.
button to copy the log data to the USB memory.
487
[Clone]
[Remove]
Delete the barcode check log file.
Available only if there is barcode check log data in the printer.
Press the
button to delete the log data.
[Clone]
Copy the current printer settings and installed data to the USB memory.
Available only if you have installed the USB memory.
•
Be sure to perform a virus check on the USB memory before connecting it to the
printer. SATO Corporation shall not be held responsible for any printer malfunctions
caused by a virus spread via USB memory.
This functions is useful when you take over the printer settings to be replaced to a new printer, and
when you set up multiple printers with same printer settings.
The options are as follows:
488
Excl. LAN/Wi-Fi/IP
Copy the printer settings and data, excluding network information, to the USB memory. This is
useful when you set up multiple printers already configured for network with the same printer
settings.
Incl. LAN/Wi-Fi
Copy the printer settings and data, including network information (excluding the IP address), to
the USB memory. This is useful when you set up multiple printers to be connected to the same
network with the same printer settings.
Incl. LAN/Wi-Fi/IP
Copy the printer settings and data, including network information (with the IP address), to the USB
memory. This is useful when carrying the settings of the printer to be replaced to a new printer.
[Startup Guide]
Enable or disable the startup guide.
The options are as follows:
Enabled
Enable the startup guide.
Disabled
Disable the startup guide.
If you have selected [Enabled], the startup guide appears when you power on the printer.
489
[Information] Menu
[Information] Menu
The following settings are available in the [Information] menu:
Help
Shows the guidance video.
Build Version
Shows the firmware version.
Applications
Shows various application versions.
Installation Log
Shows the installation log data.
◦
Appears only if there is a log data in the printer.
Print Module
Shows the print module information.
Counters
Shows the counter information.
IPv4 Address
Shows the IPv4 address.
IPv6 Address
Shows the IPv6 address.
◦
Does not appear when Wi-Fi Direct is active.
LAN MAC
Shows the MAC address of the LAN.
490
◦
Appears only if the LAN interface is selected.
Wi-Fi MAC
Shows the MAC address of the wireless LAN.
◦
Appears only if the optional wireless LAN is installed and the Wi-Fi interface is selected.
Wi-Fi Region
Shows the region information of the wireless LAN.
◦
Appears only if the optional wireless LAN is installed and the Wi-Fi interface is selected.
Wi-Fi Status
Shows the status of the wireless LAN.
◦
Appears only if the optional wireless LAN is installed and the Wi-Fi interface is selected.
Wi-Fi Direct
Shows the connection information of Wi-Fi Direct.
◦
Appears only if connected using Wi-Fi Direct.
Wi-Fi Versions
Shows the version of the wireless LAN.
◦
Appears only if the optional wireless LAN is installed and the Wi-Fi interface is selected.
[Help]
Shows the guidance video.
You can view the video for loading the media and ribbon, the cleaning method and replacement
method of consumables.
491
[Help]
The list of videos are as follows:
Install Paper
Shows the video for loading the media.
Install Ribbon
Shows the video for loading the ribbon.
Replace Paper
Shows the video for replacing the media.
Replace Ribbon
Shows the video for replacing the ribbon.
Replace Head
Shows the video for replacing the print head.
Replace Platen
Shows the video for replacing the platen roller.
Cleaning
Shows the video of the cleaning method.
[Install Paper]
Shows the video for loading the media.
The items are as follows:
Roll
Shows the video for loading the media roll.
Fanfold
Shows the video for loading the fan-fold media.
492
[Roll]
Shows the video for loading the media roll.
The items are as follows:
Standard
Shows the video for loading the media roll to a standard printer.
Cutter
Shows the video for loading the media roll to a printer installed with a cutter.
Linerless
(CL4NX only)
Shows the video for loading the media roll to a printer installed with a linerless cutter kit.
Dispenser
Shows the video for loading the media roll to a printer installed with a dispenser.
Dispenser with Rewinder
Shows the video for loading the media roll to a printer installed with a dispenser and liner
rewinder.
[Fanfold]
493
[Help]
Shows the video for loading the fan-fold media.
The items are as follows:
Standard
Shows the video for loading the fan-fold media to a standard printer.
Cutter
Shows the video for loading the fan-fold media to a printer installed with a cutter.
[Replace Paper]
Shows the video for replacing the media.
The items are as follows:
Roll
Shows the video for replacing the media roll.
Fanfold
Shows the video for replacing the fan-fold media.
[Roll]
494
Shows the video for replacing the media roll.
The items are as follows:
Standard
Shows the video for replacing the media roll in a standard printer.
Cutter
Shows the video for replacing the media roll in a printer installed with a cutter.
Linerless
(CL4NX only)
Shows the video for replacing the media roll in a printer installed with a linerless cutter kit.
Dispenser
Shows the video for replacing the media roll in a printer installed with a dispenser.
Dispenser with Rewinder
Shows the video for replacing the media roll in a printer installed with a dispenser and liner
rewinder.
[Fanfold]
Shows the video for replacing the fan-fold media.
The items are as follows:
Standard
Shows the video for replacing the fan-fold media in a standard printer.
Cutter
Shows the video for replacing the fan-fold media in a printer installed with a cutter.
495
[Build Version]
[Build Version]
Shows the information and version of the printer.
Name
Shows the name of the build version.
Date
Shows the build date.
Checksum
Shows the checksum of the build version.
Kernel Version
Shows the kernel version.
Boot Version
Shows the boot version.
[Kernel Version]
Shows the kernel version of the printer.
496
[Boot Version]
Shows the boot version of the printer.
The items are as follows:
Disks
Shows the Disks.
Warp!!-mode
A checked box means enabled. An unchecked box means disabled.
Date
Shows the build date of the boot version.
[Applications]
Shows the versions of the installed applications in the printer, such as printer languages.
497
[Installation Log]
[Installation Log]
Show or clear the installation log data in the printer.
The setting items are as follows:
RPM log
Shows the RPM log data.
System Restore
Shows the system restore log data.
Press the
button (CLEAR) to clear the selected log data.
•
This screen does not appear if there is no log data in the printer.
[RPM log]
Shows a list of RPM log files containing three sections: installed, updated and obsolete.
The RPM log file is created after installing a pkg-file containing rpm-files.
498
[System Restore]
Shows the system restore log.
The system restore log file is created after installing a pkg-file that incurs the inability to operate the
printer LCD.
[Print Module]
Shows the information about the print module of the printer.
The items are as follows:
Boot
Shows the Boot firmware version.
Main
Shows the Main firmware version.
499
[Print Module]
[Boot]
Name
Shows the Boot firmware version.
Release Date
Shows the Boot firmware release date.
Checksum
Shows the Boot firmware checksum.
[Main]
Name
Shows the Main firmware version.
Release Date
Shows the Main firmware release date.
Checksum
Shows the Main firmware checksum.
500
[Counters]
Shows the counter information of the printer.
The setting items are as follows:
Head
Shows the head counter information of the printer.
Cutter
Shows the current number of cuts.
•
Only SATO authorized service personnel are permitted to clear the counter.
[Head]
Shows the head counter information of the printer.
Life
Shows the current print distance.
Head 1
501
[IPv6 Address]
Head 2
Head 3
[Head 1] shows the current print distance. When you replace the print head and the counter is
cleared, the value of [Head 2] appears in [Head 3] and the value of [Head 1] appears in [Head 2].
[Head 1] will start to count from 0 again.
[IPv4 Address]
Shows the IPv4 address.
[IPv6 Address]
Shows the IPv6 address.
•
When Wi-Fi Direct is active, this IPv6 address screen does not appear.
502
[LAN MAC]
Shows the MAC address of the LAN.
Appears only if LAN is the active interface.
[Wi-Fi MAC]
Shows the MAC address of the wireless LAN.
Appears only if you have installed the optional wireless LAN and Wi-Fi is the active interface.
503
[Wi-Fi Status]
[Wi-Fi Region]
Shows the region information of the wireless LAN.
Appears only if you have installed the optional wireless LAN and Wi-Fi is the active interface.
[Wi-Fi Status]
Shows the status of the wireless LAN.
Appears only if you have installed the optional wireless LAN and Wi-Fi is the active interface.
504
[Wi-Fi Direct]
Shows the connection information of Wi-Fi Direct.
Appears only if Wi-Fi Direct is the active interface and you are connected using Wi-Fi Direct.
[Wi-Fi Versions]
Shows the version of the wireless LAN.
Appears only if you have installed the optional wireless LAN and Wi-Fi is the active interface.
505
Accessing to the Web Configuration Page
Configuring the Printer Settings from a Web Browser
Accessing to the Web Configuration Page
The printer can be operated through a web configuration page using any browser.
With an Ethernet LAN or WLAN connection, users can remotely get information from the printer or
perform the printer settings.
•
You need the printer IP address to access the web configuration page. The printer IP
address can be checked in [Settings] > [Information] > [IPv4 Address].
1. Open up the browser and enter the printer URL.
If the printer IP address is 192.168.143.123, enter the following URL: https://192.168.143.123
When a security certificate is prompted, you must acknowledge and click Continue.
The web configuration page appears. On the upper right (1) of each page, the model name, current
resolution and MAC address are shown.
2. Log in to view [Settings] and [Tools] pages.
You can view [Dashboard] and [Certificates] pages without logging in.
a. Click [Login] (2).
b. Select [settings] for the user, enter the password, and click [Login].
The default user is [settings], and the default password is "0310".
506
3. Click on the page (3) you want to view.
507
Dashboard
Dashboard
[Dashboard] is the default page of WebConfig. Each section shows specific information or status of the
printer.
•
You can view [Dashboard] page without logging in.
(1) [Printer Status]
Shows the current state (Online, Offline, error) and current status icons.
(2) [Printing]
Shows the print speed, darkness, sensor, print mode and backfeed setting.
(3) [Device]
Shows the model, current resolution and options that are installed.
(4) [Network]
Shows the current IP address and MAC address of the active interface.
(5) [System]
Shows the current firmware version, uptime, SNMP contact, name and location.
(6) [Wi-Fi]
Shows the current Wi-Fi setting.
•
This information is shown only if Wi-Fi is available and active.
508
(7) [Wi-Fi Strength]
Shows the current Wi-Fi communication strength.
•
If the printer is P2P GO, the Wi-Fi Strength will not be shown.
509
Settings
Settings
The settings equivalent to the printer's Settings mode can be performed on the browser.
•
Login is required to view [Settings] page. Click [Login] to log in before opening
[Settings] page.
The default user is [settings], and the default password is "0310".
(1) [Printing]
You can do the settings equivalent to [Settings] > [Printing] in the Settings mode.
(2) [Interface]
You can do the settings equivalent to [Settings] > [Interface] in the Settings mode.
(3) [Applications]
You can do the settings equivalent to [Settings] > [Applications] in the Settings mode.
(4) [System]
You can do the settings equivalent to [Settings] > [System] in the Settings mode.
(5) [Tools]
You can do the settings equivalent to [Settings] > [Tools] in the Settings mode.
(6) [Information]
You can do the settings equivalent to [Settings] > [Information] in the Settings mode.
510
The screen below is the example of [Printing] page.
511
Tools
Tools
Various settings and operations can be performed in this page: installing certificates for authentication,
checking the log, and test printing.
•
Login is required to view [Tools] page. Click [Login] to log in before opening [Tools]
page.
The default user is [settings], and the default password is "0310".
(1) [Upload]
You can do the setting equivalent to [Settings] > [Tools] > [Certificates] in the Settings mode.
Install certificates used for Wi-Fi authentication and for HTTPS.
Click [Browse] of the certificate you want to install.
Select the certificate file from the list and click [Upload], and the authentication file will be
installed.
(2) [Clone]
You can do the setting equivalent to [Settings] > [Tools] > [Clone] in the Settings mode. Copy the
current printer settings and the installed data.
(3) [Install Package]
Refer to "Section 2.5 Downloading Firmware" of the CL4NX/CL6NX service manual.
(4) [Logs]
List all log files in the log directory. Users can click to download the file.
(5) [Reset]
You can do the setting equivalent to [Settings] > [Tools] > [Reset] in the Settings mode. Initialize
the settings or counter of the printer.
(6) [Passwords]
You can do the setting equivalent to [Settings] > [System] > [Password] > [Change Password] in
the Settings mode. Change each password of the printer.
512
(7) [Test Print]
You can do the setting equivalent to [Settings] > [Tools] > [Test Print] in the Settings mode.
Perform a test print.
(8) [Support Info]
List various information of the printer such as attached options, serial number, application
versions and settings configuration. You can also get a screenshot of the current printer display
and an image of the last printout.
(9) [Reboot]
Reboot the printer.
513
Certificates
Certificates
Shows the Root Certificate authority and client certificates installed on the printer.
•
The client certificate that is a PFX (PKCS #12) file will not be shown.
514
Various Ways to Output
Outputting with General-purpose Software
If you use software such as the "NiceLabel" series, labels can be easily output.
•
"NiceLabel" series
This multifunctional, yet easy-to-operate, software allows you to create versatile layouts and print
them on labels.
•
For details of the products, contact your SATO sales representative.
515
Outputting and Controlling with Dedicated Command
Outputting and Controlling with Dedicated Command
A variety of labels and tags can be printed from simple formats to complex formats by sending the
SBPL (Sato Barcode Printer Language) command to the printer.
In addition, you can print characters, barcodes, and graphics in various styles by combining multiple
SBPL commands. There are many functions for modifying the printed items, such as enlarging fonts,
specifying a print direction, ruled line, and printing the background black or white.
For programming references, contact your SATO sales representative or technical support center.
516
Controlling the Printer with External Signal
By using the external signal (EXT) interface, you can connect the printer to an external device and
print. With the control signal, you can control print operations; such as monitoring the condition of the
printer, starting printing, and reprinting.
517
Printable Area
Printer Adjustments
Printable Area
The printable area of the printer is as follows:
CL4NX
(1) Frame
(2) Print head
(3) Media feed direction
(4) Printable area (Standard)
(5) Printable area (Left-justify)
CL6NX
•
203 dpi
(1) Frame
(2) Print head
(3) Media feed direction
(4) Printable area (Standard)
(5) Printable area (Left-justify)
518
•
305 dpi
(1) Frame
(2) Print head
(3) Media feed direction
(4) Printable area (Standard)
(5) Printable area (Left-justify)
519
Media Sensor Positions and Media Stop Positions
Media Sensor Positions and Media Stop Positions
The media stop positions with the media sensor and various operation modes are as follows:
(1) Media stop position in dispenser mode
(2) Media stop position in cutter mode
(3) Media stop position in tear-off mode
(4) Print head
(5) Media feed direction
(6) Gap sensor
(7) I-mark sensor
520
(8) Frame
•
For the CL4NX RFID model, the position of the I-mark sensor becomes a minimum
of 0.3 mm (0.01") when the position of the gap sensor is adjusted to around 7.3 mm
(0.3"). Because of this, the paper end may be frequently detected when the [Advanced]
> [Paper End] of the [Printing] menu is set to [Using I-mark] (the default), due to the
shifting of the media or other causes. When you have adjusted the position of the Gap
sensor to around 7.3 mm (0.3"), change [Paper End] to [Using Gap].
521
Printing Operations
Flow of Printing Operations
Printing Operations
Printing operations vary depending on the combination of the following settings.
•
Print Mode
•
Enabled/disabled media sensor
•
With/without pulse input (from external signal (EXT) interface)
•
Enabled/disabled head check
522
Operations in Continuous Mode
Operation 1: Continuous Mode Without Pulse Input (Head Check Disabled)
Operation
•
The figure above shows the reference position when the Gap sensor is used.
Timing Chart
523
Operation 2: Continuous Mode Without Pulse Input (Head Check Enabled)
Operation
•
The figure above shows the reference position when the Gap sensor is used.
Timing Chart
524
Operation 3: Continuous Mode with Pulse Input (Head Check Disabled)
Operation
•
The figure above shows the reference position when the Gap sensor is used.
Timing Chart
*1 Keep the PRIN signal until the PREND signal is outputted.
525
Operation 4: Continuous Mode with Pulse Input (Head Check Enabled)
Operation
•
The figure above shows the reference position when the Gap sensor is used.
Timing Chart
*1 Keep the PRIN signal until the PREND signal is outputted.
526
Operations in Tear-Off Mode
Operation 5: Tear-Off Mode Without Pulse Input (Head Check Disabled)
Operation
*1 After printing, if the period specified in Option Waiting Time <TW> (initial value: 0 ms) has passed
and if there is no print data remaining, the printer will feed the media to the position for manual cutting.
•
The figure above shows the reference position when the Gap sensor is used.
527
Operations in Tear-Off Mode
Timing Chart (When <TW> is 0)
Timing Chart (When <TW> is 500)
528
Operation 6: Tear-Off Mode Without Pulse Input (Head Check Enabled)
Operation
*1 After printing, if the period specified in Option Waiting Time <TW> (initial value: 0 ms) has passed
and if there is no print data remaining, the printer will feed the media to the position for manual cutting.
•
The figure above shows the reference position when the Gap sensor is used.
529
Timing Chart (When <TW> is 0)
Timing Chart (When <TW> is 500)
530
Operation 7: Tear-Off Mode with Pulse Input (Head Check Disabled)
Operation
•
The figure above shows the reference position when the Gap sensor is used.
Timing Chart
*1 Keep the PRIN signal until the PREND signal is outputted.
531
Operation 8: Tear-Off Mode with Pulse Input (Head Check Enabled)
Operation
•
The figure above shows the reference position when the Gap sensor is used.
Timing Chart
*1 Keep the PRIN signal until the PREND signal is outputted.
532
Operations in Cutter Mode
Operation 9: Cutter Mode, No Backfeed, and Without Pulse Input (Head Check
Disabled)
Operation
*1 Because backfeeding is not done, the media in the head area becomes non-printable.
•
The figure above shows the reference position when the Gap sensor is used.
533
Operations in Cutter Mode
Timing Chart
534
Operation 10: Cutter Mode, No Backfeed, and Without Pulse Input (Head Check
Enabled)
Operation
*1 Because backfeeding is not done, the media in the head area becomes non-printable.
•
The figure above shows the reference position when the Gap sensor is used.
Timing Chart
535
Operation 11: Cutter Mode, Backfeed After Printing, and Without Pulse Input (Head
Check Disabled)
Operation
•
The figure above shows the reference position when the Gap sensor is used.
Timing Chart
536
Operation 12: Cutter Mode, Backfeed After Printing, and Without Pulse Input (Head
Check Enabled)
Operation
•
The figure above shows the reference position when the Gap sensor is used.
Timing Chart
537
Operation 13: Cutter Mode, Backfeed Before Printing, and Without Pulse Input (Head
Check Disabled)
Operation
•
The figure above shows the reference position when the Gap sensor is used.
Timing Chart
538
Operation 14: Cutter Mode, Backfeed Before Printing, and Without Pulse Input (Head
Check Enabled)
Operation
•
The figure above shows the reference position when the Gap sensor is used.
Timing Chart
539
Operation 15: Cut & Print Mode Without Pulse Input (Head Check Disabled)
Operation
*1 After printing, if the next data is received, printing will be done and the media will be cut on the cut
position.
*2 After printing, if the next data is not received and the waiting period for Eject Cut has passed, Eject
Cut will be performed.
•
The figure above shows the reference position when the Gap sensor is used.
540
Timing Chart
541
Operation 16: Cut & Print Mode Without Pulse Input (Head Check Enabled)
Operation
*1 After printing, if the next data is received, printing will be done and the media will be cut on the cut
position.
*2 After printing, if the next data is not received and the waiting period for Eject Cut has passed, Eject
Cut will be performed.
•
The figure above shows the reference position when the Gap sensor is used.
542
Timing Chart
543
Operation 17: Cutter Mode, No Backfeed, and with Pulse Input (Head Check
Disabled)
Operation
*1 Because backfeeding is not done, the media in this area is not printable.
•
The figure above shows the reference position when the Gap sensor is used.
Timing Chart
*1 Keep the PRIN signal until the PREND signal is outputted.
544
Operation 18: Cutter Mode, No Backfeed, and with Pulse Input (Head Check
Enabled)
Operation
*1 Because backfeeding is not done, the media in this area is not printable.
•
The figure above shows the reference position when the Gap sensor is used.
Timing Chart
*1 Keep the PRIN signal until the PREND signal is outputted.
545
Operation 19: Cutter Mode, Backfeed After Printing, and with Pulse Input (Head
Check Disabled)
Operation
•
The figure above shows the reference position when the Gap sensor is used.
Timing Chart
*1 Keep the PRIN signal until the PREND signal is outputted.
546
Operation 20: Cutter Mode, Backfeed After Printing, and with Pulse Input (Head
Check Enabled)
Operation
•
The figure above shows the reference position when the Gap sensor is used.
Timing Chart
*1 Keep the PRIN signal until the PREND signal is outputted.
547
Operation 21: Cutter Mode, Backfeed Before Printing, and with Pulse Input (Head
Check Disabled)
Operation
•
The figure above shows the reference position when the Gap sensor is used.
Timing Chart
*1 Keep the PRIN signal until the PREND signal is outputted.
548
Operation 22: Cutter Mode, Backfeed Before Printing, and with Pulse Input (Head
Check Enabled)
Operation
•
The figure above shows the reference position when the Gap sensor is used.
Timing Chart
*1 Keep the PRIN signal until the PREND signal is outputted.
549
Operations in Dispenser Mode
Operations in Dispenser Mode
Operation 23: Dispenser Mode, No Backfeed, and with Sensor Input (Head Check
Disabled)
Operation
*1 The dispenser sensor confirms the dispensing condition and the printer does not perform the next
operation until the label is dispensed.
*2 Because backfeeding is not done, the media in this area is non-printable.
•
The figure above shows the reference position when the Gap sensor is used.
Timing Chart
550
Operation 24: Dispenser Mode, No Backfeed, and with Sensor Input (Head Check
Enabled)
Operation
*1 The dispenser sensor confirms the dispensing condition and the printer does not perform the next
operation until the label is dispensed.
*2 Because backfeeding is not done, the media in this area is non-printable.
•
The figure above shows the reference position when the Gap sensor is used.
Timing Chart
551
Operation 25: Dispenser Mode, Backfeed After Printing, and Without Pulse Input
(Head Check Disabled)
Operation
*1 The dispenser sensor confirms the dispensing condition and the printer does not perform the next
operation until the label is dispensed.
•
The figure above shows the reference position when the Gap sensor is used.
Timing Chart
552
Operation 26: Dispenser Mode, Backfeed After Printing, and Without Pulse Input
(Head Check Enabled)
Operation
*1 The dispenser sensor confirms the dispensing condition and the printer does not perform the next
operation until the label is dispensed.
•
The figure above shows the reference position when the Gap sensor is used.
Timing Chart
553
Operation 27: Dispenser Mode, Backfeed Before Printing, and Without Pulse Input
(Head Check Disabled)
Operation
*1 The dispenser sensor confirms the dispensing condition and the printer does not perform the next
operation until the label is dispensed.
•
The figure above shows the reference position when the Gap sensor is used.
Timing Chart
554
Operation 28: Dispenser Mode, Backfeed Before Printing, and Without Pulse Input
(Head Check Enabled)
Operation
*1 The dispenser sensor confirms the dispensing condition and the printer does not perform the next
operation until the label is dispensed.
•
The figure above shows the reference position when the Gap sensor is used.
Timing Chart
555
Operation 29: Dispenser Mode, No Backfeed, and with Pulse Input (Head Check
Disabled)
Operation
*1 Because backfeeding is not done, the media in this area is non-printable.
•
The figure above shows the reference position when the Gap sensor is used.
Timing Chart
*1 Keep the PRIN signal until the PREND signal is outputted.
556
Operation 30: Dispenser Mode, No Backfeed, and with Pulse Input (Head Check
Enabled)
Operation
*1 Because backfeeding is not done, the media in this area is non-printable.
•
The figure above shows the reference position when the Gap sensor is used.
Timing Chart
*1 Keep the PRIN signal until the PREND signal is outputted.
557
Operation 31: Dispenser Mode, Backfeed After Printing, and with Pulse Input (Head
Check Disabled)
Operation
•
The figure above shows the reference position when the Gap sensor is used.
Timing Chart
*1 Keep the PRIN signal until the PREND signal is outputted.
558
Operation 32: Dispenser Mode, Backfeed After Printing, and with Pulse Input (Head
Check Enabled)
Operation
•
The figure above shows the reference position when the Gap sensor is used.
Timing Chart
*1 Keep the PRIN signal until the PREND signal is outputted.
559
Operation 33: Dispenser Mode, Backfeed Before Printing, and with Pulse Input
(Head Check Disabled)
Operation
Timing Chart
*1 Keep the PRIN signal until the PREND signal is outputted.
560
Operation 34: Dispenser Mode, Backfeed Before Printing, and with Pulse Input
(Head Check Enabled)
Operation
Timing Chart
*1 Keep the PRIN signal until the PREND signal is outputted.
561
Operation 35: Dispenser Mode, Backfeed After Printing, with Pulse Input, and with
the Dispenser Completion Signal (Head Check Disabled)
Operation
*1 The dispenser sensor confirms the dispensing condition and the printer does not perform the next
operation until the label is dispensed.
Timing Chart
562
*1 Keep the PRIN signal until the PREND signal is outputted.
*2 After backfeed, the PREND signal is outputted.
563
Operation 36: Dispenser Mode, Backfeed After Printing, with Pulse Input, and with
the Dispenser Completion Signal (Head Check Enabled)
Operation
*1 The dispenser sensor confirms the dispensing condition and the printer does not perform the next
operation until the label is dispensed.
Timing Chart
*1 Keep the PRIN signal until the PREND signal is outputted.
564
*2 After backfeed, the PREND signal is outputted.
565
Operation 37: Dispenser Mode, Backfeed Before Printing, with Pulse Input, and with
the Dispenser Completion Signal (Head Check Disabled)
Operation
*1 The dispenser sensor confirms the dispensing condition and the printer does not perform the next
operation until the label is dispensed.
Timing Chart
*1 Keep the PRIN signal until the PREND signal is outputted.
566
Operation 38: Dispenser Mode, Backfeed Before Printing, with Pulse Input, and with
the Dispenser Completion Signal (Head Check Enabled)
Operation
*1 The dispenser sensor confirms the dispensing condition and the printer does not perform the next
operation until the label is dispensed.
Timing Chart
*1 Keep the PRIN signal until the PREND signal is outputted.
567
Operations in Linerless Mode (CL4NX only)
Operations in Linerless Mode (CL4NX only)
Operation 39: Linerless Mode, Backfeed Before Printing, and Without Pulse Input
(Head Check Disabled) (CL4NX only)
Operation
*1 The dispenser sensor confirms the dispensing condition and the printer does not perform the next
operation until the label is dispensed.
*2 The backfeed speed becomes 2 inches/sec immediately after powering on the printer, immediately
after backing from the sleep mode, or after 60 minutes or more from the last printing.
•
The figure above shows the reference position when the I-mark sensor is used.
568
Timing Chart
569
Operation 40: Linerless Mode, Backfeed Before Printing, and Without Pulse Input
(Head Check Enabled) (CL4NX only)
Operation
*1 The dispenser sensor confirms the dispensing condition and the printer does not perform the next
operation until the label is dispensed.
*2 The backfeed speed becomes 2 inches/sec immediately after powering on the printer, immediately
after backing from the sleep mode, or after 60 minutes or more from the last printing.
•
The figure above shows the reference position when the I-mark sensor is used.
570
Timing Chart
571
Operation 41: Linerless Mode, Backfeed Before Printing, and with Pulse Input (Head
Check Disabled) (CL4NX only)
Operation
•
The figure above shows the reference position when the I-mark sensor is used.
Timing Chart
*1 Keep the PRIN signal until the PREND signal is outputted.
572
Operation 42: Linerless Mode, Backfeed Before Printing, and with Pulse Input (Head
Check Enabled) (CL4NX only)
Operation
•
The figure above shows the reference position when the I-mark sensor is used.
Timing Chart
*1 Keep the PRIN signal until the PREND signal is outputted.
573
Operations for RFID Write (CL4NX only)
Operations for RFID Write (CL4NX only)
Operation 43: RFID Write with Continuous Mode (Tag Offset = 0) (CL4NX only)
*1 The EPC code write <IP0> and RFID write <RK> commands write the data at this tag position.
The EPC code read, RFID read [DC2]PJ, UID/EPC/IDm print <TU>, and UID/EPC/IDm return <RU>
commands acquire the information at this tag position.
574
Operation 44: RFID Write with Continuous Mode (Tag Offset > 0) (CL4NX only)
*1 Because the EPC code read, RFID read [DC2]PJ, UID/EPC/IDm printing <TU>, and UID/EPC/IDm
return <RU> commands acquire the information at this tag position, do not use them if the Tag Offset
is set to other than an initial value.
*2 The EPC code write <IP0> and RFID write <RK> commands write the data at this tag position.
575
Operation 45: RFID Write with Tear-Off Mode (Tag Offset = 0) (CL4NX only)
When the tear-off mode is selected, the label backfeeds before printing and stops at the manual cut
position after printing.
*1 Because the EPC code read, RFID read [DC2]PJ, UID/EPC/IDm printing <TU>, and UID/EPC/IDm
return <RU> commands acquire the information at this tag position, do not use them if the Tag Offset
is set to other than an initial value.
*2 The EPC code write <IP0> and RFID write <RK> commands write the data at this tag position.
576
Operation 46: RFID Write with Tear-Off Mode (Tag Offset > 0) (CL4NX only)
When the tear-off mode is selected, the label backfeeds before printing and stops at the manual cut
position after printing.
*1 Because the EPC code read, RFID read [DC2]PJ, UID/EPC/IDm printing <TU>, and UID/EPC/IDm
return <RU> commands acquire the information at this tag position, do not use them if the Tag Offset
is set to other than an initial value.
*2 The EPC code write <IP0> and RFID write <RK> commands write the data at this tag position.
577
Operation 47: RFID Write with Cutter Mode and Backfeed After Printing (Tag Offset =
0) (CL4NX only)
When the cutter mode with backfeed after printing is selected, the label backfeeds after the cut and
stops at the print head position.
*1 The EPC code write <IP0> and RFID write <RK> commands write the data at this tag position.
The EPC code read, RFID read [DC2]PJ, UID/EPC/IDm print <TU>, and UID/EPC/IDm return <RU>
commands acquire the information at this tag position.
578
Operation 48: RFID Write with Cutter Mode and Backfeed After Printing (Tag Offset >
0) (CL4NX only)
When the cutter mode is selected, backfeed after printing is automatically set. The label backfeeds
after the cut and stops at the print head position.
*1 Because the EPC code read, RFID read [DC2]PJ, UID/EPC/IDm printing <TU>, and UID/EPC/IDm
return <RU> commands acquire the information at this tag position, do not use them if the Tag Offset
is set to other than an initial value.
*2 The EPC code write <IP0> and RFID write <RK> commands write the data at this tag position.
579
Operations When the Barcode Check Function Is Enabled
Operations When the Barcode Check Function Is Enabled
Operation 49: Continuous Mode When the Barcode Check Function Is Enabled
580
Operation 50: Cutter Mode (Cutting Every Label) When the Barcode Check Function
Is Enabled
581
Operation 51: Cutter Mode (Cutting According to the Specified Number of Labels,
No Cutting) When the Barcode Check Function Is Enabled
582
Operation 52: Cut & Print Mode When the Barcode Check Function Is Enabled
*1 Do not print barcodes/2D codes on the area between the print head and the cut position.
583
Operation 53: Dispenser Mode When the Barcode Check Function Is Enabled
584
Operations When the Media Sensor Is Disabled
Operation 54: Media Sensor Disabled
When the media sensor is disabled, media stops at the specified print end line.
585
About the Base Reference Point
Adjusting the Base Reference Point
About the Base Reference Point
The base reference point is the point at which one determines the print position and stop/cut/
dispensing position.
The base reference point differs depending on the operation mode or media sensor you use.
Continuous Mode/Tear-off Mode
I-mark Label
Gap Label
(1) Feed direction
(1) Feed direction
(2) Print and stop position
(2) Print and stop position
Cutter Mode
I-mark Label
Gap Label
(1) Feed direction
(1) Feed direction
(2) Cut position
(2) Print and cut position
(3) Print position
586
Dispenser Mode
I-mark Label
Gap Label
(1) Feed direction
(1) Feed direction
(2) Dispensing position
(2) Print and dispensing position
(3) Print position
Linerless Mode (CL4NX only)
I-mark Linerless Label
(1) Feed direction
(2) Cut position
(3) Print position
(4) Non-printable zone (5 mm / 0.2")
587
Adjusting the Print Position
Adjusting the Print Position
Set the [Pitch] in the [Printing] > [Advanced] > [Adjustments] menu to adjust the print position.
•
The above base reference position (print position) becomes the stop position when the
sensor type is set to Gap.
1. When the printer is in Online mode, press the
change to Offline mode.
2. Press the
button on the operator panel to
button to show the [Settings] menu.
588
3. Select [Printing] using the
/
buttons, and then press the
4. Select the [Advanced] > [Adjustments] > [Pitch] menu using the
and then press the
button.
/
buttons,
button.
The [Pitch] screen appears.
5. Change the setting value. Press the
and then press the
/
/
/
buttons to select a number
button to enter the number to the text box.
The setting range is as follows:
Resolution
CL4NX
CL6NX
203 dpi
-30 to +30 dots
-30 to +30 dots
-45 to +45 dots
-45 to +45 dots
-90 to +90 dots
-
(1 dot = 0.125
mm (0.0049"))
305 dpi
(1 dot = 0.083
mm (0.0033"))
609 dpi
589
Adjusting the Print Position
Resolution
CL4NX
CL6NX
(1 dot = 0.042
mm (0.0017"))
6. Press the
button to save the setting value.
7. Press the
button to change to Offline mode.
8. Press the
button again to change to Online mode.
You can print to check the adjusted print position.
590
Adjusting the Media Stop Position
Set the [Offset] in the [Printing] > [Advanced] > [Adjustments] menu to adjust the media stop position.
•
The above cut reference position for printing indicates the label stop position when the
media sensor is set to Gap sensor.
•
You can also adjust when the operation mode is specified to Tear-off or Dispenser.
1. When the printer is in Online mode, press the
change to Offline mode.
2. Press the
button on the operator panel to
button to show the [Settings] menu.
591
Adjusting the Media Stop Position
3. Select [Printing] using the
/
buttons, and then press the
4. Select the [Advanced] > [Adjustments] > [Offset] menu using the
and then press the
button.
/
buttons,
button.
The [Offset] screen appears.
5. Change the setting value. Press the
and then press the
/
/
/
buttons to select a number
button to enter the number to the text box.
The setting range is as follows:
Resolution
CL4NX
CL6NX
203 dpi
-30 to +30 dots
-30 to +30 dots
-45 to +45 dots
-45 to +45 dots
-90 to +90 dots
-
(1 dot = 0.125
mm (0.0049"))
305 dpi
(1 dot = 0.083
mm (0.0033"))
609 dpi
592
Resolution
CL4NX
CL6NX
(1 dot = 0.042
mm (0.0017"))
6. Press the
button to save the setting value.
7. Press the
button to change to Offline mode.
8. Press the
button again to change to Online mode.
You can print to check the adjusted stop position.
593
Notes on the Stop/Cut Position of Different Media
Notes on the Stop/Cut Position of Different Media
Stop Position of the Label in Dispenser Mode
The regular position is to let the label stay about 2 ± 1 mm (0.08" ± 0.04") on the liner.
(1) Feed direction
(2) Dispenser bar
(3) Stop position
Cut Position When Using the Label in Cutter Mode
The regular cut position is between labels (only cut on the liner).
When you cut the label, the glue adheres to the blade of the cutter and the blade will decrease the
performance of the cutter. Adjust the cut position so as not to cut the label.
(1) Media feed direction
(2) Cut position (I-mark sensor)
(3) Cut position (Gap sensor)
(4) Label
(5) Liner
594
Cut Position When Using the Media with Perforated Line in Cutter Mode
Adjust the cut position so as not to cut the media on the perforated line and on the area near side from
the perforated line (the area is shown in the figure below).
When the media is cut on the area not to be cut, it could cause a paper jam or damage.
•
Media Roll
The area not to be cut is on the perforated line and on the area within 1 mm (0.04") near side
from the perforated line.
(1) Area not to be cut
(2) Perforated line
•
Fan-fold Media
The area not to be cut is on the perforated line and on the area within 4 to 25 mm (0.16" to 0.98")
near side from the perforated line.
(1) Area not to be cut
(2) Perforated line
595
Adjusting the Print Darkness
Adjusting the Print Quality
Adjusting the Print Darkness
The adjustment procedure for the print darkness is as follows:
•
You can fine tune the print darkness by setting the [Darkness Adjust] in the [Printing] >
[Advanced] > [Adjustments] menu.
•
When the [Printing] > [Advanced] > [Prioritize] menu has been set to [Commands], the
data will be printed with the print darkness specified by command.
•
While the print job is paused, the [Adjustments] menu will appear instead of the
[Settings] menu and you can adjust the print darkness.
1. When the printer is in Online mode, press the
Offline mode.
2. Press the
button to change the printer to
button to show the [Settings] menu.
596
3. Press the
/
buttons to select [Printing] and then press the
4. Press the
/
buttons to select [Darkness] and then press the
The [Darkness] screen appears.
5. Press the
/
buttons to select a value.
The setting range is from 1 to 10. 1 is the lightest and 10 is the darkest.
597
button.
button.
Adjusting the Print Darkness
6. Press the
button or
button to save the setting value.
7. Press the
button to change to Offline mode.
8. Press the
button again to change to Online mode.
You can print to check the print quality.
598
Adjusting the Print Speed
The adjustment of the print speed not only changes the speed of printing but also affects the print
quality.
The setting range of the print speed varies depending on the following print resolution:
Resolution
CL4NX
CL6NX
203 dpi
2 to 10 (inches/sec) (50.8 to 254 mm/
sec)
2 to 10 (inches/sec) (50.8 to 254 mm/
sec)
2 to 8 (inches/sec) (50.8 to 203.2 mm/
sec)
2 to 8 (inches/sec) (50.8 to 203.2 mm/
sec)
2 to 6 (inches/sec) (50.8 to 152 mm/
sec)
-
(8 dots/mm)
305 dpi
(12 dots/mm)
609 dpi
(24 dots/mm)
•
When the [Printing] > [Advanced] > [Prioritize] menu has been set to [Commands], the
data will be printed with the print speed specified by command.
•
While the print job is paused, the [Adjustments] menu will appear instead of the
[Settings] menu and you can adjust the print speed.
•
If the optional linerless cutter kit is installed to CL4NX, the setting range is 2 to 6
(inches/sec) (50.8 to 152 mm/sec) regardless of the printing resolution.
1. When the printer is in Online mode, press the
Offline mode.
2. Press the
button to change the printer to
button to show the [Settings] menu.
599
Adjusting the Print Speed
3. Press the
/
buttons to select [Printing] and then press the
4. Press the
/
buttons to select [Speed] and then press the
The [Speed] screen appears.
5. Press the
6. Press the
/
buttons to select a value.
button or
button to save the setting value.
600
button.
button.
7. Press the
button to change to Offline mode.
8. Press the
button again to change to Online mode.
You can print to check the print quality.
601
Adjusting the Buzzer Volume
Adjusting the Buzzer Volume
The adjustment procedure for the buzzer volume when an error occurs is as follows:
1. When the printer is in Online mode, press the
Offline mode.
2. Press the
3. Press the
button to change the printer to
button to show the [Settings] menu.
/
buttons to select [System] and then press the
602
button.
4. Press the
/
buttons to select [Sound] > [Error Sound] and then press the
button.
The [Error Sound] screen appears.
5. Press the
/
buttons to set the volume.
The options are as follows:
[Off]
Mute the sound.
[Low]
Low volume.
[Medium]
Medium volume.
[High]
High volume.
6. Press the
button or
button to save the setting.
603
Print Head Balance
Adjusting the Head Pressure Balance
Print Head Balance
Print head balance refers to the equalization of pressure between the print head and the platen roller.
If the print head balance is out of adjustment, the printed image will be darker on one side of the media
than the other and the media will be prone to travel in the direction of greater pressure.
Setting the Criteria of the Head Pressure Balance
The criteria of the head pressure balance is set to adapt to the using media.
•
Set the head pressure according to the media thickness, including the liner.
•
Set the pressure balance according to the media width.
604
Head Pressure Setting
Set the head pressure according to the media thickness, including the liner.
1. Open the top cover of the printer.
2. Find the adjustment dials (1) on the top of the print head assembly.
3. Turn the adjustment dials (1) according to the media thickness and set the head
pressure.
Media Thickness
(mm (inch))
0.060 - 0.200 (0.0024" - 0.0079")
Adjustment Dials
(Left and Right, CL4NX only)
to
only)
Reference
(Left and Right, CL6NX
Thin paper/normal label, etc.
0.200 - 0.268 (0.0079" - 0.011")
to
(Left and Right)
Thick paper/tag, etc.
•
The factory default settings of both Left and Right dials are
•
For CL6NX dispenser model, the factory default settings of both Left and Right dials
are
.
•
The thickness of the media includes the liner.
Be sure to set the pressure balance after adjusting the head pressure.
605
.
Pressure Balance Setting
Pressure Balance Setting
Set the pressure balance according to the media width.
1. Open the top cover of the printer.
2. Find the adjustment dials (1) on the top of the print head assembly.
3. Turn the adjustment dials (1) according to the media width and set the pressure
balance.
For CL4NX:
Media Width (mm (inch))
25 - 54 (0.98" 2.13")
54 - 83 (2.13" 3.27")
83 - 131 (3.27" 5.16")
Adjustment Dials
Left
Left
Left
Right
Right
Right
For CL6NX:
Media Width (mm
(inch))
50 - 120 (1.97" 4.72")
120 - 140 (4.72"
- 5.51")
140 - 160 (5.51"
- 6.30")
160 - 180 (6.30"
- 7.09")
Adjustment Dials
Left
Left
Left
Left
Right
Right
606
or
Right
or
Right
or
or
•
First use the dial setting for the head pressure and then adjust according to the media
width.
Above table shows an example when the head pressure is Left
.
•
The factory default settings of both Left and Right dials are
•
For CL6NX dispenser model, the factory default settings of both Left and Right dials
are
.
607
.
Types of Usable IC Tags and IC Cards
Configuring Optional RFID (CL4NX only)
Types of Usable IC Tags and IC Cards
The types of the usable IC tags and IC cards with the optional UHF RFID kit and HF RFID kit are as
follows:
Types of IC Tags and IC Cards
UHF (920 MHz)
HF (13.56 MHz)
ISO/IEC 18000-6 Type C Gen2
Available
-
ISO/IEC 15693
-
Available
-
Available
-
Available
•
ICODE SLI/SLIX/SLIX-S
•
Tag-it HF-I
•
my-d
ISO/IEC 14443 Type A
•
NTAG203
•
NTAG210
•
NTAG213/215/216
•
MIFARE UltraLight
•
MIFARE UltraLight C
•
my-d move NFC
ISO/IEC18092
•
FeliCa Lite-S
608
Configuring the Printer to Encode Inlays
This topic explains the procedures on how to configure the printer to encode your inlays.
1. Examine the media to determine the printer settings.
Refer to the CL4NX Inlay Configuration Guide for the measurements you should take and what
they mean, as well as a list of inlays and their required configurations.
To see the CL4NX Inlay Configuration Guide, access the following URL:
http://www.satoworldwide.com/rfid/
2. Press the
power button of the operator panel until the LED lights up in blue to
power on the printer.
3. When the printer is in Online mode, press the
change to Offline mode.
4. Press the
5. Press the
button on the operator panel to
button to show the [Settings] menu.
/
buttons to select [Interface] and then press the
609
button.
Configuring the Printer to Encode Inlays
6. Press the
/
buttons to select [RFID] and then press the
button.
The [RFID] screen appears.
7. Press the
/
buttons to select the item you want to set and then press the
button.
The adjusting screen appears.
8. Open the top cover (1).
610
•
Open the top cover fully to prevent accidental drop of the cover.
9. Push the head lock lever (2) towards the rear to unlock the print head.
•
The print head and its surroundings are hot after printing. Be careful not to touch it, to
avoid being burned.
•
Touching the edge of the print head with your bare hand could cause injury.
10. Adjust the position of the RFID antenna. Rotate the dial (3) to align the pointer ▼
(4) with the media being used.
When [Antenna Pitch] is set to [Standard] in the [Interface] > [RFID] menu, adjust the physical
position of the antenna according to the settings required for the specific media and inlay used.
Refer to the "Antenna Position" of the Inlay Placement & Configuration Table in the CL4NX Inlay
Configuration Guide.
To see the CL4NX Inlay Configuration Guide, access the following URL:
611
Configuring the Printer to Encode Inlays
http://www.satoworldwide.com/rfid/
11. Load the media and ribbon.
12. Confirm the operation by printing/encoding a media.
Make sure that you read the data and check that it is correctly encoded.
612
Printing RFID Tag Errors
If the recorded data on a tag is incomplete due to writing on a defective tag, the printer will print an
RFID tag error to the defective media. This function is to prevent the distribution of defective media
with a tag error.
When an RFID tag error occurs, the printer prints a slash and the error message, such as "WRITE
TAG ERROR" or "TAG NOT FOUND". The position to print the message and slash is set using the
specified media size command <A1>.
For a write error such as "WRITE TAG ERROR", the printer continues to print the first 16 or 32 bytes
of the write data.
The diagram below shows the message and slash printed on the position based on the media size
specified by the normal print.
WRITE TAG ERROR in RFID Write Command
Read Error in UID/EPC/IDm Print Command
<TU> or TAG NOT FOUND Error
For other errors, the printer prints the error
message accordingly.
613
Printing RFID Tag Errors
TAG NOT FOUND Error in RFID Write
Command
(1) Feed direction
(2) The origin of the range specified by the media size command <A1>
(3) The range specified with the media size command <A1>
(4) The dump for the first 16 or 32 bytes of the write data
•
When a character overlaps with the slash, the character will inverse from black to
white.
When using a small-size label (about the size of P30 X W40 mm (P1.18" X W1.57"), for example) or
not enough for setting margin, the slash and error message are printed overlap on each other. The
overlapped area are inverse from black to white. There is no dump printing.
614
TAG NOT FOUND Error in RFID Write
Command
(1) Feed direction
(2) The origin of the range specified by the media size command <A1>
(3) The range specified with the media size command <A1>
If not specified by the media size command <A1>, the printer prints the RFID error using a fixed size
of P30 X W40 mm (P1.18" X W1.57"). When a character overlaps with the slash, the character will
inverse from black to white.
WRITE TAG ERROR in RFID Write Command
Read Error in UID/EPC/IDm Print Command
<TU> or TAG NOT FOUND Error
For other errors, the printer prints the error
message accordingly.
615
Printing RFID Tag Errors
TAG NOT FOUND Error in RFID Write
Command
(1) Feed direction
(2) The dump for the first 16 or 32 bytes of the write data
The types of errors to print are as follows:
Message
Cause and Countermeasure
TAG NOT FOUND
Cause
Did not find the tag to print, or failed to read the tag.
Countermeasure
Confirm the inlay operation and check the printer/antenna settings.
WRITE TAG ERROR
Cause
Failed to write the tag.
Countermeasure
Confirm the inlay operation and check the printer/antenna settings.
PROTECT (TAG) ERROR
Cause
1. Tried to write to a locked tag.
2. Tried to write to an address that is not permitted.
Countermeasure
Use media that is not locked.
VERIFY TAG ERR(OR)
Only for ISO/IEC 15693, ISO/IEC 14443 Type A
Cause
The written data and read data do not match.
616
Message
Cause and Countermeasure
Countermeasure
Confirm the inlay operation and check the printer/antenna settings.
Only for FeliCa
Cause
The written data and read data do not match. A value greater than
original data was written to subtraction register.
Countermeasure
Write an appropriate value to subtraction register.
LOCKING ERROR
Cause
Failed to lock the tag.
Countermeasure
Check the media.
WRONG TID ERROR
Only for ISO/IEC 15693
Cause
Read the UID of the tag other than the specified tag.
Countermeasure
Check the tag type setting and the label.
MULTI TAGS ERROR
Only for ISO/IEC 15693, ISO/IEC 14443 Type A
Cause
Multiple tags detected at a time.
Countermeasure
Confirm the inlay operation and check the printer/antenna settings.
Only for FeliCa
Cause
The captured IDm of the card is inconsistent between processes.
(Tried to write to a wrong card.)
Countermeasure
Confirm the inlay operation and check the printer/antenna settings.
DIFFER EPC ERROR
Only for UHF
Cause
Detected inconsistent EPC during a series of processes.
617
Printing RFID Tag Errors
Message
Cause and Countermeasure
Countermeasure
Check the media.
READ ONLY ERROR
Only for UHF
Cause
1. Tried to write to a write-locked tag.
2. Tried to write to a tag when the write power is low.
Countermeasure
1. Use media that is not locked.
2. Adjust [Write Power]/[Read Power].
DIFFER TAG KIND
Only for ISO/IEC 15693, ISO/IEC 14443 Type A, FeliCa
Cause
Incorrect tag type is specified.
Countermeasure
Check the tag type, and specify the correct tag type.
LOST HANDLE ERR
Only for ISO/IEC 15693, ISO/IEC 14443 Type A, FeliCa
Cause
Failed to acquire the ID.
Countermeasure
The radio wave condition needs to be improved. Increase the Read
Power level.
618
RFID Error and Reset Timing
Error Signal Output with One-shot Pulse
Error Signal Output with Long Pulse
When the reprint count reaches the specified number, the RFID tag error and machine error are
outputted at a time. The machine error output is always a long pulse.
Timing Chart of Error Signal Output with One-shot Pulse
Item
RFID Reprint Twice - One-shot Pulse Output Waveform
Error
Reprint 1st
619
RFID Error and Reset Timing
Item
RFID Reprint Twice - One-shot Pulse Output Waveform
Reprint 2nd
Timing Chart of Error Signal Output with Long Pulse
Item
RFID Reprint Twice - Level Output Waveform
Error
Reprint 1st
620
Item
RFID Reprint Twice - Level Output Waveform
Reprint 2nd
621
External Signal (EXT) Interfaces When RFID Mode Is Enabled
External Signal (EXT) Interfaces When RFID Mode Is Enabled
The following tables are the comparison of EXT signal between RFID mode is disabled or enabled.
RFID Mode Disabled
Standard specification is applied when the RFID mode is disabled.
Pin No.
Signal
I/O
1
Paper End
Output
2
Ground
-
3
Ribbon End
Output
4
Machine Error
Output
5
Print Start (PRIN)
Input
6
Print Done/Print End (PREND)
Output
7
Reprint (PRIN2)
Input
8
External Power Supply
Input
9
Online
Output
10
Ribbon Near End
Output
11
N/A
-
12
+24V
Output
13
+5V
Output
14
Frame Ground
-
RFID Mode Enabled
The function indicated in bold text is applied to 1, 3, and 4 of Pin No. when the RFID mode is enabled.
Pin No.
Signal
I/O
1
Paper End + Ribbon End
Output
2
Ground
-
3
RFID Tag Error
Output
4
Machine Error/RFID Error
Output
5
Print Start (PRIN)
Input
622
Pin No.
Signal
I/O
6
Print Done/Print End (PREND)
Output
7
Reprint (PRIN2)
Input
8
External Power Supply
Input
9
Online
Output
10
Ribbon Near End
Output
11
N/A
-
12
+24V
Output
13
+5V
Output
14
Frame Ground
-
623
RFID Printing Tips
RFID Printing Tips
Recommended Non-printable Zone
Avoid printing barcodes or characters directly on top of an RFID chip. The uneven surface will
negatively affect the print quality.
(1) Feed direction
(2) Recommended non-printable zone
(3) IC chip
(4) Inlay
(5) Print object
(6) Gap
(7) Antenna
(8) RFID tag/label
(9) I-mark
624
Configuring Optional Barcode Check Function
Basic Specifications of the Barcode Check Function
The barcode check function does a reading check of a barcode printed by this printer to prevent the
distribution of labels with defective barcodes. You can use this function by installing the supported
barcode checkers to the printer.
The basic specifications of the barcode check function are as follows:
Item
Specification
Supported Barcode
Checkers
•
IDEC/DATALOGIC WB1F-100S1S (for 1D barcodes, USB
connection)
•
IDEC/DATALOGIC GFS4470 (for 1D barcodes/2D codes, USB
connection)
•
KEYENCE BL-1301 (for 1D barcodes, RS-232C connection)
•
KEYENCE SR-710 (for 1D barcodes/2D codes, RS-232C
connection)
Refer to the manual of the barcode checker for its settings and
supported barcodes.
Supported Commands
SBPL/SZPL/SIPL/STCL/SDPL/SEPL
•
Supported Print Modes
AEP is not supported.
Continuous/Cutter/Cut & Print/Dispenser/Linerless (CL4NX only)
•
Not available in Tear-Off mode.
•
Not available for CL4NX RFID models.
•
The Void Print function is not available in Dispenser/
Linerless (CL4NX only) mode.
Print Speed/Print
Darkness
The optimal print speed and print darkness for secure reading vary
depending on various conditions, such as the barcode type and label
layout. Be sure to perform a test read carefully and determine the
settings.
Printable Area
Same as the printer specifications. However, there are following
restrictions:
(Barcode Readable Area)
625
Basic Specifications of the Barcode Check Function
Item
Specification
Continuous mode
Barcodes printed within the range of 11 mm (0.43") from the trailing
end of the label cannot be read because it is blocked by the print
head and ribbon adjustment plate.
(1) Media feed direction
(2) Ribbon adjustment plate
(3) Print head
(4) Readable area (for the minimum media pitch)
(5) Unreadable area
(6) Minimum media pitch
Cutter/Cut & Print mode
Barcodes printed within the following area cannot be read because it
is blocked by the cutter cover.
◦
Cutter (cutting every label): 25 mm (0.98") from the trailing end of
the label
(1) Media feed direction
(2) Cutter cover
(3) Cut position
(4) Print head
(5) Readable area (for the minimum media pitch)
(6) Unreadable area
(7) Minimum media pitch
◦
Cutter (cutting according to the specified number of labels)/ Cut &
Print: 44 mm (1.73") from the trailing end of the label
626
Item
Specification
(1) Media feed direction
(2) Cutter cover
(3) Cut position
(4) Print head
(5) Readable area (for the minimum media pitch)
(6) Unreadable area
(7) Minimum media pitch
Cut & Print mode
Do not print a 2D code or serial barcode (90° or 180° orientation in
relation to the media feed direction) within the following area as it
may cause a white void.
◦
CL4NX: 18 to 23 mm (0.70" to 0.90") from the front end of the label
(cut position)
(1) Media feed direction
(2) Cutter cover
(3) Cut position
(4) Print head
(5) Range in which white voids occur
◦
CL6NX: 19 to 25 mm (0.75" to 0.98") from the front end of the label
(cut position)
627
Basic Specifications of the Barcode Check Function
Item
Specification
(1) Media feed direction
(2) Cutter cover
(3) Cut position
(4) Print head
(5) Range in which white voids occur
Linerless mode (CL4NX only)
Barcodes printed within a range of 25 mm (0.98") from the trailing
end of the label cannot be read as it is blocked by the cutter cover.
(1) Media feed direction
(2) Cutter cover
(3) Cut position
(4) Print head
(5) Readable area (for the minimum media pitch)
(6) Unreadable area
(7) Minimum media pitch
Usable Media
Sizes
Media
width
Same as the printer specifications.
Media
Pitch
The minimum size is different from the printer specifications.
Continuous mode
◦
203 dpi: 20 to 2497 mm (0.79" to 98.30") (with liner: 23 to 2500 mm
(0.90" to 98.42"))
◦
305 dpi: 20 to 1497 mm (0.79" to 58.94") (with liner: 23 to 1500 mm
(0.90" to 59.05"))
628
Item
Specification
◦
609 dpi (CL4NX only): 20 to 397 mm (0.79" to 15.63") (with liner: 23
to 400 mm (0.90" to 15.75"))
Cutter mode (cutting every label)
◦
203 dpi: 35 to 2497 mm (1.38" to 98.30") (with liner: 38 to 2500 mm
(1.50" to 98.42"))
◦
305 dpi: 35 to 1497 mm (1.38" to 58.94") (with liner: 38 to 1500 mm
(1.50" to 59.05"))
◦
609 dpi (CL4NX only): 35 to 397 mm (1.38" to 15.63") (with liner: 38
to 400 mm (1.50" to 15.75"))
Cutter (cutting according to the specified number of labels)/Cut &
Print mode
◦
203 dpi: 54 to 2497 mm (2.13" to 98.30") (with liner: 57 to 2500 mm
(2.24" to 98.42"))
◦
305 dpi: 54 to 1497 mm (2.13" to 58.94") (with liner: 57 to 1500 mm
(2.24" to 59.05"))
◦
609 dpi (CL4NX only): 54 to 397 mm (2.13" to 15.63") (with liner: 57
to 400 mm (2.24" to 15.75"))
Dispenser mode
◦
27 to 397 mm (1.06" to 15.63") (with liner: 30 to 400 mm (1.18" to
15.75"))
Linerless mode (CL4NX only)
◦
Usable Media Types
Readable
Barcode
Orientations
38 to 120 mm (1.50" to 4.72")
Same as the printer specifications. If the label color is silver or
laminated, however, it makes it difficult for the barcode checker to read
the barcode, as the light of the barcode checker may cause a reflection
on the label surface. Be sure to do a test read carefully in advance.
1D
Barcode
Checker
(1) Media feed direction
629
Basic Specifications of the Barcode Check Function
Item
Specification
2D
Code
Checker
(1) Media feed direction
Place the barcode within the size of the visual field. Do a test read
carefully in advance.
Recommended
Barcode Sizes
1D
Narrow bar: 0.25 mm (0.01") or greater
Barcode
• 203 dpi: 2 dots or more
•
305 dpi: 3 dots or more
•
609 dpi (CL4NX only): 6 dots or more
Refer to the specifications of each barcode checker.
2D
Code
Cell size: 0.25 mm (0.01") or greater
•
203 dpi: 2 dots or more
•
305 dpi: 3 dots or more
•
609 dpi (CL4NX only): 6 dots or more
Refer to the specifications of each barcode checker.
The size of the visual field conforms to the specifications of the
barcode checker.
Available Code Formats
The barcode check function supports the following code formats. Check the specifications of the
barcode checker to ensure compatibility with the available code types.
Code Type
Available code formats
1D Barcodes
CODABAR(NW-7)
CODE39, CODE93, CODE128
JAN/EAN-13/8
UPC-A/UPC-E
630
Code Type
Available code formats
ITF
Industrial 2 of 5
Matrix 2 of 5
MSI
GS1-128
POSTNET
IMB (USPS)
GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional
GS1 DataBar Truncated
GS1 DataBar Limited
GS1 DataBar Expanded
GS1 DataBar Stacked
GS1 DataBar Stacked Omnidirectional
GS1 DataBar Expanded Stacked
2D Codes
PDF417
Micro PDF417
Maxi Code
QR Code
Micro QR Code
Data Matrix
Aztec Code
Combined Symbols
JAN/EAN-13/8(CC-A/CC-B)
UPC-A/UPC-E(CC-A/CC-B)
GS1-128(CC-A/CC-B/CC-C)
GS1 DataBar(CC-A/CC-B)
•
Use barcode fonts to create a barcode. If a barcode created as an image (such as
BMP) is placed within the barcode readable area, the readable mode and comparison
mode of the barcode check function may not function correctly.
631
Operational Settings for the Barcode Checker and Installation
Setting Up the Barcode Checker
Operational Settings for the Barcode Checker and Installation
To use the barcode check function, perform necessary operational settings for the supported barcode
checker and then install it to the printer.
Operational Settings for the Barcode Checker
Set up the barcode checker either by using the application software provided by its manufacturer or by
reading the barcodes for setting changes printed on the barcode checker's manual. For details, refer to
the manual.
•
Settings common to all supported barcode checkers
Limit the barcode types you permit the barcode checker to read as much as possible. If a lot
of barcode types are permitted, a longer decode time is required. This can cause the barcode
checker to fail to read the printed barcode.
•
GFS4470
◦
Select USB-COM. The printer cannot detect the barcode checker when connected with other
settings.
◦
To shorten laser lighting time, it is recommended to set the reading mode to "On Line" or "Serial
On Line".
◦
If multiple barcodes are captured at once when using the default barcode checker settings, only
the first set of decoded barcode data is sent. You can change the settings to decode and send all
the captured barcodes. However, if this is done, combined symbols cannot be read.
◦
When printing barcodes in a narrow range, allow enough time for decoding (parameter: DETM),
otherwise not all of the results of the decoded captured barcodes will be sent.
◦
Because postal barcodes consist of bars and spaces with equal intervals, they may be read as a
different barcode type. When checking postal barcodes, it is recommended to set other barcode
types to be unreadable.
•
KEYENCE barcode checkers (BL-1301, SR-710)
Set the barcode checker's interface settings to either (1) or (2).
If the barcode checker set to (1) is connected, the printer will change the settings to (2).
Settings
(1)
(2)
Baud rate
9600 bps
115200 bps
Data length
7 bits
8 bits
Parity
Even
Even
Stop bit length
1 bit
1 bit
Barcode Checker Installation
Mount the barcode checker to the optional barcode checker stand kit and connect it to the printer.
For details on how to install the barcode checker, refer to the Barcode Checker Stand Kit Installation
Manual that came with the barcode checker stand kit.
632
•
Because the KEYENCE barcode checkers (BL-1301, SR-710) use an RS-232C
connection, an optional scanner connection cable is required.
•
When replacing media or ribbon, remove the barcode checker stand kit from the
printer. When doing this, first turn the switch of the magnetic base stand to OFF and
remove the barcode checker stand. For details on how to use the barcode checker
stand, refer to the Barcode Checker Stand Kit Installation Manual.
Changing How the RS-232C Interface is Used (When Using the KEYENCE Barcode
Checkers)
When using one of the KEYENCE barcode checkers (BL-1301, SR-710), modify the barcode
checker's operational settings so that it can communicate with the printer, and then connect it to
the printer. After connecting the barcode checker to the printer, change the [Interface] setting of
the RS-232C interface to [RS-232C Reader] on the printer. With this setting, the printer can detect
the barcode checker and automatically connect with it according to the barcode checker's interface
settings.
1. After connecting the barcode checker, press the
power button on the operator
panel until the LED lights up in blue to power on the printer.
2. When the printer is in Online mode, press the
change to Offline mode.
3. Press the
button on the operator panel to
button to show the [Settings] menu.
633
Changing How the RS-232C Interface is Used (When Using the KEYENCE Barcode Checkers)
4. Press the
/
buttons to select [Interface], and then press the
5. Press the
/
buttons to select [RS-232C] > [Interface], and then press the
/
buttons to select [RS-232C Reader].
button.
6. Press the
7. Press the
button to save the setting value.
634
button.
8. Press the
button to change to Offline mode.
9. Power the printer off, and then on again.
When the printer is powered on, the barcode checker is also powered on automatically.
•
When the barcode checker is powered on, it emits a laser light for a few seconds. Be
sure to keep the laser away from your eyes.
Once the connection between the printer and the barcode checker is complete, the barcode
checker icon appears on the status bar of the display.
Do a test read with the barcode checker to confirm that it functions correctly.
•
If the printer cannot detect the barcode checker, check if the operational settings of the
barcode check are appropriate.
Doing a Test Read with the Barcode Checker
Prepare a label on which the barcode data you use is printed by this printer.
After performing operational settings of the barcode checker and then connecting it to the printer,
perform a test read from the printer's [Settings] menu to confirm that the barcode checker functions
correctly.
1. After connecting the barcode checker, press the
power button on the operator
panel until the LED lights up in blue to power on the printer.
When the printer is powered on, the barcode checker is also powered on automatically.
•
When the barcode checker is powered on, it emits a laser light for a few seconds. Be
sure to keep the laser away from your eyes.
635
Doing a Test Read with the Barcode Checker
Once the connection between the printer and the barcode checker is complete, the barcode
checker icon appears on the status bar of the display.
2. When the printer is in Online mode, press the
change to Offline mode.
3. Press the
4. Press the
button on the operator panel to
button to show the [Settings] menu.
/
buttons to select [Tools], and then press the
636
button.
5. Press the
/
buttons to select [Barcode Checker] > [Test], and then press the
button.
6. Confirm that the type of connected barcode checker is displayed on the right side
of [Reader Name].
7. Press the
button.
/
buttons to select [Reading Test], and then press the
8. Set a label with barcodes within the scanning range of the barcode checker.
637
Doing a Test Read with the Barcode Checker
9. Press the
button to start reading the barcodes.
If reading is successful, the barcode type and data read are displayed on the screen. Only the first
23 bytes of data are displayed.
If reading is unsuccessful, or the displayed results of the read are not correct, adjust the position
of the barcode checker by using the barcode checker stand. For details on how to use the barcode
checker stand, refer to the Barcode Checker Stand Kit Installation Manual that came with the
barcode checker stand kit.
•
If the printer cannot detect the barcode checker, check if the operational settings for the
barcode checker are appropriate.
638
Enabling the Barcode Check
Selecting the Barcode Check Mode
The barcode check function has a readable mode and a comparison mode. You can switch the mode
or disable the function from the printer's [Settings] menu.
1. When the printer is in Online mode, press the
change to Offline mode.
2. Press the
3. Press the
button on the operator panel to
button to show the [Settings] menu.
/
buttons to select [Tools], and then press the
639
button.
Selecting the Barcode Check Mode
4. Press the
/
buttons to select [Barcode Checker] > [Settings] > [Mode], and
then press the
5. Press the
/
button.
buttons to select the mode for the barcode check function.
[Disabled]
Disable the barcode check function.
[Readable]
Enable readable mode.
[Comparison]
Enable comparison mode.
6. Press the
button to save the setting value.
640
•
When the readable mode or comparison mode is set, a barcode reader connection
error occurs if the barcode checker is not connected at printer startup or at the start of
printing.
•
Even if the readable mode or comparison mode is set, the barcode check is not done
for print data that does not include any barcode data. Normal printing is done for that
data.
•
When [VOID Print] is enabled, you can identify a defective label by printing error marks
on it.
•
The log data of barcode check results is saved on the printer and can be copied to
the USB memory from the [Logs] menu. By enabling [Host Notification], you can also
return check results to the host from which the print data is sent.
Contents of the Check for Readable Mode and Comparison Mode
The barcode check function has readable mode and comparison mode. The contents of the check for
each mode are as follows.
•
You can check multiple barcodes on one label. Though the number of barcodes on
one label is not limited, a reading error occurs when the total size of the barcode data
exceeds 200 Kb.
•
Reading of barcodes starts after the label length specified in [Start Position] passes. In
modes where the printer backfeeds before printing, the printer backfeeds first, and then
feeds the length of the start position.
Readable mode
This mode checks if the printed barcodes are readable. The readability is determined by whether the
number of barcodes the barcode checker reads matches the number of barcodes in the print data.
•
The reading is considered to be successful if the number of barcodes the barcode checker reads
reaches the number of barcodes in the print data. The printer prints the next label.
*1 Even if the number of barcodes the barcode checker reads exceeds the number of barcodes
in the print data, it is considered to be successful.
641
Contents of the Check for Readable Mode and Comparison Mode
•
A reading error occurs if the number of barcodes in the print data is not read within the printing
period from start to finish and the timeout period (up to 2 seconds).
Comparison mode
This mode checks if the read results of the printed barcodes match the barcode data in the print data.
•
The reading is considered to be successful if the read results of the printed barcodes match the
barcode data in the print data. The printer prints the next label.
•
A comparison error occurs if the read results of the printed barcodes do not match the barcode
data in the print data.
642
•
A reading error occurs if the number of barcodes in the print data is not read within the printing
period from start to finish and the timeout period (up to 2 seconds), even if the read results of the
printed barcodes do not match the barcode data in the print data.
643
Restrictions for the Barcode Check Function
Restrictions for the Barcode Check Function
Common Restrictions for the Barcode Check Function
•
When the printer is powered on while the barcode checker is connected, the barcode
checker is also powered on and emits a laser light for a few seconds. Be sure to keep
the laser away from your eyes.
•
The reading accuracy of barcodes or 2D codes is affected by label conditions (label curl,
print quality, etc.) and the usage environment (ambient light, temperature, humidity, etc.), and
readability is not guaranteed. Be sure to do a test read with the barcode checker you will use in
advance.
•
The types of paper that can be used are the same as the printer specifications. If the label color
is silver or laminated, however, it makes it difficult for the barcode checker to read the barcode,
as the light of the barcode checker may cause a reflection on the label surface. Be sure to do a
test read carefully in advance.
•
Design the label layout so that barcodes or 2D codes do not remain within the scanning range
of the barcode checker at the completion of printing. If the barcode of the previous label remains
in the scanning range at the start of the next printing, the barcode checker may read the same
barcode twice. The image below is when in continuous mode. As the stop position differs
depending on the printer’s print mode and commands, be sure to check your label layout
carefully in advance.
(1) Media feed direction
(2) Print head position
•
Barcodes printed within the following range from the print end position cannot be read and a
reading error inevitably occurs. As the following table is only for a reference, be sure to do a test
read carefully in advance.
Print modes
Ranges to be avoided
Continuous
Approximately 11 mm (0.43") from the print end position
Cutter
Cutting every label
Approximately 25 mm (0.98") from the print end position
644
Print modes
Ranges to be avoided
Cutting according to the specified number of labels
Approximately 44 mm (1.73") from the print end position
Cut & Print
Approximately 44 mm (1.73") from the print end position
Dispenser
No restriction
Linerless (CL4NX only)
Approximately 25 mm (0.98") from the print end position
•
The barcode check is not performed if the position at which the check starts is detected after the
label feeding begins to stop. Define the label layout and position at which the check starts by
keeping in mind that the distance required for stopping is proportional to the print speed.
•
Printed barcodes or 2D codes can be read only with a size at which their entire pattern is within
the scanning range of the barcode checker. A reading error may occur depending on the print
position.
•
This function cannot be controlled through the use of external signals (EXT).
Restrictions When Using GFS4470
•
By the double-reading prevention function, the barcode checker may not read barcodes that are
printed successively if they are within the readable area. Adjust the print position so that same
barcodes are not within the readable area.
•
When printing composite symbols that use GS1 DataBar, the read data and print data never
match if the barcode data is 16 digits or less. A comparison error occurs in comparison mode.
•
Though "\" (0x5C) specified in MAXI code, print data should be read as "\\" in the specifications.
However, it may not be read as such, depending on the following data. For example, "\A"
specified in print data should be read as "\\A" in the specifications, but it is actually read as only
"A".
Restrictions When Using WB1F-100S1S
•
Multiple barcodes cannot be read at the same time.
•
When NUL (0x00) is included in CODE128 print data, only the data before NUL is recognized
as reading data, and NUL and the data after NUL are ignored. A comparison error occurs in
comparison mode. In readable mode, a reading error occurs only if NUL is specified at the
beginning of the print data.
645
Initializing Data Saved in the Printer
Initializing the Printer
Procedures for Initializing
Initializing Data Saved in the Printer
Initialize the data saved in the printer.
The data to be initialized are the fonts and graphics registered in the printer.
•
It is generally not necessary to perform the initialization. Doing so could change the
print conditions.
1. Press the
button in Online mode.
The printer enters Offline mode.
646
2. Press the
button.
The printer enters Settings mode.
3. Select [Tools] using the
4. Press the
/
buttons.
button.
The item list appears.
647
Initializing Data Saved in the Printer
5. Select [Reset] using the
6. Press the
/
buttons.
button.
The [Select] screen appears.
7. Select [Data] using the
8. Press the
/
buttons.
button.
The confirmation screen appears.
648
9. Press the
Press the
button to perform the initialization.
button to cancel the initialization.
The initialization is performed.
When the initialization is completed, the printer reboots.
Initializing Data and Setting Values of the Printer
Initialize the data and setting values of the printer.
•
Normally, it is not necessary to perform the initialization. Doing so could change the
print conditions.
•
The data to be initialized are the fonts and graphics registered in the printer.
1. Press the
button in Online mode.
The printer enters Offline mode.
649
Initializing Data and Setting Values of the Printer
2. Press the
button.
The printer enters Settings mode.
3. Select [Tools] using the
4. Press the
/
buttons.
button.
The item list appears.
650
5. Select [Reset] using the
6. Press the
/
buttons.
button.
The [Select] screen appears.
7. Select [Data & Settings] using the
8. Press the
/
button.
The item list appears.
651
buttons.
Initializing Data and Setting Values of the Printer
9. Select the setting items to be initialized using the
/
buttons.
[User Reset]
Initialize the data and setting values.
[User Reset (-Interface)]
Initialize the data and setting values that are not included in the [Interface] menu.
[Factory Reset]
Initialize to the status after factory shipment.
[Factory Reset (-Interface)]
Initialize the items that are not included in the [Interface] menu to the status after factory
shipment.
[Interface]
Initialize the data and setting values in the [Interface] menu.
[Printing]
Initialize the data and setting values in the [Printing] menu.
10. Press the
button.
The confirmation screen appears.
652
11. Press the
Press the
button to perform the initialization.
button to cancel the initialization.
The initialization is performed.
When the initialization is completed, the printer reboots.
Initializing Setting Values of the Printer
Initialize the setting values of the printer.
•
Normally, it is not necessary to perform the initialization. Doing so could change the
print conditions.
1. Press the
button in Online mode.
The printer enters Offline mode.
653
Initializing Setting Values of the Printer
2. Press the
button.
The printer enters Settings mode.
3. Select [Tools] using the
4. Press the
/
buttons.
button.
The item list appears.
654
5. Select [Reset] using the
6. Press the
/
buttons.
button.
The [Select] screen appears.
7. Select [Settings] using the
8. Press the
/
buttons.
button.
The item list appears.
655
Initializing Setting Values of the Printer
9. Select the setting items to be initialized using the
/
buttons.
[User Reset]
Initialize the setting values.
[User Reset (-Interface)]
Initialize the setting values that are not included in the [Interface] menu.
[Factory Reset]
Initialize to the status after factory shipment.
[Factory Reset (-Interface)]
Initialize the items that are not included in the [Interface] menu to the status after factory
shipment.
[Interface]
Initialize the setting values in the [Interface] menu.
[Printing]
Initialize the setting values in the [Printing] menu.
10. Press the
button.
The confirmation screen appears.
656
11. Press the
Press the
button to perform the initialization.
button to cancel the initialization.
The initialization is performed.
If a message prompting you to restart the printer appears on the Online/Offline screen, reboot the
printer to apply the settings.
657
[Printing] Menu
List of Initial Values
[Printing] Menu
The initial value refers to the setting value of the printer when it was shipped from the factory. If you
reset the printer, the setting values of the printer will change back to the factory default values. The
table below shows the initial value of each setting item and type of reset that changes the value back
to the initial value.
•
Normally, it is not necessary to perform the initialization. Doing so will remove all the
customer settings.
Setting Item
[Label Length]
Initial Value
CL4NX
CL6NX
203 dpi
203 dpi
20000 dots
User
Reset
Factory
Reset
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
20000 dots
305 dpi
305 dpi
18000 dots
18000 dots
609 dpi
9600 dots
[Label Width]
203 dpi
If [Head Base
Position] is [Standard]
832 dots
203 dpi
305 dpi
1216 dots
1248 dots
305 dpi
609 dpi
1984 dots
2496 dots
If [Head Base
Position] is [Leftjustify]
203 dpi
1340 dots
305 dpi
2010 dots
[Auto Measure]
Disabled
Yes
Yes
[Ribbon]
Use Ribbon
Yes
Yes
[Ribbon Near End]
Enabled
Yes
Yes
658
Setting Item
[Speed]
Initial Value
CL4NX
CL6NX
203 dpi
203 dpi
6 ips
6 ips
305 dpi
305 dpi
6 ips
6 ips
User
Reset
Factory
Reset
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
609 dpi
4 ips
Linerless mode
4 ips
[Sensor Type]
Gap
Gap
None (When [Print
Mode] is [Linerless])
[Auto-mode]
Enabled
[Print Mode]
Tear-Off (If no option
is installed)
Tear-Off (If no option
is installed)
Cutter (If cutter unit is
installed)
Cutter (If cutter unit is
installed)
Dispenser (If
dispenser unit is
installed)
Dispenser (If
dispenser unit is
installed)
Linerless (If linerless
cutter kit is installed)
[Backfeed]
Before (If [Print Mode]
is set to [Tear-Off] or
[Linerless])
After (If [Print Mode]
is set to [Dispenser],
[Cutter] or [Cut &
Print])
None (If [Print Mode]
is set to [Continuous])
Before (If [Print Mode]
is set to [Tear-Off])
After (If [Print Mode]
is set to [Dispenser],
[Cutter] or [Cut &
Print])
None (If [Print Mode]
is set to [Continuous])
[Eject Cut]
Off
Yes
Yes
[Darkness Range]
A
Yes
Yes
[Darkness]
5
Yes
Yes
[Vertical]
0 dot
Yes
Yes
[Horizontal]
0 dot
Yes
Yes
[Imaging]
659
[Printing] Menu
Setting Item
Initial Value
CL4NX
CL6NX
User
Reset
Factory
Reset
[Advanced]
[Calibrate]
1
[Auto-calibration]
Gap + I-Mark
-
-
[GAP Levels]
Value adjusted by the factory.
No
No
[GAP Slice Level]
Auto
No
No
[I-Mark Levels]
Value adjusted by the factory.
No
No
[I-Mark Slice Level]
Auto
No
No
[Head Check]
Off
Yes
Yes
[Head Check Mode]
Always
Yes
Yes
[Every Page]
1
Yes
Yes
[Check Media Size]
Disabled
Yes
Yes
[Offset]
0 dot
No
No
[Pitch]
0 dot
No
No
[Darkness Adjust]
50
No
No
[Start Online]
Enabled
Yes
Yes
[Feed After Error]
Disabled
Yes
Yes
[Feed At Power On]
Disabled
Yes
Yes
[Finisher Feed]
0 dot (Standard)
Yes
Yes
[Paper End]
Using I-mark
Yes
Yes
[Head Base Position]
Standard
Yes
Yes
[Prioritize]
Commands
Yes
Yes
[Reprint]
Disabled
Yes
Yes
[Print End Position]
0 dot
Yes
Yes
[Label Near End]
Disabled
Yes
Yes
[Adjustments]
1
Auto-calibration is not available for linerless models.
660
[Interface] Menu
The initial value refers to the setting value of the printer when it was shipped from the factory. If you
reset the printer, the setting values of the printer will change back to the factory default values. The
table below shows the initial value of each setting item and type of reset that changes the value back
to the initial value.
•
Normally, it is not necessary to perform the initialization. Doing so will remove all the
customer settings.
Setting Item
Initial Value
CL4NX
CL6NX
User
Reset
Factory
Reset
[Network]
[Settings]
[LAN]
[IPv4]
[Mode]
DHCP
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[DHCP]
-
-
-
[IP Address]
0.0.0.0
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Netmask]
255.255.255.0
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Gateway]
0.0.0.0
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[DNS]
0.0.0.0
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Mode]
Disable
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[DHCP]
-
-
-
[IP Address]
::
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Prefix Length]
64
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Gateway]
::
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[IPv6]
661
[Interface] Menu
Setting Item
Initial Value
User
Reset
Factory
Reset
::
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Enabled]
Disabled
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Server]
-
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Exclude]
-
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Mode]
DHCP
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[DHCP]
-
-
-
[IP Address]
0.0.0.0
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Netmask]
255.255.255.0
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Gateway]
0.0.0.0
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[DNS]
0.0.0.0
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Mode]
Disable
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[DHCP]
-
-
-
[IP Address]
::
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Prefix Length]
64
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Gateway]
::
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[DNS]
::
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
CL4NX
[DNS]
CL6NX
[Proxy]
[Wi-Fi]
[IPv4]
[IPv6]
662
Setting Item
Initial Value
CL4NX
CL6NX
User
Reset
Factory
Reset
[Proxy]
[Enabled]
Disabled
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Server]
-
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Exclude]
-
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Button (PBC)]
-
-
-
[PIN]
-
-
-
[Device Name]
SATO_PRINTER
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Connect]
-
-
-
[Start Group]
-
-
-
[Remove Group]
-
-
-
[Disconnect]
-
-
-
[SSID]
DIRECT-xxSATO_PRINTER
-
-
[IP Address]
x.x.x.x
-
-
[Passphrase]
xxxxxxx
-
-
[SSID]
SATO_PRINTER
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Hidden SSID]
Enabled
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Mode]
Ad-hoc
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Channel]
6
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Security]
None
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Wi-Fi Protected Setup]
[Wi-Fi Direct]
[WEP Conf.]
663
[Interface] Menu
Setting Item
Initial Value
CL4NX
CL6NX
User
Reset
Factory
Reset
[Authentication]
Open System
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Key Index]
1
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Key #1]-[Key #4]
-
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[WPA Authentication]
Personal (PSK)
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[PSK]
-
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[EAP Conf.]
-
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[EAP Mode]
FAST
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Inner Method]
MSCHAPv2
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Username]
-
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Password]
-
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Anon. Outer ID]
-
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Verify Server Cert.]
Enabled
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Private Key P/W]
-
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[PAC Auto Provisioning]
Disabled
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[PAC P/W]
-
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
Auto
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[WPA Conf.]
[EAP Conf.]
[Interface]
[Services]
664
Setting Item
Initial Value
CL4NX
CL6NX
User
Reset
Factory
Reset
[Ports]
[Port1]
1024
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Port2]
1025
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Port3]
9100
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Flow Control]
Status4 ENQ
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Multiple connections]
Disabled
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Legacy Status for Port 9100]
Disabled
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[BCC]
Disabled
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Enable]
Disabled
No
Yes
[Error]
Disabled
No
Yes
[Time Server IP]
0.0.0.0
No
Yes
[Enable]
Enabled
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[DNS Lookup]
Disabled
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Enable]
Disabled
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[FTP Timeout]
300 sec
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
-
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[NTP]
[LPD]
[FTP]
[SNMP]
[sysContact]
665
[Interface] Menu
Setting Item
Initial Value
CL4NX
CL6NX
User
Reset
Factory
Reset
[sysName]
-
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[sysLocation]
-
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
meters
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
Enabled
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[SNMP Version]
1|2c|3
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Community]
public
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[User]
rouser
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[User Security]
None
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Authentication Protocol]
MD5
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Authentication Passphrase]
mypassword
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Privacy Protocol]
DES
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Privacy Passphrase]
mypassword
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[SNMP Version]
Disabled
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Community]
private
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[User]
rwuser
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[User Security]
None
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[prtMarkerCounterUnit]
[Agent]
[Enable]
[Read-Only]
[Read-Write]
666
Setting Item
Initial Value
CL4NX
CL6NX
User
Reset
Factory
Reset
[Authentication Protocol]
MD5
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Authentication Passphrase]
mypassword
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Privacy Protocol]
DES
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Privacy Passphrase]
mypassword
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Enable]
Disabled
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[SNMP Version]
1
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[IP Version]
4
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Destinations]
1
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Destination 1]
0.0.0.0
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Destination 2]
0.0.0.0
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Destination 3]
0.0.0.0
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Community]
trapcom
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[User]
trapuser
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Engine ID]
Hex string generated
from MAC address
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Security]
None
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Authentication Protocol]
MD5
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Authentication Passphrase]
mypassword
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Traps]
667
[Interface] Menu
Setting Item
Initial Value
CL4NX
CL6NX
User
Reset
Factory
Reset
[Privacy Protocol]
DES
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Privacy Passphrase]
mypassword
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[SOS Mode]
Disabled
No
No
[Allow Remote Control]
Always
No
No
[SOS Association]
-
-
-
[Copy Log Files]
-
-
-
-
No
No
[Type]
Disabled
No
No
[Counter]
Head
No
No
[Meters]
1000
No
No
[Cuts]
10000
No
No
[Last Update]
0.0 km/0
No
No
[Next Update]
1.0 km/10000
No
No
[Current Value]
0.0 km/0
No
No
[Notifications]
1
No
No
[Weekday]
Monday
No
No
[Day]
1
No
No
[Time 1]
00:00
No
No
[Time 2]
00:00
No
No
[Time 3]
00:00
No
No
[Time]
00:00
No
No
[Update Screen]
Normal
No
No
[SOS Update]
-
-
-
[Online Services]
[Contact Information]
[Phone Number]
[Periodic Notification]
668
Setting Item
Initial Value
CL4NX
CL6NX
User
Reset
Factory
Reset
[Advanced]
[ARP Announcement]
[Additional]
Enabled
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Periodic]
Off
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Flow Control]
Status4 Multi
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[BCC]
Disabled
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Interface]
RS-232C
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Baudrate]
115200
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Parameters]
8-N-1
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Flow Control]
STATUS4
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[BCC]
Disabled
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Flow Control]
Status4
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[BCC]
Disabled
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Enable]
Enabled
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Name]
SATO
PRINTER_xxxxxxxx
(BD address)
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[IEEE1284]
[RS-232C]
[USB]
[Bluetooth]
669
[Interface] Menu
Setting Item
Initial Value
CL4NX
CL6NX
User
Reset
Factory
Reset
[PIN Code]
0000
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[BD Address]
xxxxxxxxxxxx
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Firm Version]
spp3_vX.YY
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Host BD Addr]
-
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Authentication]
None
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[ISI]
2048
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[ISW]
18
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[PSI]
2048
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[PSW]
18
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[CRC Mode]
Disabled
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Flow Control]
Status4 Multi
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[I/F Enable]
Enabled
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Ignore CR/LF]
Disabled
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Ignore CAN/DLE]
Disabled
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
Disabled
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
MODE1
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[NFC]
[External I/O]
[Enable]
[Signals]
[EXT 9PIN]
670
Setting Item
Initial Value
User
Reset
Factory
Reset
TYPE4
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Start Print]
PIN 5
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Reprint]
PIN 7
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
PIN 1
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
PIN 3
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
PIN 4
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Print Done]
PIN 6
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Offline]/[Qty]
PIN 9
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Ribbon Near End]
PIN 10
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Dispenser]
OFF
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Label Near End]
OFF
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
Disabled
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
CL4NX
[EXT Mode]
CL6NX
[Inputs]
[Outputs]
[Paper End]/
[Paper/Ribbon End] (If RFID is installed)
[Ribbon End]/
[RFID Tag Error] (If RFID is installed)
[Machine Error]/
[Machine/RFID Error] (If RFID is installed)
[EXT I/O Re-print]
[RFID]
-
[Antenna Pitch]
Standard
-
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Write Power]
10 dBm
-
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Read Power]
10 dBm
-
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
671
[Interface] Menu
Setting Item
Initial Value
User
Reset
Factory
Reset
CL4NX
CL6NX
[Tag Offset]
0 mm
-
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Reader Model]
XXXXXX
-
-
-
[Reader Version]
XXXXXX
-
-
-
[View]
[Memory Bank]
EPC
(UHF)/
USER
(HF)
-
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Retry Mode]
Retry
-
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Retries]
1
-
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Mark bad tags]
Enabled
-
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Non-RFID Warning]
Disabled
-
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Log RFID Data]
Disabled
-
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Data To Record]
EPC and
TID
-
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Output Error Mode]
Level
-
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Pulse Length]
100 ms
-
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Counters]
-
[Lifetime]
-
[Count Success]
000000
-
No
Yes
[Count Failure]
000000
-
No
Yes
[Count Total]
000000
-
No
Yes
[User]
-
[Count Success]
000000
-
Yes
Yes
[Count Failure]
000000
-
Yes
Yes
672
Setting Item
Initial Value
[Count Total]
CL4NX
CL6NX
000000
-
User
Reset
Factory
Reset
Yes
Yes
[Applications] Menu
The initial value refers to the setting value of the printer when it was shipped from the factory. If you
reset the printer, the setting values of the printer will change back to the factory default values. The
table below shows the initial value of each setting item and type of reset that changes the value back
to the initial value.
•
Normally, it is not necessary to perform the initialization. Doing so will remove all the
customer settings.
Setting Item
Initial Value
User
Reset
Factory
Reset
AUTO
Yes
Yes
[Show Error]
Disabled
Yes
Yes
[Standard Code]
Enabled
Yes
Yes
[Orientation]
Portrait
Yes
Yes
Enabled
Yes
Yes
GB18030
Yes
Yes
GB18030
Yes
Yes
Gothic
Yes
Yes
[Proportional]
Enabled
Yes
Yes
[Code Page]
858
Yes
Yes
[€]
d5
Yes
Yes
[M-8400 Compatibility]
Disabled
Yes
Yes
[CODE128(C) Zero Fill]
Disabled
Yes
Yes
CL4NX
[Protocol]
CL6NX
[SBPL]
[Font Settings]
[Zero Slash]
[Kanji]
[Kanji Set]
[Character Code]
[Kanji Style]
[Compatible]
673
[Applications] Menu
Setting Item
Initial Value
CL4NX
CL6NX
User
Reset
Factory
Reset
[Kanji Command]
Disabled
Yes
Yes
[Call Font/Logo]
Disabled
Yes
Yes
[ENQ Reply Delay]
0 ms
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[ENQ Reply Cycle]
500 ms
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Shift]
0 dot
Yes
Yes
[Top]
0 dot
Yes
Yes
[Caret]
94 (^)
Yes
Yes
[Delimiter]
44 (,)
Yes
Yes
[Tilde]
126 (~)
Yes
Yes
[Clock Format]
(none)
Yes
Yes
[Code Page]
1252
Yes
Yes
[New Font Encoding]
Disabled
Yes
Yes
[c20 Proportional Pitch]
Disabled
Yes
Yes
[Zero Slash]
Disabled
Yes
Yes
[Format Save]
Enabled
Yes
Yes
[Control Code]
Auto
Yes
Yes
[1st Byte Code]
27
Yes
Yes
[2nd Byte Code]
10
Yes
Yes
[3rd Byte Code]
0
Yes
Yes
[SZPL]
[Label]
[SIPL]
[Font Settings]
[STCL]
[Command Head]
[Font Settings]
674
Setting Item
Initial Value
CL4NX
CL6NX
User
Reset
Factory
Reset
[Zero Slash]
Disabled
Yes
Yes
[€]
d5
Yes
Yes
[Code Page]
850
Yes
Yes
[Half-width Symbol]
Enabled
Yes
Yes
[Rotation]
0 degree
Yes
Yes
[Ignore Paper Size Command]
Disabled
Yes
Yes
[Code Type]
Standard
Yes
Yes
[SOH]
01
Yes
Yes
[STX]
02
Yes
Yes
[CR]
0D
Yes
Yes
[CNTBY]
5E
Yes
Yes
[Label Rotation]
0 degree
Yes
Yes
[SOP Emulation]
Auto
Yes
Yes
[TTF]
Disabled
Yes
Yes
[Graphics]
Disabled
Yes
Yes
Auto
Yes
Yes
[Format Attribute]
Commands
Yes
Yes
[Pause Mode]
Commands
Yes
Yes
[1 Byte Codepage]
Commands
Yes
Yes
[SDPL Measure Unit]
Commands
Yes
Yes
[Scalable Font Style]
Commands
Yes
Yes
[Darkness]
Commands
Yes
Yes
[Factory Offset]
Commands
Yes
Yes
[SDPL]
[Control Code]
[Compatible Mode]
[Right-to-Left print]
[Prioritize]
675
[System] Menu
Setting Item
Initial Value
CL4NX
CL6NX
User
Reset
Factory
Reset
[Speed]
Commands
Yes
Yes
[Sensor Type]
Commands
Yes
Yes
[Format Attribute]
XOR
Yes
Yes
[Pause Mode]
Disabled
Yes
Yes
[1 Byte Codepage]
CP 850
Yes
Yes
[SDPL Measure Unit]
Inch
Yes
Yes
[Bold]
Disabled
Yes
Yes
[Italic]
Disabled
Yes
Yes
[Horz. Offset]
0 dot
Yes
Yes
[Vert. Offset]
0 dot
Yes
Yes
[Memory Device]
Internal FLASH
Yes
Yes
[Sim. 300 DPI Head]
Disabled
Yes
Yes
[Enable]
Disabled
No
Yes
[Start Application]
Standard
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
[Scalable Font Style]
[SEPL]
[Home Reference]
[AEP]
(/rom/standalone/sa.lua)
[Label Rotation]
Disabled
[System] Menu
The initial value refers to the setting value of the printer when it was shipped from the factory. If you
reset the printer, the setting values of the printer will change back to the factory default values. The
table below shows the initial value of each setting item and type of reset that changes the value back
to the initial value.
•
Normally, it is not necessary to perform the initialization. Doing so will remove all the
customer settings.
676
Setting Item
Initial Value
CL4NX
CL6NX
User
Reset
Factory
Reset
[Regional]
[Messages]
English, US
Yes
Yes
[USB Keyboard]
English, US
Yes
Yes
[Locale]
English, US
Yes
Yes
[Unit]
dot
Yes
Yes
[Time]
00:00
No
No
[Date]
(2000-01-01)
No
No
[Time Zone]
-
Yes
Yes
[Region]
Europe
Yes
Yes
[City]
London
Yes
Yes
[Clean Printhead]
Disabled
Yes
Yes
[Cleaning Interval]
400 m
Yes
Yes
[Change Printhead]
Disabled
Yes
Yes
[Printhead Interval]
100 km
Yes
Yes
[Change Cutter]
Disabled
Yes
Yes
[Cutter Life]
1000 Kcuts
Yes
Yes
[Change Platen]
Disabled
Yes
Yes
[Platen Interval]
100 km
Yes
Yes
Medium
Yes
Yes
60 min
Yes
Yes
[Notifications]
[Clean Printhead]
[Change Printhead]
[Change Cutter]
[Change Platen]
[Sound]
[Error Sound]
[Energy Saving]
[Sleep Timeout]
677
[Tools] Menu
Setting Item
Initial Value
CL4NX
CL6NX
User
Reset
Factory
Reset
[LCD Brightness]
7
No
Yes
[Show Total Count]
Disabled
Yes
Yes
[Password Enable]
Disabled
No
Yes
[Install Security]
Disabled
No
Yes
[NFC Security]
None
Yes
Yes
Disabled
No
Yes
[Password]
[Start on AC]
[Tools] Menu
The initial value refers to the setting value of the printer when it was shipped from the factory. If you
reset the printer, the setting values of the printer will change back to the factory default values. The
table below shows the initial value of each setting item and type of reset that changes the value back
to the initial value.
•
Normally, it is not necessary to perform the initialization. Doing so will remove all the
customer settings.
Setting Item
Initial Value
CL4NX
CL6NX
User
Reset
Factory
Reset
[Test Print]
[Factory]
[Label Width]
Large
-
-
[Pitch]
0 dot
No
No
[Offset]
0 dot
No
No
[Darkness Adjust]
50
No
No
[Label Width]
Small
-
-
[Label Length]
203 dpi
Yes
Yes
[Configure List]
203 dpi
800 dots
305 dpi
800 dots
305 dpi
1200 dots
678
1200 dots
Setting Item
Initial Value
CL4NX
CL6NX
User
Reset
Factory
Reset
609 dpi
2400 dots
[Pitch]
0 dot
No
No
[Offset]
0 dot
No
No
[Darkness Adjust]
50
No
No
[Label Width]
Small
-
-
[Label Length]
203 dpi
Yes
Yes
[Configure QR]
203 dpi
800 dots
305 dpi
800 dots
305 dpi
1200 dots
1200 dots
609 dpi
2400 dots
[Pitch]
0 dot
No
No
[Offset]
0 dot
No
No
[Darkness Adjust]
50
No
No
[Label Width]
Small
-
-
[Label Length]
203 dpi
Yes
Yes
[Paper Sensor]
203 dpi
800 dots
305 dpi
800 dots
305 dpi
1200 dots
1200 dots
609 dpi
2400 dots
[Pitch]
0 dot
No
No
[Offset]
0 dot
No
No
[Darkness Adjust]
50
No
No
[HEX-Dump]
679
[Tools] Menu
Setting Item
Initial Value
User
Reset
Factory
Reset
Disabled
Yes
Yes
[Delete]
-
-
-
[Load]
-
-
-
[Save]
-
-
-
[Start with]
-
Yes
Yes
[Certificates]
-
Yes/
Interface
Yes
[Mode]
Disabled
Yes
Yes
[Start Position]
203 dpi
Yes
Yes
CL4NX
[Hex Dump Mode]
CL6NX
[Reset]
[Profiles]
[Barcode Checker]
[Settings]
203 dpi
72 dots
72 dots
305 dpi
305 dpi
108 dots
108 dots
609 dpi
216 dots
[VOID Print]
Disabled
Yes
Yes
[Retry Count]
0
Yes
Yes
[Host Notification]
Disabled
Yes
Yes
[Copy]
-
-
-
[Remove]
-
-
-
[Clone]
Excl. LAN/Wi-Fi/IP
No
No
[Startup Guide]
Enabled
No
Yes
[Logs]
680
[Information] Menu
The initial value refers to the setting value of the printer when it was shipped from the factory. If you
reset the printer, the setting values of the printer will change back to the factory default values. The
table below shows the initial value of each setting item and type of reset that changes the value back
to the initial value.
•
Normally, it is not necessary to perform the initialization. Doing so will remove all the
customer settings.
Setting Item
Initial Value
CL4NX
CL6NX
User
Reset
Factory
Reset
[Help]
-
-
-
[Build Version]
-
-
-
[Applications]
-
-
-
[Installation Log]
-
-
-
[Print Module]
-
-
-
[Counters]
-
-
-
[Head]
-
-
-
[Life]
Measured value
No
No
[Head 1]
Measured value
No
No
[Head 2]
Measured value
No
No
[Head 3]
Measured value
No
No
0
No
No
[Cutter]
681
Cleaning
Maintenance
Cleaning the Printer
Cleaning
A dirty print head or platen roller not only affects the print quality but also causes errors. Use a
cleaning kit or cleaning sheet to clean the printer regularly.
•
Do not touch the power button, connect or disconnect the power cord while your hands
are wet. Doing so could cause an electric shock.
•
Disconnect the power cord from the AC outlet before you begin cleaning.
The print head and its surroundings are hot after printing. Wait until the printer cools
down.
•
Touching the edge of the print head with your bare hand could cause injury.
•
Be careful not to touch the cutter blade when cleaning the printer.
•
Use a cleaning pen, cotton swab or cotton cloth from a cleaning kit to clean. Do not
clean with a hard object. Doing so could cause damage.
•
Remove the media and ribbon before cleaning.
CAUTION for CL4NX only (if installed with linerless cutter kit)
•
Open the print head if the printer is not used for printing for more than one day. Paper
jam might occur in the next printing if the print head is closed for a long period with
linerless label loaded.
•
When loading linerless label, make sure that the front end of the media extends about
3 cm (1.18") out the media discharge outlet.
•
The printer cleaning kit and cleaning sheet are optional. Contact your SATO reseller or
technical support center to purchase the options.
682
Cleaning the Print Head and Platen Roller
Cleaning Intervals
Clean the printer at the following regular intervals.
•
•
The below cleaning intervals are only for reference. Clean the printer when necessary
even if you are not at a regular interval.
After you print one media roll or print media for 150 meters (492.1 feet).
Use the cleaning kit to clean following parts:
◦
Print head
◦
Platen roller
◦
Media sensors
◦
Media guide
•
After you print six media rolls or print media for 900 meters (2952.8 feet).
Use the cleaning sheet to clean the following parts:
◦
Print head
◦
Platen roller
Use the cleaning kit to clean following parts:
◦
Media route
◦
Ribbon route
Cleaning interval for the optional linerless cutter kit (CL4NX only) is as follows:
•
After you print one media roll or whenever there is any glue residue or paper dust on the media
route.
Use the cleaning kit to clean following parts:
◦
Print head
◦
Media guide
◦
Media sensors
◦
Guide rollers
•
There is no need of cleaning the linerless platen roller unless it is significantly soiled.
Cleaning Using the Cleaning Kit
The cleaning procedure using the cleaning kit is as follows:
683
Cleaning Using the Cleaning Kit
•
Never use organic solvents, such as thinner and benzine to clean the printer.
•
For details on the cleaning kit, refer to the manual attached to the cleaning kit.
1. Make sure that the printer is powered off, and disconnect the power cord from the
AC outlet.
2. Open the top cover.
•
Open the top cover fully to prevent accidental drop of the cover.
3. Push the head lock lever (1) towards the rear to unlock the print head.
•
The print head and its surroundings are hot after printing. Be careful not to touch it, to
avoid being burned.
•
Touching the edge of the print head with your bare hand could cause injury.
4. Remove the media and ribbon if they are already loaded.
684
5. Clean the dirt on the print head (2), platen roller (3) and ribbon roller (4) using a
cleaning pen or a cotton swab dabbed with cleaning liquid.
6. Tilt the sensor guide lock (5) down and pull out the media sensor guide (6).
7. Clean the bottom of the media sensor guide using the cotton cloth dabbed with
cleaning liquid.
685
Cleaning the Optional Linerless Cutter Kit (CL4NX only)
8. Clean the media sensor (7) using the cotton cloth dabbed with cleaning liquid.
9. Return the media sensor guide to its original position and tilt the sensor guide lock
up to the locked position.
Cleaning the Optional Linerless Cutter Kit (CL4NX only)
If the optional linerless cutter kit is installed, follow the procedure below to clean the printer:
1. Clean the media guide (1) and inner surface (2) that is in contact to the label edge
using the cotton cloth dabbed with cleaning liquid.
686
2. Clean the guide rollers (3) using the cotton cloth dabbed with cleaning liquid.
Rotate the guide rollers to clean the whole areas of them.
Cleaning Using the Cleaning Sheet
The cleaning procedure using the cleaning sheet is as follows:
1. Make sure that the printer is powered off, and disconnect the power cord from the
AC outlet.
2. Open the top cover.
•
Open the top cover fully to prevent accidental drop of the cover.
3. Push the head lock lever (1) towards the rear to unlock the print head.
•
The print head and its surroundings are hot after printing. Be careful not to touch it, to
avoid being burned.
•
Touching the edge of the print head with your bare hand could cause injury.
687
Cleaning Using the Cleaning Sheet
4. Remove the media and ribbon if they are already loaded.
5. Place the cleaning sheet (2) between the print head and the platen roller.
•
Align the rough side of the cleaning sheet adjacent to the print head.
6. Press the print head down until you lock the head lock lever in place.
7. Using two hands, pull the cleaning sheet away from the printer.
688
8. After you pull out the cleaning sheet, repeat steps 5 through 7, two or three more
times.
When no more dirt appears on the cleaning sheet after you have pulled it out, stop repeating these
steps.
9. Push the head lock lever (1) towards the rear to unlock the print head.
10. Use a cleaning pen (3) to clean the dirt on the print head.
689
Replacing the Print Head
Replacing Consumable Parts
Replacing the Print Head
You can easily remove and replace a damaged or worn print head.
•
Do not touch the power button, connect or disconnect the power cord while your hands
are wet. Doing so could cause an electric shock.
•
Disconnect the power cord from the AC outlet before you replace the print head.
•
Wear gloves before replacing the print head, to prevent damage to the print head.
1. Make sure that the printer is powered off, and disconnect the power cord from the
AC outlet.
2. Open the top cover.
•
Open the top cover fully to prevent accidental drop of the cover.
3. Push the head lock lever (1) towards the rear to unlock the print head.
•
The print head and its surroundings are hot after printing. Be careful not to touch it, to
avoid being burned.
•
Touching the edge of the print head with your bare hand could cause injury.
4. Remove the media and ribbon if they are already loaded.
690
5. Press the lever (2) to remove the print head (3).
•
For CL4NX UHF RFID models, the UHF RFID antenna is installed on the print head.
Be careful not to overly pull the antenna cable when replacing the print head. Contact
your SATO reseller, dealer, or technical support center for more information.
6. Disconnect all the connectors (4) from the defective print head (3).
In total, there are two connectors for CL4NX and three connectors for CL6NX.
7. Connect all the connectors (4) to the new print head.
•
Handle the print head with care. Do not contaminate or scratch the sensitive print head
surface.
8. Install the new print head.
Install the print head so that it is locked with a click sound.
9. Load the media and ribbon back if you remove them in step 4.
691
Replacing the Platen Roller
Replacing the Platen Roller
You can easily remove and replace a damaged or worn platen roller.
•
Do not touch the power button, connect or disconnect the power cord while your hands
are wet. Doing so could cause an electric shock.
•
Disconnect the power cord from the AC outlet before you replace the platen roller.
Guideline to Replace the Linerless Platen Roller (CL4NX only)
The linerless platen roller has a blue striped marking on the left side. When the blue striped marking
started to fade off, it indicates that you should replace the linerless platen roller.
•
This is only a general guideline. The condition in which the platen roller wears out
varies depending on the used media. In any cases, replace the worn platen roller when
it affected the printing quality of the printer.
1. Make sure that the printer is powered off, and disconnect the power cord from the
AC outlet.
2. Open the top cover.
•
Open the top cover fully to prevent accidental drop of the cover.
3. Push the head lock lever (1) towards the rear to unlock the print head.
•
The print head and its surroundings are hot after printing. Be careful not to touch it, to
avoid being burned.
•
Touching the edge of the print head with your bare hand could cause injury.
692
4. Lift the lever (2) in the direction A to unlock the platen roller (3), and then pull out
the platen roller (3) in the direction B.
5. Install the new platen roller.
a. Make sure that the tab (4) on the left driving end of the platen roller is pointing upward. Push the
platen roller in the direction C so that the tab (4) is fixed in the groove (5) at the driving side.
693
Replacing the Platen Roller
b. Next, make sure that the tab (6) on the right driven end of the platen roller is pointing upward.
Push the platen roller again in the direction C so that the tab (6) is fixed in the groove (7) at the
driven side.
6. Turn the lever (2) back to lock the platen roller.
694
Operating the Notification Screen of SOS (SATO Online
Services) (SOS users only)
Operating the Notification Screen of the SOS (SATO Online Services)
On-Demand Mode (SOS users only)
In the SOS (SATO Online Services) function, the printer information is sent to the SOS cloud and
monitored and managed.
The status icon
and the notification screen appears at the time specified when [SOS Mode] is
set to [On-Demand] in [Interface] > [Network] > [Services] > [Online Services] menu and [Periodic
Notification] is enabled. A QR code with the printer information is displayed on the notification screen.
You can send the printer information to the SOS cloud by scanning the QR code with a tablet or a
smartphone.
The following shows how to operate the notification screen. The soft key function changes according
to the setting of [Update Screen].
When [Update Screen] Is Set to [Normal]
By pressing the
button, the display returns to the Offline screen without resetting the QR
code for periodic notification.
The status icon remains
By pressing the
to the Offline screen.
.
button, the QR code for periodic notification is reset and the display returns
The status icon changes to
.
695
Operating the Notification Screen of the SOS (SATO Online Services) On-Demand Mode (SOS users only)
When [Update Screen] Is Set to [Print]
By pressing the
to the Offline screen.
button, the QR code for periodic notification is reset and the display returns
The status icon changes to
By pressing the
•
.
button, the QR code for periodic notification is printed.
QR codes can also be displayed from [SOS Update].
696
Operating the Date and Time Settings Notification Screen of SOS (SATO
Online Services) (SOS users only)
To use the SOS (SATO Online Services) function, date and time settings of the printer must be set
correctly. A notification screen appears when there is a problem with the date and time settings and
the printer cannot connect to SOS. Follow the steps on the screen and set the date and time correctly.
1. Press the
button on the notification screen.
Clear the NTP server connection problem when the NTP function is enabled. The notification
screen appears every 15 seconds until the NTP server connection problem is cleared.
Date and time setting screen appears when the NTP function is disabled or the optional RTC kit is
installed. Proceed to step 2.
2. Set the correct date and press the
Select the digit for input using the
/
/
button.
buttons and select the number to input using the
buttons.
697
Operating the Date and Time Settings Notification Screen of SOS (SATO Online Services) (SOS users only)
3. Set the correct time and press the
Select the digit for input using the
/
/
button.
buttons and select the number to input using the
buttons.
•
SOS will not operate if you cancel the date and time settings by pressing the
button on the notification screen. To display the notification screen again, reboot the
printer or change the setting of [On-Demand]/[Real-Time] in [SOS Mode] a few times to
reboot the SOS function.
698
SOS (SATO Online Services) Application (SOS users only)
How to Install the SOS Mobile Application
When the SOS (SATO Online Services) mode is enabled on the printer, a QR code is displayed on
the screen at the time of the error outbreak or the timing that is set to perform periodic notification. By
scanning the QR code with a tablet or a smartphone, you can check how to clear the error according
to the current printer information in the QR code. You can also contact your SATO technical support
center directly from this specialized application by phone or e-mail.
For instructions on installing the SOS mobile application, refer to the SOS Portal Site.
http://www.sato-sos.com/en/support/
How to Use the SOS Mobile Application
For instructions on using the SOS mobile application, refer to the SOS user manual.
http://www.sato-sos.com/en/support/sos_usermanual.pdf
699
When an Error Message Appears
When You Are in Trouble
When an Error Message Appears
Error Message 1001 (Machine Error)
When there is an error with the printer, the error message appears on the screen.
Check the cause and countermeasure, and then take appropriate action.
To clear the error:
Power off the printer.
Cause and Countermeasure
Cause
A defect has occurred in the printer.
Countermeasure
Power on the printer again.
Powering On/Off the Printer
Contact your SATO technical support center if the error cannot be resolved.
Contact Information for When You Are in Trouble
700
Error Message 1003 (Parity Error)
When there is an error with the printer, the error message appears on the screen.
Check the cause and countermeasure, and then take appropriate action.
To clear the error:
Press the
button (OFFLINE) or
button, or adjust the settings.
Cause and Countermeasure
Cause (1)
RS-232C settings are incorrect.
Countermeasure (1)
Set the interface settings of the printer again.
RS-232C
Cause (2)
The RS-232C cable is not connected correctly.
Countermeasure (2)
Power off the printer, connect the RS-232C cable correctly, and then power on the printer again.
Powering On/Off the Printer
RS-232C Interface Connection (Standard)
Contact your SATO technical support center if the error cannot be resolved.
Contact Information for When You Are in Trouble
701
Error Message 1004 (Overrun Error)
When there is an error with the printer, the error message appears on the screen.
Check the cause and countermeasure, and then take appropriate action.
To clear the error:
Press the
button (OFFLINE) or
button, or adjust the settings.
Cause and Countermeasure
Cause (1)
RS-232C settings are incorrect.
Countermeasure (1)
Set the interface settings of the printer again.
RS-232C
Cause (2)
The RS-232C cable is not connected correctly.
Countermeasure (2)
Power off the printer, connect the RS-232C cable correctly, and then power on the printer again.
Powering On/Off the Printer
RS-232C Interface Connection (Standard)
Contact your SATO technical support center if the error cannot be resolved.
Contact Information for When You Are in Trouble
702
Error Message 1005 (Framing Error)
When there is an error with the printer, the error message appears on the screen.
Check the cause and countermeasure, and then take appropriate action.
To clear the error:
Press the
button (OFFLINE) or
button, or adjust the settings.
Cause and Countermeasure
Cause (1)
RS-232C settings are incorrect.
Countermeasure (1)
Set the interface settings of the printer again.
RS-232C
Cause (2)
The RS-232C cable is not connected correctly.
Countermeasure (2)
Power off the printer, connect the RS-232C cable correctly, and then power on the printer again.
Powering On/Off the Printer
RS-232C Interface Connection (Standard)
Contact your SATO technical support center if the error cannot be resolved.
Contact Information for When You Are in Trouble
703
Error Message 1006 (Buffer Overflow)
When there is an error with the printer, the error message appears on the screen.
Check the cause and countermeasure, and then take appropriate action.
To clear the error:
Press the
button (OFFLINE) or
button.
Cause and Countermeasure
Cause (1)
The size of the received data from the host exceeds the size of the receive buffer.
Countermeasure (1)
Change the settings on the host so that data that exceeds the size of the receive buffer cannot be
sent.
Cause (2)
The interface settings between the printer and the host are incorrect.
Countermeasure (2)
Set the interface settings of the printer and host again.
Interface Menu
Contact your SATO technical support center if the error cannot be resolved.
Contact Information for When You Are in Trouble
704
Error Message 1007 (Head Open)
When there is an error with the printer, the error message appears on the screen.
Check the cause and countermeasure, and then take appropriate action.
To clear the error:
Lock the print head.
Cause and Countermeasure
Cause
◦
The print head is unlocked.
◦
The sensor for detecting the open/close status of the print head is defective.
Countermeasure
Unlock the print head once, and then lock it again.
1. Push the head lock lever (1) towards the rear.
2. Press the print head down until the head lock lever is locked.
705
Cause and Countermeasure
Contact your SATO technical support center if the error cannot be resolved.
Contact Information for When You Are in Trouble
706
Error Message 1008 (Out of Paper)
When there is an error with the printer, the error message appears on the screen.
Check the cause and countermeasure, and then take appropriate action.
To clear the error:
Load the media and open/close the print head, or press the
button.
Cause and Countermeasure
Cause (1)
The media is not loaded.
Countermeasure (1)
Load the media.
Loading the Media
Cause (2)
The media is not loaded correctly.
Countermeasure (2)
Load the media correctly.
Loading the Media
Cause (3)
The media sensor level is not set correctly.
Countermeasure (3)
Adjust the media sensor level.
Calibrate
Cause (4)
The media has jammed.
707
button (OFFLINE) or the
Cause and Countermeasure
Countermeasure (4)
Remove the jammed media.
Refer to the video for loading the media, for the media path, and for the operation of each part
inside the printer.
Loading the Media
Cause (5)
The media sensor is not operating correctly.
◦
The media sensor is dirty, or there is a label attached to it.
◦
The media sensor has poor sensitivity.
Countermeasure (5)
Clean the media sensor.
Cleaning Using the Cleaning Kit
Contact your SATO technical support center if the error cannot be resolved.
Contact Information for When You Are in Trouble
708
Error Message 1009 (Ribbon End)
When there is an error with the printer, the error message appears on the screen.
Check the cause and countermeasure, and then take appropriate action.
To clear the error:
Load the ribbon correctly and close the print head, or press the
button.
Cause and Countermeasure
Cause (1)
The ribbon is not loaded.
Countermeasure (1)
Load the ribbon.
Loading Ribbon
Cause (2)
The ribbon is not loaded correctly.
Countermeasure (2)
Load the ribbon and the media correctly.
Loading Ribbon
Loading the Media
Cause (3)
There is no ribbon.
Countermeasure (3)
Load a new ribbon.
Loading Ribbon
709
button (OFFLINE) or
Cause and Countermeasure
Cause (4)
The ribbon sensor is not operating correctly.
◦
The ribbon sensor is dirty.
◦
The ribbon sensor has poor sensitivity.
Countermeasure (4)
Power on the printer again.
Powering On/Off the Printer
Contact your SATO technical support center if the error cannot be resolved.
Contact Information for When You Are in Trouble
710
Error Message 1010 (Media Error)
When there is an error with the printer, the error message appears on the screen.
Check the cause and countermeasure, and then take appropriate action.
To clear the error:
Open/close the print head, or press the
button (OFFLINE) or the
Cause and Countermeasure
Cause (1)
The media size of the print data and the actual media size are different.
Countermeasure (1)
Check the media size of the print data and the actual media size again.
If the error is not solved, power on the printer again.
Cause (2)
The media size of the print data is longer than the actual media size.
Countermeasure (2)
Check the print data.
If the error is not solved, power on the printer again.
Cause (3)
The media is fed a longer distance due to the incorrect sensor level.
Countermeasure (3)
Adjust the media sensor level.
Calibrate
If the error is not solved, power on the printer again.
Contact your SATO technical support center if the error cannot be resolved.
Contact Information for When You Are in Trouble
711
button.
Error Message 1012 (Head Error)
When there is an error with the printer, the error message appears on the screen.
Check the cause and countermeasure, and then take appropriate action.
To clear the error:
Power off the printer, or change print head check conditions.
To forcibly clear the head error and resume printing, press and hold the
until the progress bar on the blue line of the button reaches to the right end.
button (DISMISS)
Cause and Countermeasure
Cause (1)
The print elements are worn out.
Countermeasure (1)
Power off the printer, or change print head check conditions to only check for missing elements in
barcodes and try to adjust missing elements to white bars.
Powering On/Off the Printer
Head Check
Cause (2)
The print head is defective.
Countermeasure (2)
Replace the print head.
Replacing the Print Head
Contact your SATO technical support center if the error cannot be resolved.
Contact Information for When You Are in Trouble
•
For the outputted label after the head error, perform the scanner reader of the printed
barcode to check the label.
712
Error Message 1013 (USB R/W Error)
When there is an error with the printer, the error message appears on the screen.
Check the cause and countermeasure, and then take appropriate action.
To clear the error:
Connect the USB memory and then disconnect it, or press the
button (OFFLINE) or the
button.
Cause and Countermeasure
Cause (1)
The USB memory is disconnected while writing.
Countermeasure (1)
Connect the USB memory.
Cause (2)
The copy area in the USB memory is not sufficient.
Countermeasure (2)
Make sure that the USB memory has sufficient copy area.
Cause (3)
Writing to the USB memory fails.
Countermeasure (3)
Replace the USB memory.
Cause (4)
The USB memory is not formatted.
Countermeasure (4)
Format the USB memory.
Contact your SATO technical support center if the error cannot be resolved.
713
Contact Information for When You Are in Trouble
714
Error Message 1014 (USB Memory Full)
When there is an error with the printer, the error message appears on the screen.
Check the cause and countermeasure, and then take appropriate action.
To clear the error:
Connect the USB memory with sufficient space, or press the
button.
button (OFFLINE) or
Cause and Countermeasure
Cause
The space in the USB memory is not sufficient.
Countermeasure
Delete unwanted data from the USB memory.
Contact your SATO technical support center if the error cannot be resolved.
Contact Information for When You Are in Trouble
715
Error Message 1015 (Cutter Error)
When there is an error with the printer, the error message appears on the screen.
Check the cause and countermeasure, and then take appropriate action.
To clear the error:
Press the
button (FEED).
Cause and Countermeasure
Cause (1)
A media jam has occurred in the cutter unit.
Countermeasure (1)
Remove the jammed media from the cutter unit.
Refer to the video for loading the media, for the media path, and for the operation of each part
inside the printer.
•
Be careful not to cause injury with the cutter blade when removing the media.
Loading the Media with the Optional Cutter Unit
If the error is not solved, power on the printer again.
Cause (2)
The cutter blade does not return to the specified position.
Countermeasure (2)
Press the
button (FEED) to move the cutter blade back to the specified position.
If the error is not solved, power on the printer again.
Contact your SATO technical support center if the error cannot be resolved.
Contact Information for When You Are in Trouble
716
Error Message 1016 (Cutter Cover Open)
When there is an error with the printer, the error message appears on the screen.
Check the cause and countermeasure, and then take appropriate action.
To clear the error:
Close the cutter.
Cause and Countermeasure
Cause (1)
The cutter-open lever is open.
Countermeasure (1)
Close and lock the cutter-open lever.
Loading the Media with the Optional Cutter Unit
Cause (2)
The cutter unit is defective.
Countermeasure (2)
Power on the printer again.
Powering On/Off the Printer
Contact your SATO technical support center if the error cannot be resolved.
Contact Information for When You Are in Trouble
717
Error Message 1017 (SBPL Command Error)
When there is an error with the printer, the error message appears on the screen.
Check the cause and countermeasure, and then take appropriate action.
To clear the error:
Press the
button (CANCEL) or
button.
Cause and Countermeasure
Cause
Incorrect command or parameter in the print data.
For details of the error, check the "Caaa: <bb>: cc" part at the bottom of the screen.
◦
Caaa: position of error occurrence
◦
<bb>: error command name
◦
cc: error content
How to See the Command Error Information
Countermeasure
Check the print data.
If the error is not solved, power on the printer again.
•
The command error appears when [Show Error] in [SBPL] under the [Applications]
menu is set to [Enabled].
Show Error
Contact your SATO technical support center if the error cannot be resolved.
Contact Information for When You Are in Trouble
718
How to See the Command Error Information
•
Location of error occurrence
"Caaa" in the command error message shows the location of command error.
The number of ESC commands from ESC+A is shown in "aaa".
Note that the ESC+A command is not included in the number of ESC commands, which can be
shown up to 999.
When a command error is detected by the Horizontal Print Position <H> command.
------: [ESC]A
C001: [ESC]V100
C002: [ESC]H99999
C003: [ESC]L0202
C004: [ESC]M,ABCDEF
C005: [ESC]Q1
C006: [ESC]Z
In this case, C002 is the location of the error.
•
Error command name
The command name is shown in "<bb>". Error is detected in the command name.
◦
A one-byte command name is left aligned
•
Error description
The cause of command error appears in "cc" in the error message ("Caaa:<bb>:cc").
Description ("cc")
Cause
Invalid command
Analyzed improper command.
Invalid parameter
Received improper parameter.
Command table read
error
Failed to read the command table.
Invalid graphic data/
custom designed data
Analyzed improper graphic and custom designed data.
Invalid registration
area
•
Specified memory area (card slot) is inappropriate.
•
Tried to write to a write-protected media.
This number is
already registered.
Number specified by registration command has already been taken.
Over registration area
limit
Exceeded the registration area. (Memory full)
Data is not registered
Data is not registered.
719
Description ("cc")
Cause
Printing position is out
of printable area
The specified print start position is outside the printable area.
Barcode image is out
of printable area
The printing image is outside the printable area. (Barcode only)
720
Error Message 1018 (RFID Tag Error) (CL4NX only)
When there is an error with the printer, the error message appears on the screen.
Check the cause and countermeasure, and then take appropriate action.
Before the number of encoding attempts specified in [Retries]
After the number of encoding attempts specified in [Retries]
To clear the error:
Press the
button (ABORT) or
button (RETRY) when they are available. The error
message appears each time the error occurs, but the buttons are not shown until the number of the
printer's encoding attempts reaches the value specified in [RFID] > [Retries] in the [Interface] menu.
Retries
Cause and Countermeasure
Cause
Could not read/write to the RFID inlay.
Countermeasure
Discard this tag.
Contact your SATO technical support center if the error cannot be resolved.
Contact Information for When You Are in Trouble
721
Error Message 1019 (RFID System Error) (CL4NX only)
When there is an error with the printer, the error message appears on the screen.
Check the cause and countermeasure, and then take appropriate action.
To clear the error:
Power off the printer.
Cause and Countermeasure
Cause
RFID module is not operating correctly.
Countermeasure
Repair or replacement of the RFID module is required. Contact your SATO technical support
center.
Contact Information for When You Are in Trouble
722
Error Message 1020 (Calendar Error)
When there is an error with the printer, the error message appears on the screen.
Check the cause and countermeasure, and then take appropriate action.
To clear the error:
Change the calendar settings, press the
printer.
button (OFFLINE) or
button, or power off the
Cause and Countermeasure
Cause
The date and time of the calendar are incorrect.
Countermeasure
Power on the printer again, and check the print data.
Powering On/Off the Printer
If the error persists, you should check if you have installed the RTC kit or replace the RTC PCB.
Contact your SATO technical support center.
Contact Information for When You Are in Trouble
723
Error Message 1021 (BCC Check Error)
When there is an error with the printer, the error message appears on the screen.
Check the cause and countermeasure, and then take appropriate action.
To clear the error:
Press the
button (CANCEL) or
button.
Cause and Countermeasure
Cause
The BCC code of the data to be sent (one item) is incorrect.
Countermeasure
Check the data to be sent and interface settings.
◦
button: Continue printing from the print data where the BCC error occurred.
◦
Cancel button: Cancel the print data where the BCC error occurred, and continue printing from
the next item.
◦
Send the SUB command: Clear the BCC error and continue printing from where it stopped.
◦
Send the CAN command: Cancel the print data where the BCC error occurred and continue
printing from the next item.
Contact your SATO technical support center if the error cannot be resolved.
Contact Information for When You Are in Trouble
724
Error Message 1022 (Print Head Overheated)
When there is an error with the printer, the error message appears on the screen.
Check the cause and countermeasure, and then take appropriate action.
To clear the error:
Stop the operation of the printer to let the temperature decrease.
Cause and Countermeasure
Cause
The temperature of the printer has exceeded its tolerance value.
Countermeasure
Stop the operation of the printer to let the temperature decrease.
Contact your SATO technical support center if the error cannot be resolved.
Contact Information for When You Are in Trouble
725
Error Message 1023 (NTP Error)
When there is an error with the printer, the error message appears on the screen.
Check the cause and countermeasure, and then take appropriate action.
To clear the error:
Press the
button (OFFLINE) or change the calendar setting.
Cause and Countermeasure
Cause
Could not connect to the time server and set the calendar clock.
Countermeasure
◦
Confirm that the address of the time server is correct.
Time Server IP
◦
Confirm that there is a connection to the time server.
◦
If RTC kit is installed, the calendar can be set manually and operation resumed without NTP
functionality.
Regional
Contact your SATO technical support center if the error cannot be resolved.
Contact Information for When You Are in Trouble
726
Error Message 1024 (Head Density Changed)
When there is an error with the printer, the error message appears on the screen.
Check the cause and countermeasure, and then take appropriate action.
To clear the error:
Check the message that appeared on the screen.
Cause and Countermeasure
Cause (1)
The print head is not installed.
Countermeasure (1)
Install the print head.
Replacing the Print Head
Cause (2)
A new print head with a different resolution has been installed.
Countermeasure (2)
Install a print head with the same resolution as the old print head.
Replacing the Print Head
Contact your SATO technical support center if the error cannot be resolved.
Contact Information for When You Are in Trouble
727
Error Message 1028 (Gap Not Found)
When there is an error with the printer, the error message appears on the screen.
Check the cause and countermeasure, and then take appropriate action.
To clear the error:
Press the
button (OFFLINE) or open/close the print head.
Cause and Countermeasure
Cause (1)
Meandering media.
Countermeasure (1)
Load the media correctly.
Loading the Media
Cause (2)
A label is attached to the media sensor.
Countermeasure (2)
Clean the media sensor.
Cleaning Using the Cleaning Kit
Cause (3)
The media sensor type is incorrect.
Countermeasure (3)
Set the media sensor type which is compatible with the media you use.
Media Sensor Type
Cause (4)
The media sensor level is incorrect.
728
Cause and Countermeasure
Countermeasure (4)
Adjust the media sensor level.
Calibrate
Contact your SATO technical support center if the error cannot be resolved.
Contact Information for When You Are in Trouble
729
Error Message 1035 (I-mark Not Found)
When there is an error with the printer, the error message appears on the screen.
Check the cause and countermeasure, and then take appropriate action.
To clear the error:
Press the
button (OFFLINE) or open/close the print head.
Cause and Countermeasure
Cause (1)
Meandering media.
Countermeasure (1)
Load the media correctly.
Loading the Media
Cause (2)
A label is attached to the media sensor.
Countermeasure (2)
Clean the media sensor.
Cleaning Using the Cleaning Kit
Cause (3)
The media sensor type is incorrect.
Countermeasure (3)
Set the media sensor type which is compatible with the media you use.
Media Sensor Type
Cause (4)
The media sensor level is incorrect.
730
Cause and Countermeasure
Countermeasure (4)
Adjust the media sensor level.
Calibrate
Contact your SATO technical support center if the error cannot be resolved.
Contact Information for When You Are in Trouble
731
Error Message 1046 (EAP Authentication Error (EAP Failure))
When there is an error with the printer, the error message appears on the screen.
Check the cause and countermeasure, and then take appropriate action.
To clear the error:
Change the Wi-Fi settings or press the
button (OFFLINE).
Cause and Countermeasure
Cause
EAP Authentication failure.
Countermeasure
Use the correct Wi-Fi settings.
EAP Conf.
Contact your SATO technical support center if the error cannot be resolved.
Contact Information for When You Are in Trouble
732
Error Message 1047 (EAP Authentication Error (EAP Timeout))
When there is an error with the printer, the error message appears on the screen.
Check the cause and countermeasure, and then take appropriate action.
To clear the error:
Press the
button (OFFLINE).
Cause and Countermeasure
Cause
EAP Authentication failure.
Countermeasure
Use the correct Access Point (AP) and authentication server settings.
EAP Conf.
Contact your SATO technical support center if the error cannot be resolved.
Contact Information for When You Are in Trouble
733
Error Message 1050 (Bluetooth Error)
When there is an error with the printer, the error message appears on the screen.
Check the cause and countermeasure, and then take appropriate action.
To clear the error:
Check the message that appeared on the screen.
Cause and Countermeasure
Cause
Bluetooth module is defective.
Countermeasure
Repair of the Bluetooth module is required. Contact your SATO technical support center.
Contact Information for When You Are in Trouble
734
Error Message 1058 (CRC Check Error)
When there is an error with the printer, the error message appears on the screen.
Check the cause and countermeasure, and then take appropriate action.
To clear the error:
Press the
button (CANCEL) or
button (PRINT).
Cause and Countermeasure
Cause
◦
CRC has not been added to the data.
◦
CRC does not match.
Countermeasure
Check transmitted data and interface settings.
◦
button (PRINT): Continue printing from the print data where the CRC error occurred.
◦
button (CANCEL): Cancel the print data where the CRC error occurred and continue
printing from the next item.
Contact your SATO technical support center if the error cannot be resolved.
Contact Information for When You Are in Trouble
735
Error Message 1066 (Paper Jam) (CL4NX only)
When there is an error with the printer, the error message appears on the screen.
Check the cause and countermeasure, and then take appropriate action.
To clear the error:
Unlock the print head and load the media again.
Cause and Countermeasure
Cause (1)
The media has jammed.
Countermeasure (1)
Remove the jammed media.
Refer to the video for loading the media, for the media path, and for the operation of each part
inside the printer.
Loading the Media
Cause (2)
The media is not loaded correctly.
Countermeasure (2)
Load the media correctly.
Loading the Media
Contact your SATO technical support center if the error cannot be resolved.
Contact Information for When You Are in Trouble
736
Error Message 1073 (Non-RFID Warning) (CL4NX only)
When there is an error with the printer, the error message appears on the screen.
Check the cause and countermeasure, and then take appropriate action.
To clear the error:
Press the
button (CANCEL).
Cause and Countermeasure
Cause
With Non-RFID warning enabled and RFID tag loaded, the items received do not contain an RFID
issue command.
Countermeasure
◦
Add an RFID issue command to the print job.
◦
Disable Non-RFID warning.
Non-RFID Warning
◦
Replace with non-RFID label.
Contact your SATO technical support center if the error cannot be resolved.
Contact Information for When You Are in Trouble
737
Error message 1075 (NFC Error)
When there is an error with the printer, the error message appears on the screen.
Check the cause and countermeasure, and then take appropriate action.
To clear the error:
Press the
button (OFFLINE).
Cause and Countermeasure
Cause
The NFC module is not operating correctly.
Countermeasure
A replacement of the NFC module is required. Contact your SATO technical support center.
Contact Information for When You Are in Trouble
738
Error message 1076 (Invalid Command in NFC)
When there is an error with the printer, the error message appears on the screen.
Check the cause and countermeasure, and then take appropriate action.
To clear the error:
Press the
button (OFFLINE).
Cause and Countermeasure
Cause
A command error occurs and the settings are not saved correctly.
Countermeasure
Check the command.
Contact your SATO technical support center if the error cannot be resolved.
Contact Information for When You Are in Trouble
739
Error Message 1077 (Barcode Reader Connection Error)
When there is an error with the printer, the error message appears on the screen.
Check the cause and countermeasure, and then take appropriate action.
To clear the error:
Connect the barcode checker, or press the
button (OFFLINE).
Cause and Countermeasure
Cause
◦
Could not check the connection of the barcode checker.
◦
Communication between the barcode checker and the printer fails.
Countermeasure
Check the barcode checker, and connect it correctly.
If you do not use the barcode check function, disable the barcode check mode.
Mode
Contact your SATO technical support center if the error cannot be resolved.
Contact Information for When You Are in Trouble
740
Error Message 1078 (Barcode Reading Error)
When there is an error with the printer, the error message appears on the screen.
Check the cause and countermeasure, and then take appropriate action.
To clear the error:
Press the
button (OFFLINE) or
button (CANCEL).
•
Press the
button (OFFLINE) to change to Offline mode while keeping the print job.
•
Press the
button (CANCEL) to cancel the print job and change to Offline mode.
Cause and Countermeasure
Cause
Could not read the barcode correctly.
Countermeasure
◦
Check the layout for printing.
◦
Check the barcode checker position and its settings.
Configuring Optional Barcode Check Function
Contact your SATO technical support center if the error cannot be resolved.
Contact Information for When You Are in Trouble
741
Error Message 1079 (Barcode Reading Error (Checking Start Position
Abnormality))
When there is an error with the printer, the error message appears on the screen.
Check the cause and countermeasure, and then take appropriate action.
To clear the error:
Press the
job.
button (OFFLINE). The printer changes to Offline mode while keeping the print
Cause and Countermeasure
Cause
A value larger than the loaded media length is specified for checking start position.
Countermeasure
◦
Check the layout for printing.
◦
Set a value smaller than the loaded media length for checking start position.
Start Position
Contact your SATO technical support center if the error cannot be resolved.
Contact Information for When You Are in Trouble
742
Error Message 1080 (Barcode Comparison Error)
When there is an error with the printer, the error message appears on the screen.
Check the cause and countermeasure, and then take appropriate action.
To clear the error:
Press the
button (OFFLINE) or
button (CANCEL).
•
Press the
button (OFFLINE) to change to Offline mode while keeping the print job.
•
Press the
button (CANCEL) to cancel the print job and change to Offline mode.
Cause and Countermeasure
Cause
The read result of the barcode does not match the print data.
Countermeasure
◦
Check the layout for printing.
◦
Check the barcode checker position and its settings.
Configuring Optional Barcode Check Function
Contact your SATO technical support center if the error cannot be resolved.
Contact Information for When You Are in Trouble
743
Error Message Indication and Operating Procedure When the SOS (SATO Online Services) Is Enabled (SOS users only)
Error Message Indication and Operating Procedure When the
SOS (SATO Online Services) Is Enabled (SOS users only)
The SOS (SATO Online Services) icon appears in the error message when SOS is enabled.
If you select the SOS icon, a QR code containing the error information and the contact telephone
number appears.
•
Press the
•
If the icon of the guidance videos also appears, select the SOS icon using the
button.
button, and then press the
/
button.
A screen with QR code, phone number, printer serial number, and error number appears after
selecting the SOS icon. Press the
button.
744
The menu for the specialized application for SOS appears after scanning the QR code with a tablet
device or smartphone. A specialized application is required to scan the QR code.
The default phone number that appears is for the SATO technical support center, which is set to a
specific entry. When you want to check the error handling method by phone, inform the operator of the
printer serial number and error number.
Press the
button to return to the error message screen.
745
Contact Information for When You Are in Trouble
Contact Information for When You Are in Trouble
Service and Support Page of Your Nearest SATO Office
Access the following site and select your country from the list. Check the information on the displayed
page.
http://www.satoworldwide.com/service-and-support.aspx
Contact Us
Access the following site to send us your questions or comments.
https://www.satoworldwide.com/contact-us.aspx
746
Product Specifications
Printer Specifications
Hardware
Dimensions and Weight
Item
CL4NX
CL6NX
Width
271 mm (10.67") (Excludes
projection)
338 mm (13.31") (Excludes
projection)
Height
321 mm (12.64") (Excludes
projection)
321 mm (12.64") (Excludes
projection)
Depth
457 mm (18.00") (Excludes
projection)
457 mm (18.00") (Excludes
projection)
Weight
Approximately 15.1 kg (33.28
lbs.) (Excludes media, ribbon and
options)
Approximately 20.3 kg (44.75
lbs.) (Excludes media, ribbon and
options)
Item
CL4NX
CL6NX
Input Voltage
AC 100 - 240 V ±10% (Full-range)
Frequency
50 / 60 Hz
Power Consumption
At peak
Power Supply
At peak
180 W / 190 VA (Print ratio 30%)
Standby
240 W / 308 VA (Print ratio 30%)
Standby
20 W / 40 VA
23 W / 63 VA
Processing
Item
CL4NX
Flash ROM
CPU1
CL6NX
2 GB
CPU2
4 MB
747
Hardware
Item
CL4NX
SDRAM
CPU1
CL6NX
256 MB
CPU2
64 MB
User Registration Area
Maximum 679 MB
Receive Buffer
Buffer full
2.95 MB
Buffer near full
Occurrence: 2MB, Release: 1 MB
Operation
Item
CL4NX
CL6NX
LCD
TFT color 3.5-inch (88.9 mm)
LED
STATUS
Blue/Red
Display Language
English / German / French / Spanish / Italian / Portuguese / Brazilian
Portuguese / Czech / Danish / Dutch / Finnish / Greek / Hungarian /
Norwegian / Polish / Romanian / Russian / Slovak / Swedish / Turkish /
Chinese (Simplified) / Chinese (Traditional) / Korean / Japanese / Arabic /
Thai / Vietnamese / Persian / Indonesian / Hindi / Bulgarian
Environmental Conditions (Without Media and Ribbon)
Item
CL4NX
CL6NX
Operating
Temperature
Continuous/Cutter/Tear-off mode
Continuous/Cutter/Tear-off mode
0 to 40 °C (32 to 104 °F)
Dispenser/Linerless mode
5 to 35 °C (41 to 95 °F)
Storage Temperature
-20 to 60 °C (-4 to 140 °F)
Operating Humidity
Continuous/Dispenser/Cutter/
Tear-off mode
30 to 80% RH (Non-condensing)
748
0 to 40 °C (32 to 104 °F)
Dispenser mode
5 to 35 °C (41 to 95 °F)
30 to 80% RH (Non-condensing)
Item
CL4NX
CL6NX
Linerless mode
30 to 75% RH (Non-condensing)
Storage Humidity
30 to 90% RH (Non-condensing)
Print
Item
CL4NX
CL6NX
Print Method
Direct thermal and thermal transfer
Print Speed
203 dpi
203 dpi
2 to 10 inches/sec (50.8 to 254
mm/sec)
305 dpi
2 to 10 inches/sec (50.8 to 254
mm/sec)
305 dpi
2 to 8 inches/sec (50.8 to 203.2
mm/sec)
2 to 8 inches/sec (50.8 to 203.2
mm/sec)
609 dpi
2 to 6 inches/sec (50.8 to 152
mm/sec)
Linerless mode
2 to 6 inches/sec (50.8 to 152
mm/sec)
Resolution (Head
Density)
Non-printable Area
•
203 dpi (8 dots/mm)
•
203 dpi (8 dots/mm)
•
305 dpi (12 dots/mm)
•
305 dpi (12 dots/mm)
•
609 dpi (24 dots/mm)
Pitch direction (Excludes liner)
Top
1.5 mm (0.06")
Bottom
1.5 mm (0.06")
Width direction (Excludes liner)
Left
1.5 mm (0.06")
Right
1.5 mm (0.06")
749
Hardware
Item
CL4NX
CL6NX
Printable Area
203 dpi
203 dpi
Length 2500 mm (98.42")
Length 2500 mm (98.42")
x Width 104 mm (4.09")
x Width 152 mm (5.98")
305 dpi
305 dpi
Length 1500 mm (59.05")
Length 1500 mm (59.05")
x Width 104 mm (4.09")
x Width 165.3 mm (6.50")
609 dpi
Length 400 mm (15.75")
x Width 104 mm (4.09")
When Head Base Position is set
to Left-justify
maximum print width
167.5 mm (6.59")
Print End Position
203 dpi (1 dot = 0.125 mm
(0.0049"))
203 dpi (1 dot = 0.125 mm
(0.0049"))
1 to 20000 dots
1 to 20000 dots
305 dpi (1 dot = 0.083 mm
(0.0033"))
305 dpi (1 dot = 0.083 mm
(0.0033"))
1 to 18000 dots
1 to 18000 dots
609 dpi (1 dot = 0.042 mm
(0.0017"))
1 to 9600 dots
Print Darkness
Darkness level
1 to 10
Darkness range
A
Sensors
Item
CL4NX
CL6NX
I-mark (Reflective
Type)
Position and sensitivity
Gap (Transmissive
Type)
Position and sensitivity
Head Open
Fixed
Paper End Sensor
Detect with I-mark sensor or Gap sensor
Adjustable
Adjustable
750
Item
CL4NX
Label Near End
Fixed
CL6NX
*This feature is supported on printers from serial number 6B~ and above.
Ribbon End/Ribbon
Near End
Fixed
Dispenser
Fixed
•
Cutter
Fixed
If linerless cutter kit or dispenser •
unit is installed.
Fixed
•
•
If dispenser unit is installed.
Fixed
If cutter unit or linerless cutter kit •
is installed.
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
751
If cutter unit is installed.
Supported Interfaces
Interface
Supported Interfaces
For data communication with the host, the printer supports the following interfaces.
Standard
•
USB Interface (Type B)
•
LAN Interface (Ethernet)
•
Bluetooth Interface
•
NFC Interface
*This feature is supported on printers from serial number 6B~ and above.
•
USB Interface (Type A) x 2
•
RS-232C Interface (DB 9 pins, female)
•
IEEE1284 Interface (Amphenol 36 pins)
•
External Signal (EXT) Interface (Amphenol 14 pins)
Option
•
Wireless LAN Interface
RFID (CL4NX only)
UHF (920 MHz)
ISO/IEC 18000-6 Type C Gen2
UHF (13.56 MHz)
ISO/IEC 15693 (ICODE SLI/SLIX/SLIX-S, Tag-it HF-I, my-d)
ISO/IEC 14443 Type A (NTAG203, NTAG210, NTAG213/215/216, MIFARE UltraLight, MIFARE
UltraLight C, my-d move NFC)
ISO/IEC 18092 (FeliCa Lite-S)
•
Do not connect or disconnect the interface cables (or use a switch box) with power
supplied to either the printer or host. This may cause damage to the interface circuitry
in the printer or host and is not covered by warranty.
•
Wireless LAN is an optional interface.
•
You cannot use the wireless LAN interface and LAN interface at a time.
•
You can set the interface settings of the printer through [Interface] in the [Settings]
menu.
752
USB Interface
This interface complies with the USB2.0 standard.
Install the USB driver to the computer before use.
Basic Specifications
Connector
USB Type B connector
Protocol
Status4, Status5
Power Supply
BUS Power through cable
Pin Assignments
Pin No.
Description
1
VBus
2
-Data
3
+Data
4
GND
Cable Specifications
Cable Connector
USB Type B connector
Cable Length
5 m (16.4 feet) or less
•
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
LAN Interface
Basic Specifications
Connector
RJ-45 Receptacle
Protocol
•
Status3
753
Bluetooth Interface
Basic Specifications
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Gateway Address
•
Status4
•
Status5
•
IPv4
•
IPv6
•
IPv4
•
IPv6
•
IPv4
•
IPv6
Cable Specifications
Cable
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX Category 5
Cable Length
100 m (328 feet) or less
Software Specifications
Supported Protocol
TCP/IP
Network Layer
IP, ICMP
Session Layer
TCP
Application Layer
LPD, FTP, DHCP, HTTPS, SNMP, NTP
•
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Bluetooth Interface
This interface complies with the Bluetooth3.0+EDR standard.
Basic Specifications
Signal Level
Class 2
Communication Distance
10 m (32.8 feet)
Profile
Serial Port Profile
Security Level
None, level 2, 2-1, 2-2, level 3, level 4
PIN Code
1 to 16 characters consisting of ASCII code (20H, 21H, 23H to 7EH)
754
Basic Specifications
Disconnect Timeout (LMP
Layer)
•
60 seconds
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
NFC Interface
This interface complies with the NFC Forum Type 2 Tag.
•
This feature is supported on printers from serial number 6B~ and above.
•
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
RS-232C Interface
This interface complies with the RS-232C standard.
Basic Specifications
Asynchronous ASCII
Half-duplex communication
Bi-directional communication
Data Transmission Rate
2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200 bps
Transmission Form
Start, b1, b2, b3, b4, b5, b6, b7, b8, Stop
•
"b8" will be omitted if using 7 bit oriented.
Data Length
7 or 8 bits (Selected)
Stop Bit
1 or 2 bits (Selected)
Parity Bit
ODD, EVEN, NONE (Selected)
Codes Used
ASCII Character Codes
7 bits
Graphics
8 bits
Control Codes
STX (02H), ETX (03H), ACK (06H), NAK (15H)
Connector
DB-9 Female or equivalent
Signal Levels
High = +5 to +12 V, Low = -5 to -12 V
755
RS-232C Interface
Basic Specifications
Protocol
Ready/Busy, XON/XOFF, Status3, Status4, Status5
Connector Pin Specifications
Pin
No.
I/O
Description
1
-
Data Carrier Detect
2
Input
Receive Data
3
Output
Transmit Data
4
Output
Data Terminal Ready
5
Reference
Signal Ground
6
Input
Data Set Ready
7
Output
Request To Send
8
Input
Clear To Send
9
-
Not connected
Cable Specifications
Cable Connector
DB-9 Male or equivalent
Cable Length
5 m (16.4 feet) or less
•
When using the READY/BUSY control, make sure that the printer is in power on mode
before you send the data from the host.
•
With communication protocols such as XON/XOFF, STATUS3, STATUS4 or STATUS5,
a receive buffer full error will occur when the received data is more than the receive
buffer size (2.95 MB). Send data that is less than 2.95 MB while monitoring the status
of the printer.
•
A parity error will be detected if this error occurs after the reception of ESC+A.
•
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
756
IEEE1284 Interface
This interface complies with the IEEE1284 standard.
Basic Specifications
Connector
Amphenol 36 pins, female
Signal Levels
High-level
+2.4 to +5.0 V
Low-level
+0.0 to +0.4 V
Receive Mode
Single-item buffer, Multi-item buffer
Connector Pin Specifications
Pin
No.
I/O
Description
1
Input
STROBE
2-9
Input
DATA 1 - DATA 8
DATA1
LSB
DATA8
MSB
10
Output
ACK
11
Output
BUSY
12
Output
PAPER EMPTY/PAPER ERROR
13
Output
SELECT
14
Input
AUTO FEED
15
-
Not in use
757
External Signal (EXT) Interface
Connector Pin Specifications
Pin
No.
I/O
Description
16
-
LOGIC Ground
17
-
Frame Ground
18
-
+5 V
19
-
STROBE RETURN
20-27
-
DATA 1 - DATA 8 RETURN
28
-
ACK RETURN
29
-
BUSY RETURN
30
-
PAPER EMPTY RETURN
31
Input
INITIALIZE
32
Output
FAULT
33-35
-
Not in use
36
Input
SELECT INPUT
Cable Specifications
Cable Connector
Amphenol 36 pins, male
Cable Length
1.5 m (5 feet) or less
•
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
External Signal (EXT) Interface
Basic Specifications of External Signal (EXT) Interface
This interface is designed to connect the printer with other peripherals.
Basic Specifications
Connector
Centronics IDC Type 14 pins (Female)
Signal Levels
High-level
+4.2 to +5.0 V
758
Basic Specifications
Low-level
+0.0 to +0.7 V
Connector Pin Specifications of External Signal (EXT) Interface
Pin
No.
I/O
1
Output
Description
Electric Conditions
(Voltage, Current (Max))
Paper End
Withstand voltage 50 V
Outputs a low signal when the paper end is Sink current 50 mA
detected.
2
-
GND
-
Reference Signal Ground
3
Output
Ribbon End
Withstand voltage 50 V
Outputs a low signal when the ribbon end
is detected.
4
Output
Machine Error
Sink current 50 mA
Withstand voltage 50 V
Outputs a low signal when an error such as Sink current 50 mA
the head open error is detected.
5
Input
Print Start signal (PRIN)
High: high impedance
Prints one media when a low signal is
detected.
759
Low: more than -15 mA, 0 V
External Signal (EXT) Interface
Pin
No.
I/O
6
Output
Description
Electric Conditions
(Voltage, Current (Max))
Print Done/Print End signal (PREND)
Outputs a signal when the media print is
completed.
7
Input
Reprint signal (PRIN2)
Withstand voltage 50 V
Sink current 50 mA
High: high impedance
Prints the previously printed content again
when a low signal is detected.
Low: more than -15 mA, 0 V
8
Input
External power supply
5V
9
Output
Offline
Withstand voltage 50 V
Outputs a low signal when the printer is in
Offline mode.
10
Output
Ribbon Near End
Sink current 50 mA
Withstand voltage 50 V
Outputs a high signal when the ribbon near Sink current 50 mA
end is detected.
11
-
-
-
12
-
+24 V ± 10%
2A
13
-
Vcc +5 V
500 mA
14
-
-
-
*
Output
Wait signal for dispense completion
Outputs a low signal when the dispense is
completed.
Withstand voltage 50 V
Sink current 50 mA
You can set the pin number for output
through the [Settings] > [Interface] >
[External I/O] > [Signals] > [Outputs] menu.
*
Output
Label Near End signal
Withstand voltage 50 V
Outputs a high signal when the label near
end is detected.
You can set the pin number for output
through the [Settings] > [Interface] >
[External I/O] > [Signals] > [Outputs] menu.
*This feature is supported on printers from
serial number 6B~ and above.
760
Sink current 50 mA
•
You can set the external signal (EXT) type (TYPE1 to TYPE4) for Print Done output
signal of pin No. 6. Refer to the [EXT Mode] screen of the [Settings] > [Interface] >
[External I/O] > [Signals] menu for details.
•
You can set the pin number for input and output through the [Settings] > [Interface] >
[External I/O] > [Signals] > [Inputs] and [Outputs] menu.
•
The Print Done signal of pin No. 6 is not outputted when 0 is specified in the number of
cuts in the command specifying the number of cuts during the cutter operation.
Timing Chart of the EXT Input Signal
Item
Input Waveform
Print Start
Reprint (No
Print Start
Signal)
Reprint
(With Print
Start Signal)
761
External Signal (EXT) Interface
•
Keep the print start signal (PRIN) to "Low" until the print end signal (Print done) is
outputted. For maintaining the print start signal (PRIN), refer to the Maintaining the
Print Start Signal (PRIN).
•
Keep the output reprint signal (PRIN2) for more than 10 ms. When signal is outputted
for shorter than 10 ms, and reprint signal is not acknowledged, the printer does not
perform reprinting.
Maintaining the Print Start Signal (PRIN)
Item
Input Waveform
Print Start
Print End
(PREND)
Signal
•
Rise or fall time (T1) of Print Done signal is less than 150 ns. You have to consider the time when
outputting the signal from the connected devices.
•
When the print start signal and reprint signal are outputted simultaneously, the print start signal is
enabled and the printer does not perform reprinting.
762
•
The reprint signal is valid only from the time of the print operation end (QTY=0) until the next print
data reception. Other than that, the printer does not perform reprinting.
Timing Chart of the EXT Output Signal
Standard Specification
Item
Output Waveform
Basic
Operation
Paper End
Ribbon End
763
External Signal (EXT) Interface
Item
Output Waveform
Machine
Error
Ribbon
Near End/
Label Near
End
*Label
Near End is
supported
on printers
from serial
number 6B~
and above.
Offline
If RFID Mode Is Enabled (CL4NX only)
764
Item
Output Waveform
Basic
Operation
Paper End
Ribbon End
765
Wireless LAN Interface
Timing Chart of the Wait Signal for Dispense Completion
Item
Output Waveform
Backfeed
After Print
Backfeed
Before Print
1. When the wait signal for dispense completion is enabled, note that the output timing of the print
end signal (print done) differs between Backfeed After Print and Backfeed Before Print.
a. In Backfeed After Print, the print end signal (print done) is output after the label waiting for
dispense is removed and the printer backfeeds to the print start position.
b. In Backfeed Before Print, the print end signal (print done) is output after the printer feeds the label
to the dispense position.
2. "Printed 1 piece" includes the operation of the printer feeding the label to the dispense position
after printing.
Wireless LAN Interface
This interface complies with the IEEE802.11a/b/g/n standard.
•
Before using wireless LAN near medical devices and facilities, consult your system
administrator.
766
Basic Specifications
Protocol
Status3, Status4, Status5
IP Address
•
IPv4
•
IPv6
•
IPv4
•
IPv6
•
IPv4
•
IPv6
Subnet Mask
Gateway Address
Data Transfer Method
802.11a
Max 54 Mbps
802.11n
Max 135 Mbps
802.11b
Max 11 Mbps
802.11g
Max 54 Mbps
•
Frequency Band
These are the logical values based on the wireless
LAN specifications and are not the actual data transfer
speeds.
•
2.4 GHz (2.412 to 2.485 GHz)
•
5 GHz
Communication Channel
The number of channels you can set varies depending on the
region where you use the printer.
SSID
Any alphanumeric character (Maximum 32)
Authentication
•
Open System
•
Shared Key
•
WPA/WPA2
•
Perform the RADIUS server authentication using 802.1x (EAPTLS, LEAP, EAP-TTLS, EAP-PEAP, EAP-FAST protocol)
•
None
•
WEP (64 bits/128 bits)
•
AES (WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK, WPA-802.1x/WPA2-802.1x
authentication)
•
Infrastructure
Encryption
Communication Mode
767
Wireless LAN Interface
Basic Specifications
•
Ad Hoc
Software Specifications
Supported Protocol
TCP/IP
Network Layer
IP, ICMP
Session Layer
TCP
Application Layer
LPD, FTP, DHCP, HTTPS, SNMP, NTP
•
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
768
Built-in Functions
Item
CL4NX
CL6NX
Built-in Functions
•
Status return
•
Status return
•
Graphic
•
Graphic
•
Sequential number
•
Sequential number
•
Form overlay
•
Form overlay
•
Character modification
•
Character modification
•
Black/white inversion
•
Black/white inversion
•
Ruled line
•
Ruled line
•
Dump list
•
Dump list
•
Format registration
•
Format registration
•
Outline font
•
Outline font
•
Outline modification
•
Outline modification
•
Zero slash switching
•
Zero slash switching
•
Guidance video
•
Guidance video
•
LCD display in 31 languages
•
LCD display in 31 languages
•
Cleaning notification
•
Cleaning notification
•
Calendar (Optional)
•
Calendar (Optional)
•
RFID (Optional)
•
Barcode check (Optional)
•
Barcode check (Optional)
•
Password lock
•
Password lock
•
Logo, font download
•
Logo, font download
•
LCD turns off
•
LCD turns off
•
Standby
•
Standby
•
Total print count indication
•
Total print count indication
•
Reprint
•
Reprint
•
Power on in Online mode
•
Power on in Online mode
•
Feed after error
•
Feed after error
•
Feed at power on
•
Feed at power on
•
Command error indication
•
Command error indication
•
Non-standard mode
•
Non-standard mode
•
Priority settings
•
Priority settings
•
Broken head element check
•
Head open detection
•
Media size check
•
Paper end detection
Self-diagnosis
Functions
769
Built-in Functions
Item
CL4NX
•
CL6NX
Label near end detection
*This feature is supported on printers from serial number 6B~ and
above.
Adjustment Functions
•
•
Ribbon end detection
•
Ribbon near end detection
•
Test print
•
Cutter open check (If cutter unit is installed)
•
Label detection at dispensing (If dispenser unit is installed)
•
Print darkness
•
Print position
•
Media stop position
•
Buzzer
•
LCD brightness
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
770
Printer Languages
•
SBPL (Includes XML support)
•
SZPL
•
SDPL
•
SIPL
•
STCL
•
SEPL
•
AEP
771
Standards
Standards
Item
CL4NX
Safety Standards
UL 60950-1
CL6NX
CSA C22.2 No.60950-1
EN60950-1
CCC
KC
RCM
IRAM
BIS
EAC
EMC Standards
FCC-B, FCC-C
ICES-003, IC
EN55022 Class A, EN55024, R&TTE
CCC, SRRC
KC
IDA
SIRIM
PTQC
NTC
DGPT
RCM
IRAM, CNC
ANATEL
WPC
Environmental
Standard
Compatible with the RoHS directive
Energy Saving
International ENERGY STAR program
•
®
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
772
Usable Media and Ribbon
Media
•
Use genuine media made by SATO.
Type
•
Media roll (Face-in wound/face-out wound)
•
Fan-fold media
Size
•
Continuous
Item
CL4NX
CL6NX
Media Length
203 dpi
203 dpi
6 to 2497 mm (0.24" to 98.30")
305 dpi
16 to 2497 mm (0.63" to 98.30")
305 dpi
6 to 1497 mm (0.24" to 58.94")
16 to 1497 mm (0.63" to 58.94")
609 dpi
6 to 397 mm (0.24" to 15.63")
Media Length (With
Liner)
203 dpi
203 dpi
9 to 2500 mm (0.35" to 98.42")
305 dpi
19 to 2500 mm (0.75" to 98.42")
305 dpi
9 to 1500 mm (0.35" to 59.05")
19 to 1500 mm (0.75" to 59.05")
609 dpi
9 to 400 mm (0.35" to 15.75")
Media Width
•
22 to 128 mm (0.87" to 5.04")
•
47 to 177 mm (1.85" to 6.96")
Media Width (With
Liner)
•
25 to 131 mm (0.98" to 5.16")
•
50 to 180 mm (1.97" to 7.01")
*Above pitch and width are valid for die-cut labels. For media without liner like tags, refer to the
value 'with liner'.
•
Tear-Off/Cutter
773
Media
Item
CL4NX
CL6NX
Media Length
203 dpi
203 dpi
17 to 2497 mm (0.67" to 98.30")
305 dpi
17 to 2497 mm (0.67" to 98.30")
305 dpi
17 to 1497 mm (0.67" to 58.94")
17 to 1497 mm (0.67" to 58.94")
609 dpi
17 to 397 mm (0.67" to 15.63")
Media Length (With
Liner)
203 dpi
203 dpi
20 to 2500 mm (0.79" to 98.42")
305 dpi
20 to 2500 mm (0.79" to 98.42")
305 dpi
20 to 1500 mm (0.79" to 59.05")
20 to 1500 mm (0.79" to 59.05")
609 dpi
20 to 400 mm (0.79" to 15.75")
When Print Mode is set to Cut &
Print, the minimum media length
for each print speed is the following
value.
When Print Mode is set to Cut &
Print, the minimum media length
for each print speed is the following
value.
2 ips: 40 mm (1.57")
3 ips: 58 mm (2.28")
2 ips: 40 mm (1.57")
4 ips: 75 mm (2.95")
3 ips: 58 mm (2.28")
5 ips: 93 mm (3.66")
4 ips: 75 mm (2.95")
6 ips: 110 mm (4.33")
5 ips: 93 mm (3.66")
7 ips: 125 mm (4.92")
6 ips: 110 mm (4.33")
8 ips: 140 mm (5.51")
7 ips: 125 mm (4.92")
9 ips: 156 mm (6.14")
8 ips: 140 mm (5.51")
10 ips: 171 mm (6.73")
9 ips: 156 mm (6.14")
10 ips: 171 mm (6.73")
Media Width
•
22 to 128 mm (0.87" to 5.04")
•
47 to 177 mm (1.85" to 6.96")
Media Width (With
Liner)
•
25 to 131 mm (0.98" to 5.16")
•
50 to 180 mm (1.97" to 7.01")
*Above pitch and width are valid for die-cut labels. For media without liner like tags, refer to the
value 'with liner'.
•
Dispenser
Item
CL4NX
Media Length
•
CL6NX
27 to 397 mm (1.06" to 15.63")
774
Item
CL4NX
CL6NX
Media Length (With
Liner)
•
30 to 400 mm (1.18" to 15.75")
Media Width
•
22 to 128 mm (0.87" to 5.04")
•
47 to 177 mm (1.85" to 6.96")
Media Width (With
Liner)
•
25 to 131 mm (0.98" to 5.16")
•
50 to 180 mm (1.97" to 7.01")
Diameter of Liner
Winding
Maximum φ120 mm (4.72")
*Above pitch and width are valid for die-cut labels. For media without liner like tags, refer to the
value 'with liner'.
•
Linerless
Item
CL4NX
CL6NX
Media Length
30 to 120 mm (1.18" to 4.72")
-
Media Width
60 to 118 mm (2.36" to 4.65")
-
•
The usable media sizes, the output speed and print quality vary depending on the
media specification, media and ribbon combination, printer settings and outputting
environment. It is recommended to perform a test print with the media and ribbon to be
used in advance.
Roll Diameter (Media Roll)
•
Maximum φ220 mm (φ8.66")
•
When using a dispenser unit with liner rewinder
Maximum φ220 mm (φ8.66")
Core Diameter (Media Roll)
•
φ76 mm (φ3"), φ101 mm (φ4")
•
When using a dispenser unit with liner rewinder
φ76 mm (φ3")
•
Recommend to use 4" core for thick paper (more than 150 μm (0.0059")), nonadhesive media and RFID tags/labels (CL4NX only).
Height (Fan-fold Media)
•
Maximum 200 mm (7.87")
•
When the printer and media are configured to the same height.
775
Media
Thickness
•
60 to 268 μm (0.060 to 0.268 mm (0.0024" to 0.011"))
776
Ribbon
•
Use genuine ribbon made by SATO.
Item
CL4NX
CL6NX
Size
Length
Length
Maximum 600 m (1968.5 feet)
Maximum 600 m (1968.5 feet)
Width
Width
39.5 to 128 mm (1.55" to 5.04")
59 to 177 mm (2.32" to 6.98")
•
When the width of the ribbon
is 39.5 mm (1.55"), the
maximum length is 450 m
(1476.4 feet).
•
The maximum length of the
ribbon varies depending on
the ribbon type.
•
Use the ribbon that is wider
than the media.
Wind
Direction
Both face-out/face-in
Winding
Method
Coreless
777
•
The maximum length of the
ribbon varies depending on
the ribbon type.
•
Use the ribbon that is wider
than the media.
Fonts
Usable Fonts and Barcodes
Fonts
Bitmap Fonts
Item
CL4NX
U
9 dots H x 5 dots W
S
15 dots H x 8 dots W
M
20 dots H x 13 dots W
WB
30 dots H x 18 dots W
WL
52 dots H x 28 dots W
XU
9 dots H x 5 dots W
XS
17 dots H x 17 dots W
XM
24 dots H x 24 dots W
XB
48 dots H x 48 dots W
XL
48 dots H x 48 dots W
X20
9 dots H x 5 dots W
X21
17 dots H x 17 dots W
X22
24 dots H x 24 dots W
X23
48 dots H x 48 dots W
X24
48 dots H x 48 dots W
OCR-A
203 dpi
CL6NX
203 dpi
22 dots H x 15 dots W
305 dpi
22 dots H x 15 dots W
305 dpi
33 dots H x 22 dots W
33 dots H x 22 dots W
609 dpi
66 dots H x 44 dots W
OCR-B
203 dpi
203 dpi
24 dots H x 20 dots W
305 dpi
24 dots H x 20 dots W
305 dpi
36 dots H x 30 dots W
778
36 dots H x 30 dots W
Item
CL4NX
CL6NX
609 dpi
72 dots H x 60 dots W
JIS208 Kanji Fonts
(Mincho/Gothic)
•
16 dots H x 16 dots W
•
24 dots H x 24 dots W
•
22 dots H x 22 dots W
•
32 dots H x 32 dots W
•
40 dots H x 40 dots W
•
16 dots H x 16 dots W
•
24 dots H x 24 dots W
•
22 dots H x 22 dots W
•
32 dots H x 32 dots W
•
40 dots H x 40 dots W
Compatible Kanji
Fonts (Mincho)
•
16 dots H x 16 dots W
•
24 dots H x 24 dots W
Simplified Chinese
Characters
•
16 dots H x 16 dots W
•
24 dots H x 24 dots W
Traditional Chinese
Characters
•
24 dots H x 24 dots W
Korean Fonts
•
16 dots H x 16 dots W
•
24 dots H x 24 dots W
JIS0213 Kanji Fonts
(Gothic)
Scalable Fonts
Item
CL4NX
CL6NX
Rasterized Font
•
SATO CG Sleek
•
SATO CG Stream
•
SATO 0
•
SATO Alpha Bold Condensed
•
SATO Beta Bold Italic
•
SATO Folio Bold
•
SATO Futura Medium Condensed
•
SATO Gamma
•
SATO OCR-A
•
SATO OCR-B
779
Fonts
Item
CL4NX
Rasterized Font
(Multilingual)
Outline Fonts
•
CL6NX
•
SATO Sans
•
SATO Serif
•
SATO Symbol Set
•
SATO WingBats
•
SATO Vica
•
SATO Hebe Sans
•
SATO Hebe Sans Arabic
•
SATO Hebe Sans Thai
•
SATO Hebe Sans Hebrew
•
SATO Hebe Sans Hindi
•
SATO Gothic Traditional Chinese
•
SATO Gothic Japanese
•
SATO Gothic Simplified Chinese
•
SATO Gothic Korean
•
SATO Silver Serif
•
SATO Mincho Traditional Chinese
•
SATO Mincho Japanese
•
SATO Mincho Simplified Chinese
•
SATO Mincho Korean
•
SATO Roman Arabic
•
Helvetica Outline Font
•
JIS208 Kanji Outline Fonts
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
780
X20 Font
The X20 font is a bitmap font with a basic size of 9 dots H x 5 dots W.
This supports the fixed pitch only.
A font sample is shown in the figure below.
781
X21 Font
The X21 font is a bitmap font with a basic size of 17 dots H x 17 dots W.
You can select fixed pitch or proportional pitch.
A font sample is shown in the figure below.
•
To select proportional pitch, enable [SBPL] > [Font Settings] > [Proportional] in the
[Applications] menu, or specify with the command.
782
X22 Font
The X22 font is a bitmap font with a basic size of 24 dots H x 24 dots W.
You can select fixed pitch or proportional pitch.
A font sample is shown in the figure below.
•
To select proportional pitch, enable [SBPL] > [Font Settings] > [Proportional] in the
[Applications] menu, or specify with the command.
783
X23 Font
The X23 font is a bitmap font with a basic size of 48 dots H x 48 dots W.
You can select fixed pitch or proportional pitch.
A font sample is shown in the figure below.
•
To select proportional pitch, enable [SBPL] > [Font Settings] > [Proportional] in the
[Applications] menu, or specify with the command.
784
X24 Font
The X24 font is a bitmap font with a basic size of 48 dots H x 48 dots W.
You can select fixed pitch or proportional pitch.
A font sample is shown in the figure below.
•
To select proportional pitch, enable [SBPL] > [Font Settings] > [Proportional] in the
[Applications] menu, or specify with the command.
785
U Font
The U font is a bitmap font with a basic size of 9 dots H x 5 dots W.
This supports fixed pitch only.
The figure below is a font sample when the code on page 858 is used.
•
The character set varies according to the settings in [SBPL] > [Font Settings] > [Code
Page] in the [Applications] menu.
786
S Font
The S font is a bitmap font with a basic size of 15 dots H x 8 dots W.
This supports fixed pitch only.
The figure below is a font sample when the code on page 858 is used.
•
The character set varies according to the settings in [SBPL] > [Font Settings] > [Code
Page] in the [Applications] menu.
787
M Font
The M font is a bitmap font with a basic size of 20 dots H x 13 dots W.
This supports fixed pitch only.
The figure below is a font sample when the code on page 858 is used.
•
The character set varies according to the settings in [SBPL] > [Font Settings] > [Code
Page] in the [Applications] menu.
788
WB Font
The WB font is a bitmap font with a basic size of 30 dots H x 18 dots W.
This supports fixed pitch only.
The figure below is a font sample when the code on page 858 is used.
•
The character set varies according to the settings in [SBPL] > [Font Settings] > [Code
Page] in the [Applications] menu.
789
WL Font
The WL font is a bitmap font with a basic size of 52 dots H x 28 dots W.
This supports fixed pitch only.
The figure below is a font sample when the code on page 858 is used.
•
The character set varies according to the settings in [SBPL] > [Font Settings] > [Code
Page] in the [Applications] menu.
790
XU Font
The XU font is a bitmap font with a basic size of 9 dots H x 5 dots W.
You can select fixed pitch or proportional pitch.
The figure below is a font sample when the code on page 858 is used.
•
To select proportional pitch, enable [SBPL] > [Font Settings] > [Proportional] in the
[Applications] menu, or specify with the command.
•
The character set varies according to the settings in [SBPL] > [Font Settings] > [Code
Page] in the [Applications] menu.
791
XS Font
The XS font is a bitmap font with a basic size of 17 dots H x 17 dots W.
You can select fixed pitch or proportional pitch.
The figure below is a font sample when the code on page 858 is used.
•
To select proportional pitch, enable [SBPL] > [Font Settings] > [Proportional] in the
[Applications] menu, or specify with the command.
•
The character set varies according to the settings in [SBPL] > [Font Settings] > [Code
Page] in the [Applications] menu.
792
XM Font
The XM font is a bitmap font with a basic size of 24 dots H x 24 dots W.
You can select fixed pitch or proportional pitch.
The figure below is a font sample when the code on page 858 is used.
•
To select proportional pitch, enable [SBPL] > [Font Settings] > [Proportional] in the
[Applications] menu, or specify with the command.
•
The character set varies according to the settings in [SBPL] > [Font Settings] > [Code
Page] in the [Applications] menu
793
XB Font
The XB font is a bitmap font with a basic size of 48 dots H x 48 dots W.
You can select fixed pitch or proportional pitch.
The figure below is a font sample when the code on page 858 is used.
•
To select proportional pitch, enable [SBPL] > [Font Settings] > [Proportional] in the
[Applications] menu, or specify with the command.
•
The character set varies according to the settings in [SBPL] > [Font Settings] > [Code
Page] in the [Applications] menu.
794
XL Font
The XL font is a bitmap font with a basic size of 48 dots H x 48 dots W.
You can select fixed pitch or proportional pitch.
The figure below is a font sample when the code on page 858 is used.
•
To select proportional pitch, enable [SBPL] > [Font Settings] > [Proportional] in the
[Applications] menu, or specify with the command.
•
The character set varies according to the settings in [SBPL] > [Font Settings] > [Code
Page] in the [Applications] menu.
795
OCR-A Font
The OCR-A font is a bitmap font. The basic size varies depending on the print resolutions as follows:
Print Resolution
Basic Font Size
CL4NX
CL6NX
203 dpi (8 dots/mm)
22 dots H x 15 dots W
22 dots H x 15 dots W
305 dpi (12 dots/mm)
33 dots H x 22 dots W
33 dots H x 22 dots W
609 dpi (24 dots/mm)
66 dots H x 44 dots W
-
This supports fixed pitch only.
The figure below is a font sample when the print resolution is 203 dpi (8 dots/mm).
796
OCR-B Font
The OCR-B font is a bitmap font. The basic size varies depending on the print resolutions as follows:
Print Resolution
Basic Font Size
CL4NX
CL6NX
203 dpi (8 dots/mm)
24 dots H x 20 dots W
24 dots H x 20 dots W
305 dpi (12 dots/mm)
36 dots H x 30 dots W
36 dots H x 30 dots W
609 dpi (24 dots/mm)
72 dots H x 60 dots W
-
This supports fixed pitch only.
The figure below is a font sample with the print resolution 203 dpi (8 dots/mm).
797
Outline Fonts
The font type, font size and font shape can be specified for the outline fonts.
For the font type, you can select fixed pitch or proportional pitch. You can also specify kanji, but kanji
supports fixed pitch only.
The figure below is a sample of some font shapes. Shapes such as normal font, white characters on
black background, grey font, font with shadow, mirrored font and italic font can be specified.
798
The figure below is a font sample with the standard font.
•
The font size can be specified from 1 to 999 dots, but if the font size is too small for the
font shape, it cannot be recognized as a font. Please be careful. Also, if the specified
font size is too small, it may collapse, depending on the font.
799
Multilingual Font
The printer contains various multilingual fonts.
The figure below is a sample of some of the multilingual fonts.
800
Scalable Fonts
The printer contains various scalable fonts.
The figure below is a sample of some scalable fonts.
801
Barcodes
Barcodes
Code Type
CL4NX
Barcodes
•
UPC-A/UPC-E
•
JAN/EAN-13/8
•
CODE39, CODE93, CODE128
•
GS1-128(UCC/EAN128)
•
CODABAR(NW-7)
•
ITF
•
Industrial 2 of 5
•
Matrix 2 of 5
•
MSI
•
Customer Barcode
•
POSTNET
•
UPC add-on code
•
BOOKLAND
•
USPS code
•
GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional
•
GS1 DataBar Truncated
•
GS1 DataBar Stacked
•
GS1 DataBar Stacked Omnidirectional
•
GS1 DataBar Limited
•
GS1 DataBar Expanded
•
GS1 DataBar Expanded Stacked
•
QR Code
•
Micro QR Code
•
PDF417
•
Micro PDF
•
Maxi Code
•
GS1 Data Matrix
•
Data Matrix (ECC200)
•
Aztec Code
•
EAN-13 Composite (CC-A/CC-B)
•
EAN-8 Composite (CC-A/CC-B)
•
UPC-A Composite (CC-A/CC-B)
•
UPC-E Composite (CC-A/CC-B)
•
GS1 DataBar Composite (CC-A/CC-B)
2D Codes
Composite Symbols
CL6NX
802
Code Type
•
CL4NX
CL6NX
•
GS1 DataBar Truncated Composite (CC-A/CC-B)
•
GS1 DataBar Stacked Composite (CC-A/CC-B)
•
GS1 DataBar Expanded Stacked Composite (CC-A/CC-B)
•
GS1 DataBar Expanded Composite (CC-A/CC-B)
•
GS1 DataBar Stacked Omnidirectional Composite (CC-A/CC-B)
•
GS1 DataBar Limited Composite (CC-A/CC-B)
•
GS1-128 Composite (CC-A/CC-B/CC-C)
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
803
SOS (SATO Online Services) (SOS users only)
Support and Warranty
SOS (SATO Online Services) (SOS users only)
The SOS (SATO Online Services) is a remote maintenance service that monitors your printer status
for 24 hours and supports its stable operation. To use this service, create an SOS account and add
your printer.
For details on the SOS, refer to the SOS Portal Site.
http://www.sato-sos.com/en
804
Maintenance Support
SATO provides maintenance support to ensure reliable operation of your printer.
Access the following site and select your country from the list. Check the information on the displayed
page.
http://www.satoworldwide.com/service-and-support.aspx
805
Warranty Period for Consumables
Warranty Period for Consumables
For information on the warranty period for print heads, platen rollers and cutters, refer to the SATO
Global Warranty Program.
http://www.satoworldwide.com/global-warranty-program.aspx
806
Back Cover
January 2017
Version 1
Download PDF
Similar pages